Skip to main content

Full text of "Pioneers on land and sea; stories of the eastern states and of ocean explorers"

See other formats


HISTORY  STORIES 

PIONEERS 
N  LAND  AND  SEA 

Mc  MURK  Y 


9^ 


Pioneers  on  Land  and  Sea 


PIONEER    HISTORY    STORIES 


FIRST    BOOK 


Pioneers  on   Land  and  Sea 


STORIES   OF   THE   EASTERN  STATES 
AND   OF  OCEAN  EXPLORERS 


BY 
£0^ 

CHARLES   A.    McMURRY,  PH.D. 


THE   MACMILLAN    COMPANY 

LONDON:   MACMILLAN  &  CO.,  LTD. 
1916 

All  rights  reserved 


M 


(. 
4, 


COPYRIGHT,  1904, 
BY  THE  MACMILLAN  COMPANY. 


Set  up,  electrotyped  and  published  March,  1904. 
Reprinted  September,  1904;  January,  July,  November, 
1905  ;  January,  1908  ;  March,  1909  ;  January,  August, 
1911;  September,  1912;  March,  1913;  January,  1915; 
February,  September,  1916. 


14  & 

Bancroft 


PREFACE 

THIS  is  the  first  of  three  volumes  of  American  History 
Stories  for  use  in  intermediate  grades.  It  contains  the 
accounts  of  the  early  explorers  and  frontiersmen  along 
the  Atlantic  coast  and  of  the  voyages  of  the  great  ocean 
pioneers.  They  deal  with  great  events  and  persons  in 
the  simple  setting  of  pioneer  life. 

The  importance  of  these  stories  to  American  children 
in  the  intermediate  grades  is  now  fully  seen.  In  the 
simple  and  interesting  form  of  personal  biography  they 
photograph  the  liveliest  scenes  of  our  early  history. 
European  teachers  may  well  envy  us  this  copious  stream 
of  pioneer  story.  No  European  country  has  anything 
that  can  be  safely  compared  with  it  in  richness  and 
value. 

The  myths  and  early  traditions  of  Europe  we  are 
making  good  use  of  in  our  schools,  but  in  entering  upon 
the  field  of  real  history,  the  pioneer  and  frontier  life  of 
America  abounds  in  the  striking  scenes  of  simple  folk- 
life  in  its  rude  beginnings.  It  is  easy  for  children  to 
lose  themselves  in  this  frontier  scenery  and  to  partake 
of  its  spirit. 


VI  PREFACE 

These  narratives  are  based  on  the  most  trustworthy 
historical  documents,  source  materials  which  have  been 
tested  by  our  best  historians,  as  Parkman,  Fiske,  Ban 
croft,  Ha^t,  and  others.  Some  of  the  narratives  are 
taken  directly  from  undoubted  source  materials,  the 
testimony  of  eye-witnesses  and  chief  actors. 

In  connection  with  the  story  of  Champlain  the  teacher 
should  read  Parkman's  "Pioneers  of  France  in  the  New 
World,"  from  which  some  quotations  are  made. 

In  working,  up  the  stories  of  Columbus,  Magellan,  and 
Cortes,  John  Fiske's  two  volumes  on  "  The  Discovery  of 
America"  have  been  freely  consulted  and  occasionally 
quoted.  Fiske's  "Dutch  and  Quaker  Settlements"  and 
"Old  Virginia  and  Her  Neighbors"  have  also  been  used 
in  the  stories  of  Hudson  and  John  Smith. 

If  the  use  of  these  stories  in  schools  should  lead 
teachers  and  children  to  a  closer  acquaintance  with  the 
full  works  of  Parkman  and  Fiske  it  would  be  a  very 
fortunate  result. 

Scudder's  "  Life  of  Washington,"  from  which  much  of 
the  story  of  Washington's  early  life  is  derived,  is  probably 
the  best  biography  of  him  for  grammar  grades,  and 
should  become  familiar  to  all  the  children  in  our  schools ; 
likewise  the  Fiske-Irving  "Life  of  Washington." 

The  chronology  of  history  stories  in  the  pioneer  period 
is  of  little  consequence  to  the  children.  A  first-class 


PREFACE  Vii 

story,  full  and  rich  in  local  color,  personal  and  concrete 
in  its  whole  setting,  is  desired.  Two  or  three  years  later, 
in  the  grammar  grades,  these  stories  will  find  their  proper 
place  and  connections  in  a  chronological  outline. 

Maps  are  required  at  every  step  in  these  stories.  They 
are  necessary  not  only  to  a  proper  understanding  of  the 
stories,  but  they  illuminate  the  whole  early  geography  of 
North  America  and  contribute  much  interest  to  the 
parallel  lessons  in  American  geography  in  these  grades. 

For  children  of  the  eastern  states  these  stories,  which 
are  nearest  home,  are  the  best  beginnings  of  history. 
The  two  following  volumes,  "  Pioneers  of  the  Mississippi 
Valley  "  and  "  Pioneers  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  and  the 
West"  are  the  natural  continuation  of  the  series. 

The  "  Special  Method  in  History  "  in  Chapter  III  dis 
cusses  in  full  the  value  of  these  stories  and  the  method 
of  handling  them  in  classes. 

DE  KALB,  ILLINOIS, 
October  2, 1903. 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 
CHAPTER  .. 

I.    CHAMPLAIN  IN  NEW  FRANCE    ...... 

II.    HENRY  HUDSON  ......... 

III.  WALTER  RALEIGH      ....        ..... 

68 

IV.  JOHN  SMITH        ..... 

103 
V.    POPHAM'S  SETTLEMENT 

VI.    JOHN  SMITH'S  DESCRIPTION  OF  NEW  ENGLAND 
VII.    CHRISTOPHER  COLUMBU 
VIII.    FERDINAND  MAGELLAN     ...... 

•f  ort 

IX.    HERNANDO  CORTES    .        . 

.    222 
X.    PONCE  DE  LEON         •        •        •        •  . 

227 
XI.    GEORGE  WASHINGTON       ..... 


122 
VII.    CHRISTOPHER  COLUMBUS    . 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

MUH 

CHAMPLAIN  AND  THE  INDIANS 17 

CHAMPLAIN'S  ATTACK  ON  AN  IROQUOIS  FORT 31 

EARLY  QUEBEC 33 

THE  PALISADES  OF  THE  HUDSON 38 

THE  "HALF  MOON"  IN  THE  HIGHLANDS    .        .        .        .        .        .41 

SIR  WALTER  RALEIGH 53 

RETURN  OF  WHITE  TO  ROANOKE  ISLAND 63 

CAPTAIN  JOHN  SMITH  ON  THE  BLOCK 80 

CROWNING  THE  CHIEF  OF  THE  POWHATANS 83 

POCAHONTAS 96 

A  NEW  ENGLAND  BLOCK-HOUSE 105 

CAPTAIN  JOHN  SMITH 108 

INDIANS  FISHING 120 

COLUMBUS '  .123 

THE  DEPARTURE  OF  COLUMBUS 132 

THE  FLEET  OF  COLUMBUS 136 

THE  LANDING  OF  COLUMBUS 139 

RECEPTION  OF  COLUMBUS  ON  HIS  RETURN 147 

MAGELLAN 161 

CORTES 187 

THE  PUBLIC  ENTRY  OF  CORTES  INTO  MEXICO 205 

EARLY  SPANISH  SETTLEMENT  IN  FLORIDA          225 

MONUMENT  MARKING  THE  BIRTHPLACE  OF  GEORGE  WASHINGTON  .  227 

AN  OLD  VIEW  OF  MOUNT  VERNON 235 

OPENING  PAGE  OF  WASHINGTON'S  JOURNAL 239 

GEORGE  WASHINGTON 251 

xi 


MAPS 

THE  WORLD Frontispiece 

PAGE 

THE  MOUTH  OF  THE  ST.  LAWREXCE   .        .        .        .        ...        .  8 

DISTRIBUTION  OF  INDIAN  TRIBES 11 

CAROLINA 57 

VIRGINIA 74 

SMITH'S  MAP  OF  NEW  ENGLAND  ........  110 

THE  WORLD  AS  KNOWN  IN  THE  TIME  OF  COLUMBUS        .        .        .  125 

VOYAGES  OF  COLUMBUS  AND  OF  OTHER  DISCOVERERS      .        .        .  134 

ROUTE  OF  MAGELLAN  AND  OF  HIS  SHIP 171 

ROUTE  OF  PONCE  DE  LEON  .  223 


xtt 


Pioneers  on  Land  and  Sea 


PIONEERS   ON  LAND   AND   SEA 

CHAPTER  I 

CHAMPLAIN  IN   NEW  FRANCE  * 

SAMUEL  DE  CHAMPLAIN,  who  has  been  called  the  Father 
of  New  France,  was  a  French  soldier  of  noble  family. 
His  first  voyage  to  New  France  was  made  in  1603, 
when  he  explored  the  St.  Lawrence  River  as  far  as  the 
Rapids  above  Montreal.  He  tried  to  pass  these,  known 
as  the  Rapids  of  St.  Louis,  in  a  skiff,  but  was  forced  to 
return.  On  the  deck  of  his  vessel  the  Indians  made 
rude  plans  or  maps  of  the  river  above,  with  its  chain 
of  rapids,  its  lakes  and  cataracts.  Champlain  turned 
toward  home  but  resolved  to  visit  this  country  at  some 
future  time. 

The  next  year  he  came  again.  This  time,  with  the 
vessel  in  which  the  voyage  from  France  was  made,  he 
explored  the  Bay  of  Fundy.  After  sailing  around  the 
head  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  he  visited  and  named  the 
St.  John  River  and  then  went  to  Passamaquoddy  Bay. 
Champlain  made  maps  of  all  the  coast  and  harbors.  His 

1  Authority :  Parkman's  "  Pioneers  of  France  in  the  New  World." 
B  1 


2  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND    SEA 

friend  De  Monts,  to  whom  the  king  of  France  had  given 
all  the  land  from  Montreal  to  the  Delaware,  wanted  to 
make  a  settlement  far' her  south  than  the  St.  Lawrence, 
to  avoid  the  extreme  cold  of  the  winters.  At  the  mouth 
of  the  St.  Croix  River  an  island  was  selected  as  a  site  for 
the  new  colony.  It  commanded  the  river  and  was  well 
fitted  for  defence,  but  the  soil  was  poor,  the  place  was 
not  so  far  south  as  they  thought,  and  not  well  located 
for  the  trade  in  furs  which  they  expected  to  carry  on. 

Everybody  went  to  work,  and  before  winter  began  the 
cedars  which  covered  the  island  were  cut  away  and  many 
houses  were  built.  There  were  several  dwellings,  store 
houses,  a  magazine,  workshops,  and  a  barrack  for  the 
Swiss  soldiers  that  had  accompanied  the  expedition.  The 
whole  was  enclosed  with  a  palisade. 

When  the  work  of  preparing  for  winter  was  done,  part 
of  the  company  returned  to  France.  Seventy-nine  men 
remained  behind,  among  them  Champlain,  De  Monts, 
and  several  other  gentlemen  of  noble  birth.  The  winter 
was  a  bitter  one. 

While  De  Monts  was  getting  things  settled  upon  the 
island,  on  the  second  of  September  he  sent  Champlain 
on  an  exploring  trip  along  the  coast  of  Norumbegue 
(Maine).  With  a  bark  of  seventeen  or  eighteen  tons,  two 
Indian  guides,  and  a  dozen  men,  Champlain  was  in  high 
spirits  as  he  set  out.  They  found  the  coast  full  of  islands, 


CHAMPLAIN   IN   NEW   FRANCE  3 

bold,  rocky,  and  irregular,  and  coming  in  sight  of  a  large 
island  rising  into  barren  summits,  he  called  it  Mount 
Desert.  Its  cool  groves  and  fresh  sea  air  have  made  it 
in  recent  years  a  great  resort  for  summer  tourists.  Wind 
ing  in  and  out  among  the  islands,  they  entered  the  mouth 
of  the  Penobscot  River.  Up  this  stream  they  passed  till 
they  came  to  the  fall  just  above  the  present  city  of  Bangor, 
which  stopped  their  further  passage.  The  banks  and  hill 
sides  were  clothed  with  tall  pines  and  stout  oak  trees. 
Along  the  river  were  a  few  deserted  wigwams,  but  on  the 
shores  of  Penobscot  Bay  there  were  many  Indians,  who 
proved  friendly,  entering  into  trade  with  beaver  skins. 

The  weather  now  proved  bad  and  as  provisions  were 
low,  the  party  returned  to  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Croix. 

Great  cakes  of  ice  swept  by  their  island  with  the  ebb 
ing  and  flowing  tide,  often  shutting  off  their  supplies  of 
wood  and  water.  Icy  winds  swept  through  their  rude 
houses  and  they  shivered  round  their  ill-kept  fires,  for 
wood  from  the  mainland  was  very  difficult  to  get.  Soon 
scurvy  broke  out  and  before  spring  thirty-five  died  and 
many  more  were  left  weak  and  exhausted.  Champlain 
did  all  he  could  to  help  and  encourage  the  discontented 
survivors  and  was  still  unwilling  to  give  up  his  plans  for 
discovery  and  settlement. 

After  the  severe  winter  was  past  and  fresh  supplies 
from  France  had  arrived,  Champlain  and  De  Monts  set 


4  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

out  for  a  still  further  examination  of  the  coast  of  Maine 
and  New  England.  With  twenty  sailors,  two  Indians, 
and  some  gentlemen,  they  started  the  18th  of  June  to 
search  for  a  better  location  for  a  settlement.  Passing 
by  Mount  Desert  and  the  mouth  of  the  Penobscot,  they 
reached  the  entrance  to  the  Kennebec.  They  sailed 
along  both  sides  of  the  broad  bay,  meeting  some  Indians, 
but  finding  poor  soil  and  no  good  point  for  a  settle 
ment.  They  anchored  in  sight  of  Old  Orchard  Beach, 
now  become  famous  as  a  watering-place.  Crossing  the 
bar  with  the  rising  tide,  they  anchored  at  Saco,  near 
the  mouth  of  the  river,  where  the  natives  came  down 
to  see  them  with  strong  signs  of  rejoicing.  Fields  of 
waving  corn,  beans,  pumpkins,  and  squashes  in  bloom, 
and  heavily  laden  grapevines  along  the  river,  were  seen. 
The  Indians  were  graceful  and  agile,  living  mostly  upon 
vegetables  and  corn,  and  upon  fish  which  were  caught 
by  them  in  abundance  at  the  mouth  of  the  river. 

After  two  days  spent  at  Saco,  they  passed  on  and  saw 
the  islands  at  Cape  Porpoise  covered  with  wild  currants 
upon  which  great  flocks  of  wild  pigeons  were  feasting. 
Many  of  these  birds  were  taken,  and  these  gave  the 
Frenchmen  a  much-relished  addition  to  their  fare. 

Casting  anchor  on  the  east  side  of  Cape  Ann,  a  few 
Indians  were  seen  and  Champlain  went  on  shore.  After 
winning  the  confidence  of  the  natives  by  gifts,  Cham- 


CHAMPLAIN   IN   NEW   FRANCE  5 

plain  took  a  piece  of  drawing-paper  and  crayon  and  out 
lined  the  coast  as  far  as  they  could  see  and  suggested 
to  the  Indians  that  they  complete  the  sketch  beyond. 
Seizing  the  crayon,  one  of  the  Indians  continued  to  draw 
on  the  same  paper  the  map  of  Massachusetts  Bay.  The 
Indians  also  indicated,  by  setting  pebbles,  that  the  bay 
was  occupied  by  six  tribes.  This  was  probably  the  first 
drawing  lesson  that  was  ever  given  in  an  outdoor  school 
in  Massachusetts.  July  16  the  Frenchmen  sailed  into 
Boston  harbor  and  were  delighted  with  the  scenery  pre 
sented  by  the  islands  and  shores,  waving  with  corn-fields 
or  shaded  by  tall  forests.  The  clumsy  log  canoe  of  the 
Indians  was  here  seen  for  the  first  time.  The  sail-boat 
of  the  explorers  was  perhaps  the  first  that  ever  entered 
Massachusetts  Bay.  The  shores  were  soon  lined  with 
many  natives  watching  curiously  this  white-winged  vessel, 
moving  quietly  along  without  oars.  Jumping  into  their 
small  canoes,  they  followed  the  departing  Frenchmen  a 
short  distance. 

Passing  on  down  the  shore,  the  explorers  were  at  length 
driven  into  a  small  harbor  to  await  a  more  favorable 
breeze.  The  French  noticed  that  the  Indians  had  just 
been  fishing  for  cod,  which  they  caught  with  hook  and 
line  much  as  in  our  day,  a  piece  of  barbed  bone  fastened 
to  a  stick  serving  as  a  hook,  and  the  line  being  made  of 
a  grassy  fibre  growing  in  this  region.  Champlain  went 


6  PIONEERS  ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

on  shore  and  made  a  sketch  of  the  harbor,  by  which  we 
are  able  to  tell  that  it  is  the  harbor  of  Plymouth, 
where  the  Pilgrims  landed  fifteen  years  later. 

After  spending  a  day  at  Plymouth  the  Frenchmen 
passed  in  a  circle  around  the  bay  till  they  reached  the 
white  sands  of  Cape  Cod,  which  they  named  Cape  Blanc. 
But  it  had  been  visited  before  by  Gosnold,  who  named 
it  Cape  Cod.  Sailing  down  outside  of  Cape  Cod,  they 
reached  and  passed  into  Nauset  harbor,  where  were 
many  Indian  huts.  Entering  this  large  bay  July  22,  they 
found  many  cone-shaped  wigwams  covered  with  thatch, 
with  an  opening  for  smoke.  In  the  cultivated  fields  were 
beans,  corn,  pumpkins,  radishes,  and  tobacco,  and  the 
woods  contained  hickory,  oak,  and  cedar.  The  Indians 
were  friendly.  The  weather  was  chilly  and  a  cold  east 
wind  kept  them  four  days  in  the  harbor. 

At  this  place  they  had  the  first  hostile  meeting  with 
Indians.  Some  white  men  had  gone  ashore  with  brass 
kettles  for  fresh  water.  The  Indians  were  very  desirous 
of  securing  these.  As  one  of  the  men  stooped  down  to 
fill  the  kettle  at  a  spring,  an  Indian  seized  it  and  started 
off.  This  led  to  a  struggle  and  the  Indian  arrows  flew 
thick,  striking  the  white  man  and  soon  killing  him.  The 
Indians  made  off  with  the  kettle  into  the  woods. 

Soon  the  other  Indians  came  forward  to  explain  that 
they  had  no  share  in  this  matter  and  Champlain  had  to 


CHAMPLAIN    IN    NEW    FRANCE  7 

accept  their  statement  rather  than  to  run  the  risk  of 
inflicting  punishment  upon  the  innocent. 

The  voyagers  had  been  gone  five  weeks  and  it  was 
time  to  turn  back.  On  their  return  trip  they  stopped 
at  Saco  and  at  the  mouth  of  the  Kennebec.  At  the 
latter  point  they  met  an  Indian  sachem  who  told  them 
that  a  vessel  had  stopped  at  this  place  and,  while  pre 
tending  friendship,  had  seized  five  Indians  and  had 
killed  or  carried  them  off.  From  the  description  Cham- 
plain  concluded  that  it  was  an  English  ship.  From  other 
sources  we  know  that  Captain  George  Weymouth,  com 
manding  an  English  vessel,  explored  this  coast  in  June, 
1605,  and  carried  off  five  Indians  as  captives.  He  was 
seeking  for  a  suitable  location  for  a  colony  to  be  sent  out 
by  an  English  company.  From  this  time  on  for  many 
years  the  French  and  English  were  rivals  in  making 
settlements  and  gaining  possession  of  the  country  along 
the  shores  of  New  England  and  Canada. 

As  the  explorers  had  found  no  place  to  the  south  on  this 
journey  where  they  wished  to  make  a  settlement,  De  Monts 
decided  to  move  to  Port  Royal  —  now  Annapolis  —  where 
they  had  noted  the  beautiful  inlet  the  year  before.  Every 
thing  that  could  be  moved  was  put  on  board  the  ves 
sels,  carried  across  the  Bay  of  Fundy,  and  landed  at 
the  chosen  spot.  Everybody  was  set  to  work  and  soon 
the  buildings  of  the  new  colony  took  the  place  of  the 


8 


PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 


dense   forest  that  had  been  cut  down.      When  all  was 
done,  De  Monts  went  to  France,  but  Champlain  decided 

to    spend    another    winter 
with  the  colony. 

This  winter  was  not  so 
severe  as  the  one  at  St. 
Croix  but  the  colonists 
were  glad  to  welcome  the 
ship  which  brought  more 
people  and  supplies  late 

followin        Slimmer. 


THE  MOUTH  OF  THE  ST.  LAWRENCE       JR 

Soon  after  the  return  of  this  vessel  to  France,  Champlain 
set  out  on  another  voyage  of  discovery.  He  went  as 
far  south  as  the  southern  coast  of  Massachusetts  but 
then  had  to  return,  as  the  winter  was  close  at  hand. 

During  his  absence  the  men  at  the  fort  had  been  busy 
with  their  crops,  raising  a  good  supply  of  maize,  as  well 
as  some  barley,  wheat,  and  rye.  These,  with  the  supplies 
brought  from  France,  provided  a  good  store  of  food  for 
the  winter.  Champlain  devised  a  plan  whereby  their 
table  might  always  be  supplied.  The  chief  men  in  the 
colony  numbered  fifteen.  Champlain  formed  them  into 
an  order  of  Knighthood  which  he  called  the  "  Order  of 
Good  Times,"  and  each  member  was  to  be,  in  turn, 
Grand  Master  for  a  day.  The  Grand  Master  was  not 
only  to  see  to  the  furnishing  of  food  but  was  to  super 


CHAMPLAIN    IN   NEW   FRANCE  9 

intend  the  cooking  and  serving.  Each  wished  to  excel 
the  others,  so  for  several  days  before  his  turn  each  would 
spend  his  time  hunting  and  fishing,  or  bartering  with  the 
Indians  for  food.  The  colonists  had  venison,  bear  and 
grouse,  ducks,  geese,  and  plover,  as  well  as  all  kinds  of 
fish,  to  eat  with  their  bread  and  dried  beans. 

When  the  hour  for  dinner  was  struck — they  dined  at 
noon  — "  the  Grand  Master  entered  the  hall,  a  napkin 
on  his  shoulder,  his  staff  of  office  in  his  hand,  and  the 
collar  of  the  Order  about  his  neck."  The  brotherhood 
followed,  each  bearing  a  dish.  The  invited  guests  were 
Indian  chiefs,  seated  at  the  table  with  the  French,  who 
enjoyed  the  companionship  of  the  Indians.  Those  of  hum 
bler  degree  —  warriors,  squaws,  and  children  —  sat  on  the 
floor,  eagerly  awaiting  their  share  of  biscuit  or  bread,  a 
novel  and  much-coveted  luxury.  These  Indians,  always 
treated  kindly,  became  very  fond  of  the  French,  who 
often  followed  them  on  their  great  hunts. 

In  the  evening,  when  the  big  fires  roared  and  the 
sparks  flew  up  the  wide  chimneys,  the  French  and  their 
Indian  friends  drew  round  the  blaze  and  the  Grand 
Master  gave  up  his  staff  and  collar  to  his  successor. 
With  such  sports  the  French  passed  away  the  long  winter. 
With  good  fare  and  entertainment  there  was  but  little 
sickness  and  only  four  deaths  occurred. 

In  1607  the  French  king  took  away  De  Monts'  charter, 


10  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

and  the  colony  was  deserted.  The  French  settlers  had 
been  so  kind  to  the  Indians  that,  when  the  last  boat 
load  left  Port  Royal,  the  shore  resounded  with  lamen 
tations  and  nothing  could  console  the  afflicted  savages 
but  promises  of  a  speedy  return. 

In  1608  two  ships,  one  commanded  by  Champlain,  the 
other  by  Pontgrave,  again  crossed  the  ocean  to  New 
France.  Pontgrave  was  to  trade  with  the  Indians  and 
bring  back  the  cargo  of  furs  which,  it  was  hoped,  would 
meet  the  expenses  of  the  voyage.  Champlain  left  Pont 
grave  at  Port  Royal  to  trade  with  the  Indians  and  sailed 
up  the  St.  Lawrence  as  far  as  Quebec.  Here  a  small 
stream,  the  St.  Charles,  enters  the  St.  Lawrence  and  in 
the  angle  between  them  rises  a  promontory,  on  two  sides  a 
natural  fortress.  In  a  few  weeks  a  pile  of  wooden  build 
ings  rose  on  the  brink  of  the  St.  Lawrence.  "  A  strong 
wooden  wall,  surmounted  by  a  gallery  loop-holed  for 
musketry,  enclosed  three  buildings  containing  quarters  for 
Champlain  and  his  men,  together  with  a  courtyard,  from 
one  side  of  which  rose  a  tall  dove-cot,  like  a  belfry.  A 
moat  surrounded  the  whole,  and  two  or  three  small  can 
non  were  planted  on  platforms  toward  the  river." 

After  spending  a  winter  in  Quebec,  Champlain  decided 
to  join  a  war  party  of  Indians.  A  young  Ottawa  chief 
had  begged  him  to  join  his  tribe  against  the  Iroquois. 
The  Troquois  lived  in  fortified  villages  in  what  is  now  the 


1 

,Vt:8L.-<    ^^ft     * 


/-%*    Ml  A    S     K     0    K     I 


MAP  SHOWING  DISTRIBUTION  OF  INDIAN  TRIBES 


12  PIONEERS   ON   LAND  AND   SEA 

state  of  New  York  and  were  thought  the  most  fierce  of 
the  Indian  tribes  of  the  East.  The  Algonquins,  with 
allied  tribes,  lived  along  the  St.  Lawrence  and  in  the 
country  north  of  the  river  and  the  Great  Lakes.  Their 
allies,  the  Huron s,  belonged  to  the  Iroquois  family  but 
had  refused  to  join  the  other  tribes  when  the  latter  united 
against  the  Algonquins.  As  the  French  had  shown  great 
friendship  for  the  Algonquins  near  their  colonies,  the  Iro 
quois  were  naturally  hostile  toward  the  French.  By  join 
ing  the  Hurons  and  the  Algonquins,  Champlain  thought 
he  would  be  able  to  make  discoveries  without  much  danger 
to  himself. 

It  was  past  the  middle  of  June  when  the  tribes  from 
the  north  reached  Quebec.  Many  of  them  had  never  seen 
a  white  man  and  they  looked  at  the  steel-clad  strangers 
with  speechless  wonder.  Eleven  Frenchmen  joined  Cham- 
plain.  They  were  armed  with  short  guns  called  the 
arquebuse.  They  started  up  the  river  in  a  small  sail-boat, 
"  while  around  them  the  river  was  alive  with  canoes,  and 
hundreds  of  naked  arms  plied  the  paddle  with  a  steady 
measured  sweep."  They  went  up  the  river  to  the  mouth 
of  the  Richelieu.  Here  they  camped  for  two  days, 
hunted,  fished,  and  took  their  ease.  The  Indians  quar 
relled  and  three-fourths  of  their  number  seceded  and  pad 
dled  toward  their  homes.  The  rest  of  the  party  went  on 
up  the  stream.  Champlain  soon  outsailed  the  canoes  and 


CHAMPLAIN    IN    NEW   FRANCE  13 

thought  he  would  push  on  without  them,  but  was  stopped 
by  rapids  in  the  river.  The  Indians  had  told  him  that 
his  boat  could  sail  the  whole  distance  to  the  land  they 
wished  to  reach  but  he  found  that  he  could  not  get  the 
boat  over  the  rapids,  and  sent  it,  with  the  greater  part  of 
the  men,  back  to  Quebec.  Only  two  white  men  went  on 
with  him. 

"  The  warriors  lifted  their  canoes  from  the  water,  and 
in  long  procession  through  the  forest,  under  the  flickering 
sun  and  shade,  bore  them  on  their  shoulders  around  the 
rapids  to  the  smooth  stream  above.  Here  the  chiefs 
made  a  muster  of  their  forces,  counting  twenty-four 
canoes  and  sixty  warriors.  They  advanced  once  more  up 
the  river,  by  marsh,  meadow,  forest,  and  scattered  islands, 
then  full  of  game,  for  it  was  an  uninhabited  land,  the 
war-path  and  battle-ground  of  hostile  tribes."  Some  were 
in  front  as  a  vanguard ;  others  formed  the  main  body ; 
while  an  equal  number  were  in  the  forests  on  the  flanks 
and  rear,  hunting  food  for  all.  They  carried  with  them 
parched  maize  ground  into  meal,  but  kept  it  for  use  while 
near  the  enemy,  when  hunting  would  become  impossible. 

"  Late  in  the  day  they  landed  and  drew  up  their 
canoes,  ranging  them  closely  side  by  side.  Some  stripped 
sheets  of  bark  to  cover  their  camp-sheds ;  others  gathered 
wood;  others  felled  trees  for  a  barricade.  They  seem  to 
have  had  steel  axes  which  they  had  gotten  from  the 


14  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

French,  for  in  less  than  two  hours  they  had  a  strong 
defensive  work,  open  on  the  river  side,  and  large  enough 
to  enclose  all  their  huts  and  sheds.  Some  of  their  number 
were  sent  forward  as  scouts,  and  returning,  said  they  saw 
no  signs  of  the  enemy."  At  night  they  placed  no  guard 
but  all  lay  down  to  sleep,  the  usual  custom  of  the  lazy 
warriors  of  the  forest. 

"  The  next  morning  the  canoes  again  advanced,  the 
river  widening  as  they  went.  Great  islands  were  seen, 
and  soon  Champlain  entered  the  lake  which  now  bears 
his  name.  Passing  on,  he  saw  on  the  left  the  forest  ridges 
of  the  Green  Mountains,  and  on  the  right  rose  the  Adi- 
rondacks.  These  the  Iroquois  made  their  hunting- 
grounds  ;  and  beyond,  in  the  valleys  of  the  Mohawk,  the 
Onondaga,  and  the  Genesee  stretched  the  long  line  of 
their  palisaded  towns. 

"  They  were  so  near  the  home  of  the  enemy  that  they 
now  moved  only  in  the  night.  One  morning  in  July,  after 
paddling  all  night,  they  hid  as  usual  in  the  forest.  That 
night  Champlain  dreamed  that  he  saw  Iroquois  drowning 
in  the  lake.  Now  he  had  been  asked  daily  by  his  allies  for 
his  dreams,  for  the  Indians  had  great  faith  in  them,  but 
to  this  moment  his  slumbers  had  been  unbroken  and 
he  had  had  nothing  to  tell.  This  dream  filled  the  crowd 
with  joy,  and  at  nightfall  they  went  on  their  way,  happy 
with  thoughts  of  victory. 


CHAMPLAIN    IN   NEW    FRANCE  15 

"It  was  ten  o'clock  in  the  evening  when,  near  the 
present  site  of  Ticonderoga,  they  saw  dark  objects  in 
motion  on  the  lake  before  them.  These  were  the  Iroquois 
canoes,  heavier  and  slower  than  theirs,  for  they  were 
made  of  oak  bark.  Each  party  saw  the  other,  and  the 
mingled  war-cries  pealed  over  the  darkened  water.  The 
Iroquois  landed  and  began  to  barricade  themselves. 
Champlain  could  see  them  in  the  woods,  working  like 
beavers,  hacking  down  trees  with  iron  axes  taken  from 
Canadian  tribes  in  war,  and  with  stone  hatchets  of  their 
own  making.  The  allies  remained  on  the  lake,  a  bow 
shot  from  the  hostile  barricade,  their  canoes  made  fast 
together  by  poles  lashed  across.  All  night  they  danced 
with  as  much  vigor  as  the  frailty  of  their  canoes  would 
permit.  It  was  agreed  on  both  sides  that  the  fight 
should  not  begin  before  daybreak,  but  meanwhile  an  ex 
change  of  abuse,  threats,  and  boasting  gave  increasing 
exercise  to  the  lungs  and  fancy  of  the  combatants, — 
6  much/  says  Champlain,  '  like  the  besiegers  and  besieged 
in  a  beleaguered  town.' ' 

Early  in  the  morning  he  and  his  two  followers  put  on 
the  light  armor  of  the  time.  Champlain  wore  the  doublet 
and  long  hose  then  in  fashion.  "  Over  the  doublet  he 
buckled  on  a  breastplate  and  backpiece,  while  his  thighs 
were  covered  by  steel  and  his  head  by  a  plumed  casque." 
Across  his  shoulder  hung  the  strap  of  his  ammunition 


16  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND  SEA 

box ;  at  his  side  was  his  sword  and  in  his  hand  his  gun, 
which  he  had  loaded  with  four  balls.  Each  of  the  French 
men  was  in  a  separate  canoe,  and  as  it  grew  light,  they 
kept  themselves  hidden,  either  by  lying  at  the  bottom  of 
their  boats,  or  by  covering  themselves  with  an  Indian 
robe.  The  canoes  came  near  the  shore  and  all  landed  at 
some  distance  from  the  Iroquois,  whom  they  could  see 
filing  out  of  their  barricade,  some  two  hundred  in  number 
of  the  boldest  and  fiercest  warriors  of  North  America. 
Some  carried  shields  of  wood  and  hide  and  were  covered 
with  a  kind  of  armor  made  of  tough  twigs  fastened 
together  with  a  vegetable  fibre  supposed  by  Champlain 
to  be  cotton.  The  chiefs  wore  tall  plumes  on  their  heads. 
"  The  allies,  growing  anxious,  called  with  loud  cries  for 
Champlain,  and  opened  their  ranks  that  he  might  pass 
to  the  front.  He  did  so,  and  the  Iroquois  stood  looking 
at  him  in  silent  amazement.  But  his  gun  was  levelled, 
the  report  rang  through  the  woods,  a  chief  fell  dead,  and 
another  by  his  side  rolled  among  the  bushes.  Then  there 
rose  from  the  allies  a  yell  which  would  have  drowned  a 
thunderclap,  and  the  forest  was  full  of  whizzing  arrows. 
For  a  moment  the  Iroquois  stood  firm  and  sent  back  their 
arrows  lustily,  but  when  another  and  another  gunshot 
came  from  the  thickets  on  their  flank,  they  broke  and 
fled  in  terror.  Swifter  than  hounds,  the  allies  tore 
through  the  bushes  after  them.  Some  of  the  Iroquois 


18  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

were  killed,  more  were  taken.  They  left  everything,  — 
canoes,  provisions,  and  weapons,  —  in  their  flight." 

The  victors  returned  to  the  mouth  of  the  Richelieu, 
reaching  it  in  three  or  four  days.  Then  the  Hurons  and 
Algonquins  went  to  their  home  on  the  Ottawa,  while 
Champlain,  with  the  rest  of  the  Indians,  descended  the 
St.  Lawrence  to  Quebec.  At  parting,  the  northern  tribes 
invited  Champlain  to  visit  their  towns  and  aid  them 
again  in  their  wars. 

That  winter,  1610,  Champlain  returned  to  France  but 
came  back  in  the  spring  to  join  the  Indians  against  the 
common  foe,  the  Iroquois.  The  tribes  near  Quebec  prom 
ised  to  show  him  the  way  to  Hudson  Bay  and  the 
Hurons  were  to  take  him  to  the  Great  Lakes,  where  rich 
mines  of  copper  were  to  be  found.  The  tribes  were  to 
meet  at  the  mouth  of  the  Richelieu.  There  is  an  island 
in  the  St.  Lawrence  near  the  mouth  of  this  river.  Here 
Champlain  with  the  warriors  from  the  neighborhood  of 
Quebec  stopped  to  wait  for  the  Algonquin  warriors.  The 
Indians  were  busy  cutting  down  trees  and  clearing  the 
ground  for  a  dance  and  feast,  as  they  were  eager  to  wel 
come  their  allies  with  befitting  honors.  Some  Indians 
came  speeding  down  the  river  in  a  canoe.  As  they  drew 
near  they  cried  out  that  the  Algonquins  were  in  the 
forest  fighting  a  hundred  Iroquois  warriors,  who,  out 
numbered,  had  betaken  themselves  to  a  barricade  of  trees. 


CHAMPLAIN   IN   NEW   FRANCE  19 

The  air  was  split  with  shrill  outcries.  "  The  Indians 
snatched  their  weapons,  —  shields,  bows,  arrows,  war- 
clubs,  sword-blades  made  fast  to  poles,  —  and  pell-mell 
ran  headlong  to  their  canoes,  screeching  to  Champlain 
to  follow." 

Champlain  and  four  of  his  men  were  in  the  canoes. 
They  shot  across  the  water,  arid,  as  their  boats  touched 
the  shore,  each  warrior  flung  down  his  paddle,  snatched 
his  weapons,  and  ran  like  a  greyhound  into  the  woods. 
The  five  Frenchmen  followed  but  could  not  keep  up 
with  the  Indians,  who  were  soon  out  of  sight  and  hear 
ing.  The  day  was  warm  and  the  forest  air  heavy  and 
dense.  The  mosquitoes,  says  Champlain,  were  "  so  thick 
that  we  could  scarcely  draw  breath,  and  it  was  wonder 
ful  how  cruelly  they  persecuted  us."  The  ground  was 
swampy  and  the  Frenchmen  could  hardly  get  along  with 
their  heavy  armor.  At  length  they  saw  two  Indians 
running  in  the  distance  and  shouted  to  them  that  if 
they  wished  for  their  aid  they  must  guide  them  to  the 
enemy. 

And  now  they  could  hear  the  shouts  of  the  fighters 
and  soon  reached  the  battle-field.  The  barricade  was 
made  of  trees  piled  into  a  circular  breastwork,  trunks, 
boughs,  and  matted  leaves  making  a  strong  defence. 
The  allies  had  attacked  their  enemy  but  had  been  driven 
back  and  were  now  waiting  for  the  French.  When  the 


20  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

Indians  saw  them,  a  yell  arose  from  hundreds  of  throats. 
A  fierce  answer  came  from  the  band  within  and  amid  a 
storm  of  arrows  from  both  sides  the  Frenchmen  threw 
themselves  into  the  fight.  The  Iroquois  had  not  gotten 
over  their  first  fear  of  the  guns  and  when  the  French 
men  ran  up  to  the  barricade,  thrust  their  pieces  through 
the  crevices  and  shot  death  among  the  crowd  within, 
they  could  not  control  their  fright  but  with  every  re 
port  threw  themselves  flat  on  the  earth.  The  allies, 
covered  by  their  large  shields,  began  to  drag  out  the 
trees  from  the  barricade,  while  others,  under  Cham- 
plain's  direction,  gathered  like  a  dark  cloud  at  the  edge 
of  the  forest,  ready  to  close  the  affair  with  a  final  rush. 
Some  French  traders,  hearing  the  noise,  joined  in  the 
attack.  Champlain  gave  the  signal ;  the  crowd  ran  to 
the  barricade,  dragged  down  the  boughs  or  climbed  over 
them,  and  bore  themselves  "so  well  and  manfully"  that 
they  soon  forced  an  entrance.  Some  of  the  Iroquois 
were  cut  down  as  they  stood ;  some  climbed  the  barri 
cade  and  were  killed  by  the  fierce  crowd  without ;  some 
were  drowned  in  the  river ;  while  fifteen,  the  only  ones 
left,  were  taken  prisoners. 

On  the  next  day  a  large  band  of  Hurons  arrived, 
much  vexed  that  they  had  come  too  late.  Hundreds  of 
warriors  were  now  assembled  and  a  heavy  blow  had 
been  struck  at  the  enemy,  but  none  thought  of  follow- 


CHAMPLAIN   IN    NEW   FRANCE  21 

ing  up  their  success.  Pleased  with  their  unexpected 
good  fortune,  the}7  danced  and  sang ;  then  loaded  up 
their  canoes  and  started  for  their  homes.  Champlain 
had  fought  their  battles  and  might  now  claim  the  escort 
they  had  promised  to  the  Great  Lakes  and  to  the  coun 
try  to  the  north,  but  his  colony  needed  supplies  and  he 
returned  to  France. 

Early  in  the  spring  Champlain  came  again  to  Que 
bec  but  did  not  stay  long,  as  he  wanted  to  plant  a 
colony  at  Montreal.  This  was  the  place  that  the  Ind 
ians  passed  yearly  as  they  came  south  for  trade  or  war. 
Here  he  wanted  to  get  the  advantage  of  the  fur  trade. 
But  other  traders  followed  and  soon  Montreal,  or  Place 
Royal,  as  Champlain  called  it,  became  the  centre  of  the 
fur  trade. 

"Down  the  surges  of  the  St.  Louis,  where  the  mighty 
floods  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  contracted  to  a  narrow 
throat,  roll  in  fury  among  the  sunken  rocks,  —  here, 
through  foam  and  spray  and  the  roar  of  the  angry  tor 
rent,  a  fleet  of  birch  canoes  came  dancing  like  dry 
leaves  on  the  froth  of  some  riotous  brook."  They  bore 
a  band  of  Huron s,  the  first  of  the  tribes  at  the  usual 
meeting-place.  As  they  drew  near  the  landing,  all  the 
fur-traders'  boats  blazed  forth  a  welcome  which  fright 
ened  the  Indians  so  much  that  they  hardly  dared  to 
come  ashore.  More  soon  appeared  and  hundreds  of 


22  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND  SEA 

warriors  were  shortly  encamped  along  the  shore,  all 
less  and  afraid.  Late  one  night  they  awakened  Cham- 
plain.  On  going  with  them  to  their  camp,  he  found 
the  chiefs  and  warriors  sitting  around  the  fire.  "  Though 
they  were  fearful  of  the  others,  their  trust  in  him  was 
boundless.  ( Come  to  our  country,  buy  our  beaver,  build 
a  fort,  teach  us  the  true  faith,  do  what  you  will,  but 
do  not  bring  this  crowd  with  you/ '  They  were  afraid 
that  this  band  of  traders,  all  well  armed,  meant  to  at 
tack  and  plunder  and  kill  them.  Champlain  told  them 
not  to  be  afraid,  but  the  camp  soon  broke  up  and  the 
uneasy  warriors  moved  to  a  place  above  the  rapids. 
"  Here  Champlain  visited  them,  and  hence  these  fearless 
canoe-men,  kneeling  in  the  birchen  egg-shells,  carried 
him  homeward  down  the  rapids,  somewhat,  as  he  ad- 
mite,  to  the  discomposure  of  his  nerves."  The  great 
gathering  soon  broke  up ;  the  traders  returned  to  the 
trading-post  nearer  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Lawrence ; 
the  Indians  went,  some  to  their  homes,  some  to  fight 
the  Iroquois.  Champlain  could  not  go  with  them,  as 
he  had  to  return  to  France  to  get  help  for  his  colonies. 
The  next  year,  1612,  Champlain  was  too  busy  in 
France  to  visit  his  colonies.  This  year  a  young  man 
who  had  gone  north  with  the  Indians  the  year  before 
and  had  spent  the  year  with  them,  came  to  Paris  with 
a  tale  of  wonders.  He  said*  that  at  the  source  of  the 


CHAMPLAIN    IN   NEW   FRANCE  23 

Ottawa  River  he  had  found  a  great  lake;  that  he  had 
crossed  it  and  discovered  a  river  flowing  northward; 
that  he  had  gone  down  this  river  and  reached  the 
shores  of  the  sea;  that  here  he  had  seen  the  wreck  of 
an  English  ship,  and  that  this  sea  was  distant  from 
Montreal  but  seventeen  days  by  canoe.  The  story  was 
told  so  clearly  that  Champlain  believed  it.  His  friends 
thought  he  ought  to  follow  up  this  discovery,  and  he, 
thinking  that  at  last  the  way  to  the  Pacific  and  India 
had  been  found,  was  eager  to  go.  Early  in  the  spring 
of  1613  he  again  crossed  the  Atlantic  and  sailed  up  the 
St.  Lawrence  to  Montreal.  On  Monday,  the  27th  of 
May,  he  started  up  the  Ottawa  with  four  Frenchmen, 
one  of  whom  was  the  young  man  who  had  been  north 
the  year  before,  and  one  Indian,  in  two  small  canoes. 
They  had  to  pass  many  rapids  and  the  forest  was  so 
thick  and  tangled  that  they  were  forced  to  remain  in 
the  bed  of  the  river,  trailing  their  canoes  along  the 
bank  with  cords  or  pushing  them  by  main  force  up 
the  current.  Champlain's  foot  slipped,  he  fell  in  the 
rapids,  two  rocks  against  which  he  braced  himself  saving 
him  from  being  swept  down,  while  the  cord  of  the 
canoe,  twisted  around  his  hand,  nearly  cut  it  off.  At 
length  they  reached  smoother  water,  where  they  met  some 
friendly  Indians.  Champlain  left  one  of  his  Frenchmen 
with  them  and  took  one  of  their  number  in  return. 


24  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

After  many  days  of  hard  travel  the  voyagers  reached  a 
lake  where  they  saw  a  rough  clearing.  The  trees  had 
been  partly  burnt.  Dead  trunks,  black  with  fire,  stood 
grimly  upright  amid  the  stumps  and  fallen  bodies  of  those 
half-burnt.  In  the  spaces  between,  the  soil  had  been 
scratched  with  hoes  of  wood  or  bone  and  a  crop  of  maize 
was  growing,  now  some  four  inches  high.  The  houses, 
with  frames  of  poles,  covered  with  sheets  of  bark,  were 
scattered  here  and  there.  The  Indians  ran  to  the  shore 
to  see  the  strangers.  Warriors  stood  with  their  hands 
over  their  mouths,  the  Indian  way  of  showing  astonish 
ment  ;  squaws  stared,  both  curious  and  afraid ;  naked 
pappooses  screamed  and  ran.  The  chief  offered  the  calu 
met  and  then  spoke  to  the  crowd.  "  These  white  men 
must  have  fallen  from  the  clouds.  How  else  could  they 
have  reached  us  through  the  woods  and  rapids  which  even 
we  find  it  hard  to  pass  ?  The  French  chief  can  do  any 
thing.  All  that  we  have  heard  of  him  must  be  true." 

Champlain  asked  to  be  guided  to  the  settlements  above 
and  with  a  number  of  his  new-found  friends  he  advanced 
beyond  the  head  of  Lake  Coulange,  and  landing,  saw  path 
ways  through  the  forest.  They  led  to  the  clearing  and 
to  the  cabins  of  a  chief  named  Tessouat,  who  gave  the 
Frenchmen  a  friendly  welcome  and  prepared  to  give  a 
feast  in  Champlain's  honor.  "  Runners  were  sent  to  invite 
the  guests  from  neighboring  villages,  and  on  the  morrow 


CHAMPLAIN    IN   NEW    FRANCE  25 

Tessouat' s  squaws  swept  his  cabin  for  the  festivity.  Then 
Champlain  and  his  Frenchmen  were  seated  on  skins  in  the 
place  of  honor  and  the  naked  guests  appeared,  each  with 
his  wooden  dish  and  spoon  and  each  giving  his  guttural 
salute  as  he  stooped  at  the  low  door.  The  wisdom  and 
prowess  of  the  nation  sat  expectant  on  the  bare  earth. 
Each  long,  bare  arm  thrust  forth  its  dish  in  turn  as  the 
host  served  out  the  banquet.  First,  a  mess  of  pounded 
maize  wherein  were  boiled,  without  salt,  morsels  of  fish 
and  dark'  scraps  of  meat ;  then  fish  and  flesh  broiled  on 
the  embers,  with  a  kettle  of  cold  water  from  the  river." 
After  the  feast,  pipes  were  smoked  and  Champlain  asked 
the  Indians  to  furnish  him  with  four  canoes  and  eight 
men  to  take  him  to  the  country  north.  Now  Tessouat 
was  not  friendly  toward  the  tribes  to  the  north,  and 
answered  Champlain :  "  We  always  knew  you  for  our 
best  friend  among  the  Frenchmen.  We  love  you  like  our 
own  children.  But  why  did  you  break  your  word  with  us 
last  year  when  we  all  went  down  to  meet  you  at  Montreal 
to  give  you  presents  and  go  with  you  to  war  ?  You  were 
not  there,  but  other  Frenchmen  were  there,  who  abused  us. 
We  will  never  go  again.  As  for  the  four  canoes,  you  shall 
have  them  if  you  insist  upon  it,  but  it  grieves  us  to  think 
of  the  hardships  you  must  endure." 

Champlain,  fearing  that  he  would  not  get  his  canoes, 
told  Tessouat  that  the  young  man  with  him  had  been  to 


26  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

this  country  and  did  not  find  the  road  nor  the  people  so  bad 
as  he  had  said.  Tessouat  asked  the  young  man  whether 
that  were  true.  The  impostor  sat  mute  for  a  short  time, 
then  said,  "  Yes,  I  have  been  there."  "  You  are  a  liar," 
returned  the  host.  "  You  know  very  well  that  you  slept 
here  among  my  children  every  night  and  rose  again  every 
morning  ;  and  if  you  ever  went  where  you  pretend  to  have 
gone,  it  must  have  been  when  you  were  asleep.  How  can 
you  be  so  impudent  as  to  lie  to  your  chief,  and  so  wicked 
as  to  risk  his  life  among  so  many  dangers?" 

Champlain,  greatly  disturbed,  led  the  young  man  from 
the  cabin  and  begged  him  to  tell  the  truth.  At  first  he 
declared  that  all  that  he  had  said  was  true  but  finally 
broke  down,  owned  his  treachery,  and  begged  for  mercy. 
The  Indians  wanted  Champlain  to  have  him  killed  at 
once  and  offered  to  perform  that  office  for  him ;  but 
Champlain,  who  had  promised  the  young  man  his  life  if 
he  would  tell  the  truth,  protected  him. 

As  there  was  now  no  motive  for  further  advance,  the 
party  set  forth  on  their  return,  attended  by  a  fleet  of  forty 
canoes  bound  to  Montreal  for  trade.  Champlain  returned 
to  France. 

It  was  near  the  end  of  May  in  1615  when  Champlain 
again  reached  Quebec.  With  him  came  four  Recollet 
friars  to  found  missions  in  the  New  World.  A  convent 
was  built  for  them  near  the  fortified  dwellings  of  Cham- 


CHAMPLAIN   IN   NEW   FRANCE  27 

plain.  One  of  the  friars  had  gone  at  once  to  Montreal, 
where  the  Indians  had  come  for  their  yearly  trade. 
Champlain  soon  joined  him.  The  Indians  begged  him  to 
go  with  them  against  the  Iroquois.  He  agreed  to  do  so 
but  first  returned  to  Quebec.  After  a  short  delay  he  came 
back  to  Montreal,  to  find  the  place  deserted.  Impatient 
at  his  delay,  the  Indians  had  gone  home,  and  with  them 
went  the  friar  and  twelve  well-armed  Frenchmen. 

Champlain,  with  two  canoes,  ten  Indians,  and  two 
Frenchmen,  followed  up  the  stream.  He  passed  the  vil 
lage  of  Tessouat  and  two  lakes  in  the  river  here.  For 
twenty  miles  the  Ottawa  runs  straight  as  the  bee  can  fly 
deep,  narrow,  and  black  between  its  mountain  shores. 
Then  came  a  series  of  rapids  and  at  last  the  party  reached 
a  small  tributary  of  the  Ottawa  coining  in  from  the  west. 
This  they  ascended  forty  miles  or  more,  then  crossing  a 
portage  track,  well  trodden,  stood  on  the  shore  of  Lake 
Nipissing.  Crossing  the  lake,  they  entered  French  River 
and  floated  westward  to  the  great  fresh-water  sea  of  the 
Hurons.  For  more  than  a  hundred  miles  they  followed 
the  eastern  shore  of  this  lake,  and  at  last  landed  where  an 
Indian  trail  led  inland.  To  the  eye  of  Champlain  this 
land  seemed  one  of  beauty  and  abundance.  There  was  a 
broad  opening  in  the  forest,  there  were  fields  of  maize, 
pumpkins  ripening  in  the  sun,  patches  of  sunflowers,  from 
the  seeds  of  which  the  Indians  made  hair-oil,  and  in  tbe 


28  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

midst  lay  the  great  town  of  the  Hurons.  It  was  sur 
rounded  by  a  palisade  of  crossed  tree  trunks,  and  the 
long  lodges  were  made  of  bark,  each  containing  many 
households. 

All  were  glad  to  see  Champlain,  as  they  thought  him 
the  champion  who  was  to  lead  them  to  victory.  There 
was  bountiful  feasting  in  his  honor.  But  Champlain  soon 
tired  of  the  idleness  of  an  Indian  town  and  with  some  of 
his  Frenchmen  visited  in  three  days  five  palisaded  towns. 
"  The  country  delighted  them :  its  meadows,  its  deep 
woods,  its  pine  and  cedar  thickets,  full  of  hares  and  par 
tridges,  its  wild  grapes  and  plums,  cherries,  crab-apples, 
nuts,  and  raspberries." 

The  warriors  were  beginning  to  gather.  It  was  now 
the  middle  of  August.  "  Feasts  and  the  war-dance  con 
sumed  the  days,  till  at  last  the  tardy  bands  had  all 
arrived.  Shouldering  their  canoes  and  scanty  baggage,  the 
naked  host  set  out."  At  the  outlet  of  Lake  Simcoe 
they  all  stopped  to  fish.  It  was  the  8th  of  September 
when  the  Huron  fleet  crossed  Lake  Simcoe,  went  up  the 
little  river  Talbot,  across  the  portage  to  Balsam  Lake, 
and  down  the  chain  of  lakes  which  form  the  sources  of 
the  river  Trent. 

"  They  stopped  and  encamped  for  a  deer-hunt.  Five 
hundred  men,  in  line,  like  the  skirmishers  of  an  army 
advancing  to  battle,  drove  the  game  to  the  end  of  a 


CHAMPLAIN    IN   NEW    FRANCE  29 

woody  point ;  and  the  canoe-men  killed  them  with  spears 
and  arrows  as  they  took  to  the  river. 

"The  canoes  now  left  the  mouth  of  the  Trent,  and  cross 
ing  Lake  Ontario,  landed  within  the  borders  of  New  York. 
After  hiding  their  light  craft  in  the  woods,  the  warriors 
took  up  their  swift  and  wary  march,  filing  in  silence  be 
tween  the  woods  and  the  lake  for  twelve  miles  along  the 
pebbly  strand.  Then  they  struck  inland,  threaded  the 
forest,  crossed  the  river  Onondaga,  and  after  a  march  of 
four  days,  were  deep  within  the  western  limits  of  the 
Iroquois."  The  hostile  town  was  close  at  hand.  The 
young  Hurons  in  advance  saw  the  Iroquois  at  work 
among  the  pumpkins  and  maize,  gathering  their  harvest, 
for  it  was  the  10th  of  October.  Nothing  could  keep 
back  the  hare-brained  crew.  They  screamed  their  war- 
cry  and  rushed  in  ;  but  the  Iroquois  defeated  and  pursued 
them  until  driven  back  by  Champlain  and  his  Frenchmen. 
Then  the  victors  retired  to  their  defences. 

It  was  the  town  of  the  Senecas,  the  largest  and  one 
of  the  most  warlike  of  the  five  Iroquois  tribes,  and  its 
site  was  on  or  near  one  of  the  lakes  in  central  New 
York.  Champlain  says  its  defensive  works  were  stronger 
than  those  of  the  Huron  villages.  They  had  four  rows  of 
palisades,  formed  of  trunks  and  trees,  thirty  feet  high,  set 
aslant  in  the  earth  and  crossing  one  another  near  the  top, 
where  they  supported  a  kind  of  gallery,  well  defended 


30  PIONEERS   ON    LAND    AND   SEA 

by  shot-proof  timber  and  furnished  with  wooden  gutters 
for  quenching  fire.  A  pond  or  lake,  which  washed 
one  side  of  the  palisade  and  was  led  by  sluices  into  the 
town,  gave  a  good  supply  of  water. 

Champlain  was  much  vexed  with  his  allies  for  their 
useless  attack  and  tried  to  show  them  how  to  take  the 
fort.  A  wooden  tower  was  made,  high  enough  to  over 
look  the  palisade  and  large  enough  to  shelter  four  or 
five  marksmen.  Several  movable  shields  were  also  made. 
In  four  hours  all  was  ready  and  the  attack  began.  "  Two 
hundred  of  the  strongest  warriors  dragged  the  tower 
close  to  the  palisade,  and  three  of  -the  Frenchmen  mounted 
it  and  opened  a  raking  fire  along  the  galleries,  now 
thronged  with  wild  and  naked  defenders.  But  the  Hu- 
rons  could  not  be  kept  back.  They  left  their  movable 
shields,  and,  deaf  to  every  command,  swarmed  out  like 
bees  upon  the  open  field,  leaped,  shouted,  shrieked  their 
war-cries,  and  shot  off  their  arrows,  while  the  Iroquois 
sent  back  a  shower  of  stones  and  arrows  in  reply.  A 
Huron,  bolder  than  the  rest,  ran  forward  with  firebrands 
to  burn  the  palisade,  and  others  followed  with  wood  to 
feed  the  flames.  But  it  was  stupidly  kindled  on  the 
leeward  side,  without  the  shields  intended  to  cover  it, 
and  torrents  of  water,  poured  down  from  the  gutters 
above,  soon  put  it  out.  Champlain  tried  in  vain  to 
restore  order.  Each  warrior  was  yelling  at  the  top  of 


CHAMPLAIN    IN   NEW   FRANCE 


31 


his  throat,  and  his  voice  was  drowned  in  the  dreadful 
din.  Thinking,  as  he  says,  that  his  head  would  split 
with  shouting,  he  gave  over  the  attempt  and  busied  hiin- 


CHAMPLAIN'S  ATTACK  ON  AN  IROQDOIS  FORT 

self  and  his  men  with  picking  off  the  Iroquois  along  the 
ramparts." 

The  attack  lasted  three  hours,  when  the  Hurons  fell 
back  to  their  camp  with  seventeen  warriors  wounded. 
Champlain,  too,  was  hurt  and  for  a  time  disabled.  He 


32  PIONEERS    ON    LAND    AND    SEA 

wanted,  however,  to  renew  the  attack,  but  the  Hurons 
refused,  unless  the  five  hundred  allies  they  expected 
should  appear.  They  waited  five  days  in  vain  and  then 
began  to  retreat.  Their  wounded,  Champlain  among 
the  rest,  had  been  packed  in  baskets  so  that  they  might 
be  carried,  each  on  the  back  of  a  strong  warrior, "  bundled 
in  a  heap,"  says  Champlain,  "  doubled  and  strapped  to 
gether  after  such  a  fashion  that  one  could  no  more  move 
than  an  infant  in  swaddling  clothes  —  I  lost  all  patience, 
and  as  soon  as  I  could  bear  my  weight  I  got  out  of  this 
prison." 

At  length  the  dismal  march  was  ended.  They  reached 
the  spot  where  their  canoes  were  hidden,  found  them 
untouched,  embarked  and  crossed  to  the  northern  shore 
of  Lake  Ontario.  The  Hurons  had  promised  Champlain 
an  escort  to  Quebec  but  each  warrior  found  good  reasons 
for  refusing  to  go  or  lend  his  canoe.  The  help  of  "  the 
man  with  an  iron  breast "  no  longer  meant  victory  and 
they  were  careless  of  his  friendship.  A  chief  offered 
him  the  shelter  of  his  lodge  and  he  spent  an  unpleasant 
winter  with  the  Hurons.  In  the  spring,  when  Champlain 
returned  to  Quebec,  his  Indian  host  went  with  him  and 
was  delighted  with  all  that  he  saw.  The  fort,  the  ship, 
the  armor,  the  plumes,  the  cannon,  the  houses  and  bar 
racks,  the  splendors  of  the  chapel,  and  above  all  the  good 
cheer,  pleased  him  wonderfully  and  he  paddled  back  to 


CHAMPLAIN    IN   NEW   FRANCE 


33 


his  lodge  in  the  woods  bewildered  with  admiring  aston 
ishment. 


EARLY  QUEBEC  (from  an  old  print) 

Champlain  made  no  more  excursions  to  the  wilder 
ness  but  devoted  himself  to  his  colonies.  Quarrels  among 
those  in  authority  in  France  and  among  the  traders 


34  riONKKltS   ON    LAND    AND   SEA 

themselves  kept  the  colony  from  prospering.  The  colo 
nists  did  not  raise  enough  to  support  themselves  and 
supplies  from  France  did  not  come  often.  In  1629  a 
squadron  of  English  ships  appeared  before  Quebec  and 
demanded  its  surrender.  Champlain's  company  was  too 
weak  to  defend  the  fort  and  surrendered  on  condition 
that  the  men  would  .be  returned  to  France.  Three  years 
later  England  gave  up  her  claim  to  New  France  and 
Champlain  returned  to  Quebec,  where  he  remained  until 
his  death  in  1635. 


CHAPTER  II 

HENRY   HUDSON  i 

OF  Henry  Hudson's  boyhood,  history  tells  us  nothing. 
It  is  supposed  that  he  belonged  to  a  Hudson  family  that 
lived  in  England,  some  of  whose  members  were  friends  of 
Sir  Humphrey  Gilbert,  Sir  Walter  Raleigh,  and  others 
much  interested  in  seafaring  and  discovery.  We  know, 
however,  that  he  was  a  citizen  of  London  and  that  on  the 
first  day  of  May,  1607,  he  sailed  for  Greenland  in  command 
of  an  arctic  expedition.  He  tried  to  sail  between  Green 
land  and  Spitzbergen,  in  the  hope  of  passing  over  the 
North  Pole  and  finding  an  open  sea  over  which  he  could 
sail  to  the  eastern  ports  of  Asia.  In  1608  he  tried  to 
pass  between  Spitzbergen  and  Nova  Zembla,  which  lie  to 
the  north  of  Russia.  "  In  this  high  latitude  he  tells  us 
that  on  the  morning  of  the  15th  of  June  two  of  his  sail 
ors  saw  a  mermaid,  who  came  close  to  the  ship's  side  and 
gazed  earnestly  at  them.  Her  face  and  breasts  were 
those  of  a  woman,  but  below  she  was  a  fish  as  big  as  a 
halibut,  and  in  color  like  a  speckled  mackerel."  It  is 

1  Authority :  Fiske's  "  Dutch  and  Quaker  Colonies  in  America." 
2Fiske's  "  Dutch  and  Quaker  Colonies  in  America." 

35 


36  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

supposed  that  this  creature  was  a  seal,  an  animal  which 
at  that  time  was  little  known  by  English  sailors. 

When  Hudson  returnel  tox  England  after  these  voyages, 
he  found  himself  famous.  He  had  been  nearer  the  pole 
than  anyone  else  and  had  proved  himself  a  very  fine  sea 
man.  The  Dutch  East  India  Company  was  anxious  to 
secure  his  services  and  persuaded  him  to  make  a  voyage 
for  them.  On  the  4th  of  April,  1609,  Henry  Hudson 
set  sail  on  the  Zuyder  Zee.  He  commanded  a  little  yacht 
of  eighty  tons  burden  and  had  a  crew  of  sixteen  or  eigh 
teen  sailors.  About  half  of  the  crew  were  English  but 
the  mate  was  a  Netherlander.  His  ship  was  named  the 
Half  Moon.  On  the  fifth  day  of  May  he  sailed  around 
North  Cape  and  headed  for  Nova  Zernbla.  But  the  sea 
was  so  full  of  ice  that  passage  was  very  difficult  and  the 
crew  became  mutinous.  Hudson  decided  that  he  would 
try  another  way  of  reaching  Asia.  On  the  maps  of  the 
early  voyagers  to  the  New  World  a  great  sea  was  pictured 
behind  Virginia,  divided  from  the  Atlantic  by  a  narrow 
isthmus  near  the  40th  parallel  and  called  the  sea  of  Yer- 
razano.  It  might  be  possible  to  find  a  strait  near  here 
that  would  lead  into  this  sea.  Captain  John  Smith,  who 
had  explored  along  the  coast  the  preceding  summer, 
thought  it  possible  and  had  written  to  Hudson  about  it ; 
so  Hudson  turned  his  ship  and  started  for  the  New  World. 

On  the  13th   of  May  the   little   Half  Moon    stopped 


HENRY   HUDSON  37 

at  the  Faroe  Islands  and  the  casks  were  filled  with  fresh 
water.  On  the  3d  of  June  the  sailors  were  surprised  at 
the  force  of  the  ocean  current  which  we  now  call  the 
Gulf  Stream.  On  the  18th  of  July  they  arrived  in 
Penobscot  Bay,  with  the  foremast  gone  and  the  sails 
much  the  worse  for  wear.  Here  they  stopped  for  a  week 
to  mend  their  sails  and  make  a  new  mast.  They  enjoyed 
good  living  while  here,  for  they  caught  fifty  cod,  a  hun 
dred  lobsters,  and  one  great  halibut.  They  were  visited 
by  two  French  shallops  full  of  Indians.  The  mate  of  the 
Half  Moon,  who  kept  a  journal,  says :  "  Wee  espied  two 
French  shallops  full  of  the  country  people  come  into  the 
harbor,  but  they  offered  us  no  wrong,  seeing  we  stood 
upon  our  guard.  They  brought  many  beaver  skinnes  and 
other  fine  furres,  which  they  would  have  changed  for 
redde  gowns.  For  the  French  trade  with  them  for  red 
cassockes,  knives,  hatchets,  copper,  kettles,  .  .  .  beades 
and  other  trifles.  .  .  .  We  kept  good  watch  for  fear  of 
being  betrayed  by  the  people,  and  perceived  where  the}7 
layd  their  shallops."1 

Nine  days  after  leaving  Penobscot  Bay  the  Half  Moon 
reached  the  neighborhood  of  Cape  Cod.  On  the  18th 
of  August  she  was  as  far  south  as  Accomac  penin 
sula,  where  Hudson  saw  an  opening  which  he  thought 
was  the  James  River,  for  he  says,  "  This  is  the  entrance 

1  Hart's  "  American  History  told  by  Contemporaries." 


38 


PIONEERS    ON    LAND    AND   SEA 


into  the  King's  River  in' Virginia,  where  our  Englishmen 
are."     Presently  turning  north  again,  he  entered  Dela 
ware    Bay   on   the   28th  day  of   August    and  began  to 
take  soundings.     The  water  was  shallow  in  many  places 
and  the  swift  current  made  him  sure  that  he  was  at  the 


THE  PALISADES  OF  THE  HUDSON 

mouth  of  a  large  river.  So  he  sailed  farther  north  and, 
on  the  3d  of  September,  stopped  somewhere  between 
Sandy  Hook  and  Staten  Island. 

They  entered  the  bay  and  says  the  mate's  journal: 
"  This  day  the  people  of  the  country  came  aboord  of  us, 
seeming  very  glad  of  our  coming,  and  brought  greene 


HENRY    HUDSON 


tobacco,  and  gave  us  of  it  for  knives  and  beads.  They 
goe  in  deere  skins  loose,  well  dressed.  They  have  yellow 
copper.  They  desire  cloathes,  and  are  very  civ  ill.  They 
have  great  store  of  maize  or  wheate,  whereof  they  make 
good  bread.  The  country  is  full  of  great  and  tall  oakes. 

"  The  fifth,  in  the  morning,  as  soon  as  the  day  was 
light,  the  wind  ceased  and  the  flood  came.  So  we  heaved 
off  our  ship  againe  into  five  fathoms  of  water,  and  sent 
our  boate  to  sound  the  bay,  and  we  found  that  there  was 
three  fathoms  hard  by  the  souther  shoare.  Our  men  went 
on  land  there,  and  saw  great  store  of  men,  women,  and 
children  who  gave  them  tobacco  at  their  coming  on  land. 
So  they  went  up  into  the  woods,  and  saw  great  store  of 
very  goodly  oakes  and  some  currants.  For  one  of  them 
came  aboord  and  brought  some  dryed,  and  gave  me  some, 
which  were  sweet  and  good.  This  day  many  of  the  peo 
ple  came  aboord,  some  in  mantles  of  feathers,  and  some 
in  skinnes  of  divers  sorts  of  good  furres.  Some  women 
also  came  to  us  with  hempe.  They  had  red  copper 
tobacco  pipes,  and  other  things  of  copper  they  did  wear 
about  their  necks.  At  night  they  went  on  land  againe, 
so  we  rode  very  quiet,  but  durst  not  trust  them." 

Their  fears  were  well  founded,  for  the  next  day  "in 
the  morning  was  fair  weather,  and  our  master  sent  John 
Colin  an,  with  foure  other  men  in  our  boate,  over  to  the 
north-side  to  sound  the  other  river,  being  four  leagues 


40  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

from  us.  They  found  by  the  way  shoald  water,  two 
fathoms :  but  at  the  north  of  the  river  eighteen,  and 
twenty  fathoms,  and  very  good  riding  for  ships;  and  a 
narrow  river  to  the  westward,  between  two  ilands.  The 
lands,  they  told  us,  were  as  pleasant  with  grasse  and 
flowers  and  goodly  trees  as  ever  they  had  seene,  and  very 
sweet  smells  came  from  them.  So  they  went  in  two 
leagues  and  saw  an  open  sea,  and  returned ;  and  as  they 
came  backe,  they  were  set  upon  by  two  canoes,  the  one 
having  twelve,  the  other  fourteene  men.  The  night  came 
on,  and  it  began  to  rayne,  so  that  their  match  went  out ; 
and  they  had  one  man  slaine  in  the  fight,  which  was  an 
Englishman,  named  John  Col  man,  with  an  arrow  shot 
into  his  throat,  and  two  more  hurt.  It  grew  so  darke 
that  they  could  not  find  the  ship  that  night,  but  labored 
too  and  fro  with  their  oares.  They  had  so  great  a 
streame,  that  their  grapnell  would  not  hold  them. 

"  The  eleventh  was  faire  and  very  hot  weather  .  .  .  wee 
anchored,  and  saw  that  it  was  a  very  good  harbour  for  all 
windes,  and  rode  all  night.  The  people  of  the  country 
came  aboord  of  us,  making  show  of  love,  and  gave  us 
tabacco  and  Indian  wheat,  and  departed  for  that  night ; 
but  we  durst  not  trust  them." 

As  the  Half  Moon  passed  up  the  river,  she  was  often 
greeted  with  flights  of  arrows  and  sometimes  answered 
the  salute  with  musket  shots.  On  the  14th  of  Sep- 


42  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

tember  the  ship  passed  between  Stony  and  Verplanck's 
points.  The  journal  says :  The  "  fourteenth,  in  the 
morning,  being  very  faire  weather,  the  wind  south-east, 
we  sayled  up  the  river  twelve  leagues.  .  .  .  The  river 
is  a  mile  broad :  there  is  high  land  on  both  sides.  The 
land  grew  very  high  and  mountainous. 

"  The  fifteenth,  in  the  morning,  was  misty,  untill  the 
sun  arose :  then  it  cleared.  So  we  weighed  with  the 
wind  at  south,  and  ran  up  into  the  river  twentie  leagues, 
passing  by  high  mountains.  Wee  had  a  very  good  depth, 
as  sixe,  seven,  eight,  nine,  ten,  twelve,  and  thirteene 
fathoms,  and  great  store  of  salmons  in  the  river.  This 
morning  our  two  savages  got  out  of  a  port  and  swam 
away.  After  wee  were  under  sayle,  they  called  to  us  in 
scorne.  At  night  we  came  to  other  mountains  which  lie 
from  the  rivers  side.  There  we  found  very  loving  people, 
and  caught  great  store  of  very  good  fish.  "  * 

On  the  22d,  after  passing  as  far  north  as  Troy,  the 
water  became  so  shallow  that  the  voyagers  could  go  no 
farther.  This  was  plainly  not  the  passage  to  the  western 
ocean.  They  now  started  on  their  return  voyage  down 
the  river.  Their  adventures  are  told  in  the  mate's 
journal.  "The  people  of  the  mountaynes  came  aboord 
us,  wondering  at  our  ships  and  weapons.  We  bought 
some  small  skinnes  of  them  for  trifles.  This  afternoone, 

1  Hart's  "  American  History  told  by  Contemporaries." 


HENRY    HUDSON  43 

one  canoe  kept  hanging  under  our  sterne  with  one  man  in 
it,  which  we  could  not  keepe  from  thence,  who  got  up  by 
our  rudder  to  the  cabin  window,  and  stole  out  my  pillow, 
and  two  shirts  and  two  bandeleeres.  Our  master's  mate 
shot  at  him  and  killed  him.  Whereupon  all  the  rest  fled 
away,  some  in  their  canoes,  and  some  leapt  out  of  them 
into  the  water.  We  manned  our  boat  and  got  our  things 
againe.  Then  one  of  them  that  swamme  got  hold  of  our 
boat  thinking  to  overthrow  it.  But  our  cooke  took  a 
sword  and  cut  off  one  of  his  hands  and  he  was  drowned. 
By  this  time  the  ebbe  was  come  and  we  weighed  and  got 
down  two  leagues."  l 

At  one  time  the  Indians  came  in  hundreds  in  their  bark 
canoes,  shooting  their  arrows  at  the  boat  with  little  effect, 
but  the  ship's  cannon  sank  their  boats  and  the  muskets  did 
deadly  work.  Sometimes  the  meetings  with  the  natives 
were  friendly.  Hudson  tells  of  an  experience  near  the 
site  of  Catskill.  "I  sailed  to  the  shore  in  one  of  their 
canoes,  with  an  old  man,  who  was  the  chief  of  a  tribe 
consisting  of  forty  men  and  seventeen  women ;  these  1 
saw  in  a  house  well  constructed  of  oak  bark,  and  circular 
in  shape,  so  that  it  had  the  appearance  of  being  well  built, 
with  an  arched  roof.  It  contained  a  great  quantity  of 
maize  .  .  .  and  beans  of  last  years  growth,  and  there  lay 
near  the  house  for  the  purpose  of  drying,  enough  to  load 

1  Fiske's  "  Dutch  and  Quaker  Colonies  in  America." 


44  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

three  ships,  besides  what  was  growing  in  the  fields.  On 
our  coming  into  the  house,  two  mats  were  spread  out  to 
sit  upon,  and  immediately  some  food  was  served  in  well- 
made  wooden  bowls;  two  men  were  also  despatched  at 
once  with  bows  and  arrows  in  quest  of  game,  who  soon 
after  brought  in  a  pair  of  pigeons  which  they  had  shot. 
They  likewise  killed  a  fat  dog  and  skinned  it  with  great 
haste,  with  shells  which  they  got  out  of  the  water.  They 
supposed  that  I  would  remain  with  them  for  the  night, 
but  I  returned  after  a  short  time  on  board  the  ship.  The 
land  is  the  finest  for  cultivation  that  I  ever  in  my  life 
set  foot  upon,  and  it  also  abounds  in  trees  of  every 
description."  * 

On  the  4th  of  October  Hudson  left  behind  him  the 
shore  which  was  called  by  the  natives  Manna-hatta  and 
set  sail  for  Europe.  On  the  7th  of  November  he 
reached  Dartmouth  and  the  English  members  of  his  crew 
made  him  stop  there.  He  sent  a  report  of  his  voyage  to 
Amsterdam  and  asked  for  more  money  and  some  men  to 
take  the  place  of  the  discontented  English  sailors.  He 
intended  to  start  in  March  on  a  fresh  search  for  the 
Northwest  Passage.  The  directors  of  the  Dutch  East 
India  Company  asked  him  to  come  first  to  Holland. 
King  James  refused  to  let  him  go  and  the  Half  Moon  was 
sent  to  Amsterdam  without  him.  A  new  ship  was  fitted 

1  Fiske's  "  Dutch  and  Quaker  Colonies  in  America." 


HENRY   HUDSON  45 

out  in  England  and  in  April  the  new  voyage  was  begun. 
The  English  wanted  the  glory  of  the  discoveries  the 
famous  sailor  expected  to  make. 

In  time  the  ship  entered  the  great  inland  sea  known  as 
Hudson  Bay.  Trien  winter  came  on  and  from  Novem 
ber,  1610,  to  the  following  June,  the  ship  was  locked  in 
ice  at  the  southern  end  of  James  Bay.  As  soon  as  the 
ice  broke  up,  the  crew  insisted  upon  going  home  but 
Hudson  decided  to  go  westward.  The  crew  mutinied  and, 
three  days  after  leaving  winter  quarters,  Henry  Hudson 
with  his  son  John  Hudson  and  seven  sick  men  were  set 
adrift  in  an  open  boat  and  the  ship  started  for  England. 
The  leaders  of  the  mutiny  were  killed  by  Indians 
before  reaching  the  ocean.  As  soon  as  the  ship  came 
to  England,  the  crew  was  thrown  into  jail  and  a  ship 
was  sent  in  search  of  the  great  sailor,  but  the  search  was 
unsuccessful. 

Of  the  results  of  these  voyages,  John  Fiske  says :  "  In 
all  that  he  attempted  he  failed,  and  yet  he  achieved  great 
results  that  were  not  contemplated  in  his  schemes.  He 
started  two  immense  industries,  the  Spitzbergen  whale 
fisheries  and  the  Hudson  Bay  fur  trade,  and  he  brought 
the  Dutch  to  Manhattan  Island.  No  realization  of  his 
dreams  could  have  approached  the  astonishing  reality 
which  would  have  greeted  him  could  he  have  looked 
through  the  coming  centuries  and  caught  a  glimpse 


46  PIONEERS    ON    LAND    AND    SKA 

of  what  the  voyager  now  beholds  in  sailing  up 
the  .bay  of  New  York.  But  what  perhaps  would  have 
surprised  him  most  of  all  would  have  been  to  become  a 
part  of  the  folklore  of  the  beautiful  river  to  which  it  is 
attached,  that  he  was  to  figure  as  a  Dutchman  in  spite 
of  himself,  in  legend  and  on  the  stage,  that  when  it  is 
thunder  weather  on  the  Catskills  the  children  should  say 
it  is  Hendrik  Hudson  playing  at  skittles  with  his  goblin 


crew." 


CHAPTER  III 

WALTER  RALEIGH  i 

v. 

ABOUT  the  middle  of  the  sixteenth  century,  1552,  a 
boy  named  Walter  Raleigh  was  living  with  his  father  and 
mother  in  a  small  farmhouse  vnear  the  Otter  River  in  the 
south  of  England.  His  father,  though  not  rich,  belonged 
to  a  family  which  had  long  been  rich  and  powerful  in 
England.  The  mother  also  belonged  to  a  noble  family, 
being  a  descendant  of  the  Courtenays,  the  famous  English 
emperors  of  Constantinople.  The  father  and  mother  were 
very  proud  of  their  son,  who  was  noted  in  the  neighbor 
hood  for  his  beauty.  His  features  were  regular,  his  com 
plexion  rosy,  his  eyes  large,  bright,  and  brown,  and  his 
mind  quick  and  active.  He  received  his  early  education 
at  home  from  his  mother.  He  was  fond  of  outdoor 
sports  and  as  soon  as  he  was  old  enough  was  the  com 
panion  of  his  father  as  he  galloped  over  the  hills,  his  pack 
of  hounds  yelping  at  his  sides,  chasing  the  fleet-footed  deer. 

About  thirty  miles  from  the  farmhouse  in  the  midst 
of  a  forest  stood  an  old  castle,  whose  lofty  towers  rose 

1  Authorities :  Bancroft's  "  History  of  the  United  States,"  Higginson's 
"  American  Explorers." 

47 


48  PIONEERS   ON   LAND    AND   SEA 

high  above  the  surrounding  trees.  Here  lived  Waltei 
Raleigh's  half-brothers,  Humphrey  and  Adrian  Gilbert ; 
for  his  mother,  when  a  girl,  had  wedded  a  brave  knight. 
Sir  Otho  Gilbert,  who  died  when  his  sons  were  yet  young. 
After  her  husband's  death  she  married  the  quiet  country 
gentleman  who  became  Walter  Raleigh's  father.  These 
half-brothers  had  been  much  abroad  in  the  world  and  had 
met  with  many  stirring  adventures  in  war  and  on  the  sea. 
They  were  very  fond  of  their  young  half-brother,  who 
delighted  in  visiting  them  and  was  never  tired  of  sitting 
with  them  by  the  big  fireplace  on  a  winter  night,  hearing 
them  tell  of  their  adventures,  and  he  was  never  so  happy 
as  when  following  them  to  the  hunt. 

As  his  house  was  near  the  ocean,  he  often  went  to  the 
cottages  of  the  sailors  along  the  southern  coast.  These 
men  came  home  to  rest  after  long  and  exciting  voyages 
and  were  very  fond  of  telling  of  adventures  at  sea. 
Walter  Raleigh  was  equally  fond  of  listening  to  their 
stories  of  battle,  shipwreck,  and  discovery.  He  read  of 
the  discoveries  of  Columbus,  Magellan,  Pizarro,  and  Cor 
tes  with  great  interest  and  thought  he  would  like  to  be 
the  hero  of  such  adventures. 

When  about  fifteen  he  left  his  quiet  home  for  Oxford. 
He  entered  into  his  college  work  with  as  much  zest  as  he 
had  shown  in  pursuit  of  amusement  before.  He  was  well 
liked  by  the  young  men  he  met  and  became  friendly- 


WALTER    RALEIGH  49 

with  many  noted  men.  One  of  his  friends,  Francis 
Bacon,  tells  an  anecdote  of  Walter  Raleigh  which  shows 
something  of  his  spirit  at  that  time.  "  Whilst  Raleigh 
was  a  scholar  at  Oxford  there  was  a  cowardly  fellow,  who 
happened  to  be  a  very  good  archer;  but  having  been 
grossly  abused  by  another,  he  bemoaned  himself  to 
Raleigh,  and  asked  his  advice  what  he  should  do  to 
repair  the  wrong  that  had  been  offered  to  him.  <  Why,' 
promptly  answered  Raleigh,  '  challenge  him  to  a  match 
of  shooting.' ' 

When  Raleigh  had  been  at  Oxford  almost  three  years, 
he  was  offered  a  chance  to  try  some  of  the  adventures 
he  had  so  long  thought  and  dreamed  about.  A  conflict 
was  going  on  in  France  between  the  Huguenots,  or 
Protestants,  and  the  Catholic  king,  Charles  IX.  Eliza 
beth,  who  was  queen  of  England  at  this  time,  sympa 
thized  with  the  Protestants  and  encouraged  adventurous 
noblemen  to  help  them,  though  she  offered  no  direct 
aid  herself.  A  young  cavalier,  Henry  Champenon, 
a  cousin  of  Walter  Raleigh,  was  going  to  France  with 
a  company  of  one  hundred  young  men  to  take  part  in 
the  war  and  win  what  glory  they  could.  This  cousin 
asked  Walter  Raleigh  to  join  him  and  the  temptation 
was  too  great  to  be  resisted.  A  fleet  of  four  vessels  took 
the  little  company  to  France,  where  they  joined  the  army 
of  Coligny,  the  great  leader.  What  their  exploits  were 


.~>U  I'lONEKKS    ON    LAND    AND    SKA 

history  fails  to  tell,  but  no  doubt  they  performed  many 
brave  deeds,  and  Walter  Raleigh  received  a  training  in 
warfare  which  was  of  great  use  to  him  in  after  life.  He 
remained  six  years  in  France.  He  continued  his  studies 
when  he  was  not  fighting  and  always  took  careful  note 
of  all  that  he  heard  and  saw. 

When,  at  last,  Walter  Raleigh  returned  to  England,  he 
was  no  longer  a  boy  but  a  tall,  broad-shouldered  man  of 
twenty-four.  He  was  thought  to  be  very  handsome  and 
was  noted  for  his  refined  and  graceful  manner.  He 
attracted  the  attention  of  the  queen  and  many  nobles  at 
court.  Soon  after  his  return  war  broke  out  in  Holland. 
An  expedition  was  sent  from  England  to  help  the  Dutch 
against  the  Spaniards  and  Raleigh  was  given  command 
of  a  company.  The  expedition  was  a  successful  one ;  the 
Spaniards  were  defeated  and  Raleigh  returned  with  new 
laurels. 

In  the  meantime,  Raleigh's  half-brother,  Sir  Humphrey 
Gilbert,  whose  ambition  had  long  been  excited  by  voyages 
of  discovery,  had  made  up  his  mind  to  start  out  upon  a 
voyage  himself.  He  wanted  to  explore  the  still  mysteri 
ous  continent  of  America.  He  fitted  up  a  squadron  of 
vessels  which  he  himself  was  to  command.  Walter 
Raleigh  reached  London  just  in  time  to  join  him. 
When  the  squadron  dropped  down  the  English  Channel 
and  put  to  sea,  Raleigh  was  on  the  flagship  with  Sir 


WALTER   RALEIGH  51 

Humphrey.  It  was  his  first  experience  of  life  on  the 
ocean  and  he  watched  everything  with  keen  interest. 
He  learned  the  methods  of  finding  the  latitude  and 
longitude  of  the  ship's  position,  the  arrangement  and 
management  of  the  sails,  and  the  discipline  which  was 
imposed  upon  the  crew.  As  he  had  little  to  do  himself, 
he  spent  much  of  his  time  on  board  in  study.  Mean 
while  he  shared  the  rough  life  of  the  sailors,  enduring 
many  of  the  hardships  to  which  they  were  subjected. 

The  expedition  was  not  a  successful  one.  One  of  the 
ships  mutinied  and  sailed  away.  The  rest  were  beset 
by  Spanish  cruisers  and  escaped  only  by  flight.  Sir 
Humphrey  returned  to  Portsmouth  with  his  ships  badly 
damaged  and  the  expedition  was  given  up. 

Raleigh  was  next  sent  to  put  down  a  rebellion  in  Ire 
land.  Although  he  was  eager  for  adventure,  he  did  not 
like  this  work  of  fighting  people  who  were  struggling 
for  liberty.  "  I  disdain  this  charge,"  he  said  to  the 
Earl  of  Leicester,  "  as  much  as  to  keep  sheep."  But  he 
could  not  let  a  chance  go  by  to  add  to  his  fame  and 
accepted  a  captainship  in  spite  of  his  scruples.  He 
fought  bravely  and  did  so  much  toward  putting  down 
the  rebellion  that  his  praises  were  sounded  in  England 
and  reached  the  ears  of  Queen  Elizabeth. 

At  the  age  of  thirty  Raleigh  returned  to  England. 
Soon  after  his  return  a  happy  adventure  had  much  to  do 


62  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

with  his  future  fortune.  Queen  Elizabeth  was  stopping 
at  the  castle  and  a  crowd  of  gayly  dressed  courtiers 
were  awaiting  her  appearance.  "  Grave  statesmen,  all 
beruffed,  their  white  beards  carefully  trimmed  and 
daintily  pointed;  fine  young  cavaliers,  sparkling  with 
gems,  attired  in  rich  velvets  and  long  plumes,  and  armed 
with  gold-hilted  swords ;  stately  dames  and  beautiful 
young  girls,  were  gathered  on  the  thick  green  lawn 
beneath  the  palace  portals;  while  the  trumpets  gave 
forth  inspiriting  sounds,  and  lines  of  soldiers  were  drawn 
up  along  the  bank."  Soon  the  queen  appeared,  and, 
surrounded  by  a  gay  group  of  ladies  and  courtiers,  set 
out  for  a  walk  in  the  park.  It  had  rained  during  the 
day  and  small  pools  of  water  still  stood  in  places  along 
the  walk.  The  queen  paused  before  a  muddy  place  in 
her  path,  disliking  to  soil  her  dainty  boots.  At  the 
instant,  Walter  Raleigh  stepped  forward  and  threw  his 
handsome  velvet  cloak  over  the  mud.  The  queen  smiled 
at  him  and  went  on  with  her  walk.  But  she  kept 
Raleigh  at  her  side  and  seemed  very  friendly  toward  him. 
She  gave  him,  soon  afterward,  great  estates  in  both 
England  and  Ireland. 

In  the  meantime  Sir  Humphrey  Gilbert  was  busy  with 
plans  for  discoveries  and  settlement  in  the  New  World. 
Walter  Raleigh  joined  eagerly  in  these  plans.  They 
wished  to  make  a  settlement  in  Newfoundland.  The 


WALTER    RALEIGH 


53 


expedition  set  out  in  1583,  commanded  by  Sir  Humphrey, 
Raleigh  remaining  at  home.  Sir  Humphrey  reached  the 
coast  of  Newfoundland  but  his  men  became  unruly  and 


SIR  WALTER  RALEIGH 

demanded  that  they  be  taken  home  again.  They  started 
for  England,  but  during  a  storm  the  Squirrel,  Sir 
Humphrey's  ship,  was  sunk,  and  all  on  board  were  lost 


54  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SKA 

Raleigh  was  much  grieved  but  not  discouraged  by  the 
sad  death  of  his  brother.  As  soon  as  possible  he  fitted 
out  another  fleet  to  colonize  the  New  World.  This  time 
he  thought  he  would  make  a  settlement  farther  south 
and  from  Queen  Elizabeth  obtained  the  right  to  plant 
colonies  in  any  region  not  already  occupied  and  to  have, 
himself,  the  government  of  such  colonies  as  he  might 
plant.  In  1584  he  sent  out  two  vessels,  commanded  by 
Philip  Amadas  and  Arthur  Barlow,  to  explore  the  coast 
of  the  Carolinas.  The  ocean  was  quiet  and  they  reached 
the  shores  of  North  Carolina  after  a  pleasant  voyage. 
As  they  drew  near  land,  the  fragrance  was  "  as  if  they  had 
been  in  the  midst  of  some  delicate  garden,  abounding 
with  all  kinds  of  odoriferous  flowers."  They  sailed  along 
the  coast  for  120  miles  in  search  of  a  good  harbor,  and, 
landing  on  an  island  near  the  mainland,  took  possession 
of  the  country  for  the  queen  of  England.  They  were 
delighted  with  all  they  saw.  The  natives  who  came  to 
the  shore  were  friendly  and  they  were  entertained  on  the 
island  of  Roanoke  by  the  king's  mother.  "  The  people 
were  most  gentle,  loving,  and  faithful,  void  of  all  guile 
and  treason,  and  such  as  lived  after  the  manner  of  the 
golden  age." 

The  adventurers  were  pleased  with  the  New  World, 
and,  without  taking  time  to  explore  much,  returned  to 
England. 


WALTER    RALEIGH  50 

In  1585  Raleigh  sent  out  another  company  which 
sailed  in  a  fleet  of  seven  vessels  and  had  as  commander 
Sir  Richard  Grenville,  a  friend  of  Raleigh.  These  ships 
carried  108  colonists.  Ralph  Lane  was  made  governor. 
The  fleet  crossed  the  ocean  in  safety  but  came  near 
being  wrecked  upon  the  cape  which  was  then  for  the 
first  time  called  Cape  Fear.  They  made  their  way  to 
Roanoke.  After  spending  eight  days  in  exploring  the 
coast,  Grenville  returned  to  England. 

Lane  and  his  colonists  explored  the  country.  Lane 
wrote  at  the  time :  "  It  is  the  goodliest  soil  under  the 
cope  of  heaven ;  the  most  pleasing  territory  of  the  world ; 
the  continent  is  of  a  huge  and  unknown  greatness,  and 
very  well  peopled  and  towned,  though  savagely.  The 
climate  is  so  wholesome  that  we  have  not  been  sick  since 
we  touched  the  land.  If  Virginia  had  but  horses  and 
kine  and  were  inhabited  with  English,  no  realm  of  Chris 
tendom  were  comparable  to  it." 

Hariot,  the  historian  of  the  company,  examined  the 
productions  of  the  country.  He  observed  the  culture 
of  tobacco,  used  it,  and  believed  in  its  healing  power. 
Maize  and  the  tuberous  roots  of  the  potato  were  tried 
and  found  to  be  very  good  food.  The  natives  are  de 
scribed  as  "  too  feeble  to  inspire  terror ;  clothed  in  man 
tles  and  aprons  of  deer-skins ;  having  no  weapons  but 
wooden  $words,  and  bows  of  witch-hazel  with  arrows  of 


56  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

reeds ;  no  armors  but  targets  of  bark  and  sticks  wickered 
together  with  thread.  Their  towns  were  small,  the 
largest  containing  but  thirty  dwellings.  The  walls  of 
the  houses  were  made  of  bark  fastened  to  stakes,  and 
sometimes  consisted  of  poles  fixed  upright,  one  by  another, 
and  at  the  top  bent  over  and  fastened  as  arbors  are  some 
times  made  in  gardens."  The  tribes  warred  against  one 
another  but  seldom  in  open  battle.  They  lay  in  wait  to 
surprise  an  enemy  at  some  unexpected  place.  They 
thought  the  white  men  came  from  heaven,  and  the  guns, 
clocks,  burning  glass,  and  books  the  English  had  with 
them,  the  works  of  gods.  They  feared  the  English  and 
wished  to  get  rid  of  them.  Finding  they  were  eager  for 
gold,  some  of  the  savages  told  them  that  the  Roanoke 
River  gushed  from  a  rock  so  near  the  Pacific  Ocean  that 
the  surge  of  the  sea  sometimes  dashed  into  its  fountains. 
Its  banks  were  inhabited  by  a  nation  skilled  in  the  art 
of  refining  the  rich  ore  in  which  the  country  abounded. 
The  walls  of  the  city,  they  said,  glittered  from  the 
abundance  of  pearls. 

Lane  and  some  of  his  followers  tried  to  reach  the 
source  of  the  Roanoke  but  their  provisions  gave  out  and 
they  returned  after  a  short  time.  While  they  were  gone 
the  Indians  had  planned  to  get  rid  of  the  English  by 
attacking  them  while  the  two  parties  were  apart,  but 
Lane's  sudden  return  put  an  end  to  this  plot.  The 


WALTER   RALEIGH 


Indians  feared  that  the  English  would  take  their  land 
and  plotted  several  times  to  destroy  them,  but  were 
unsuccessful.  The  English  heard  of  some  of  these  plots 
and  decided  to  put  an  end  to  them.  They  asked  that 
they  might  visit  one  of  the  most  powerful  of  the  Indian 
chiefs.  The  Indians,  fearing  nothing,  received  them 
kindly.  At  a  signal  the  Eng 
lish  fell  upon  them  and 
murdered  the  chief  and  his 
followers. 

Lane  had  made  some  ex 
plorations  both  north  and 
south  of  the  Roanoke.  Better 
harbors  were  found  farther 
north  and  better  places  for 
colonization. 

The  colonists  at  Roanoke 
began  to  grow  impatient  as 
none  of  the  promised  stores 
came  from  England.  One 
day  they  were  delighted  to  see  the  sails  of  twenty-three 
vessels  on  the  ocean.  In  three  days  Sir  Francis  Drake, 
who  was  returning  from  the  sacking  of  St.  Domingo, 
Cartagena,  and  St.  Augustine,  anchored  his  fleet  "  in 
the  wild  road  of  their  bad  harbor.  He  conferred 
with  them  of  their  state  and  welfare,  and  how  things 


MAP  OF  CAROLINA 


58  PIONEERS   ON    LAND    AND    SEA 

had  passed  with  them.  They  answered  him  that  they 
lived  all,  but  hitherto  in  some  scarcity,  and  as  yet  could 
hear  of  no  supply  out  of  England;  therefore  they  re 
quested  him  that  he  would  leave  with  them  two  or 
three  ships,  that,  if  in  some  reasonable  time  they  heard 
not  out  of  England  they  might  then  return  themselves. 
Which  he  agreed  to.  Whilst  some  were  then  writing 
their  letters  to  send  into  England,  and  some  others  mak 
ing  reports  of  the  accidents  of  their  travels  each  to 
other,  —  some  on  land,  some  on  board,  —  a  great  storm 
arose  and  drove  most  of  their  fleet  from  their  anchor 
to  sea ;  in  which  ships  at  that  instant  were  the  chiefest 
of  the  English  colony.  The  rest  on  land,  perceiving  this, 
hastened  to  those  three  sails  which  were  appointed  to 
be  left  there ;  and  for  fear  they  should  be  left  behind, 
they  left  all  things  confusedly,  as  if  they  had  been 
chased  from  thence  by  a  mighty  army.  And  no  doubt 
so  they  were,  for  the  hand  of  God  came  upon  them  for 
the  cruelty  and  outrages  committed  by  some  of  them 
against  the  native  inhabitants  of  that  country." 

Soon  after  the  departure  of  the  colonists  "  out  of  this 
paradise  of  the  world "  a  ship  which  had  been  sent 
out  by  Raleigh  well  laden  with  supplies  reached  the 
island,  but  finding  no  one  there,  returned  to  England. 
About  fourteen  or  fifteen  days  later  Richard  Grenville, 
with  three  well-furnished  ships,  appeared  off  the  coast 


WALTER    RALEIGH  ,  59 

and  looked  in  vain  for  the  colony.  Unwilling  that  the 
English  should  lose  possession  of  the  country,  he  left 
fifteen  men  on  the  island  of  Roanoke  to  be  the  guard 
ians  of  English  rights. 

Sir  Walter  Raleigh  persevered  in  his  attempts  to 
colonize  Virginia  and  in  1587  sent  out  a  new  colony  of 
150  men.  John  White  was  made  governor  and  had  under 
him  twelve  assistants.  A  city  was  to  be  built  in  Virginia 
and  it  was  to  be  called  the  City  of  Raleigh.  It  was 
intended  that  the  city  should  be  built  farther  north 
than  the  island  of  Roanoke  but  the  men  landed  at 
Roanoke  to  search  for  the  fifteen  men  left  by  Grenville. 
No  sooner  were  they  landed  than  the  commander  of 
the  fleet,  who  was  to  take  the  ships  back  to  England, 
refused  to  go  farther.  It  was  late  in  July  when  they 
reached  America  and  he  claimed  that  the  summer  was 
too  far  spent  for  explorations.  "  Unto  this  were  all 
the  sailors  both  in  the  pinnace  and  ship  persuaded  by 
the  master ;  wherefore  it  booted  not  the  governor  to 
contend  with  them,  but  (we)  passed  to  Roanoke ;  and 
the  same  night  at  sunset  went  a-land  on  the  island,  in 
the  place  where  our  fifteen  men  were  left ;  but  we  found 
none  of  them,  nor  any  sign  that  they  had  been  there, 
saving  only  we  found  the  bones  of  one  of  those  fifteen 
which  the  savages  had  slain  long  before. 

"  The  three  and  twentieth  of  July,  the  governor,  with 


60          .  PIONEERS  OK  LAND  AND  SEA 

divers  of  his  company,  walked  to  the  north  end  of  the 
island,  where  Master  Ralph  Lane  had  his  fort  with  sundry 
necessary  and  decent  dwelling-houses,  made  by  his  men 
about  it  the  year  before,  where  we  hoped  to  find  some 
signs  or  certain  knowledge  of  our  fifteen  men.  When 
we  came  thither,  we  found  the  fort  razed  down,  but  all 
the  houses  standing  unhurt,  saving  that  the  nether  rooms 
of  them,  and  also  of  the  fort,  were  overgrown  with 
melons  of  divers  sorts,  and  deer  within  them  feeding  on 
those  melons ;  so  we  returned  to  our  company,  without 
hope  of  ever  seeing  any  of  the  fifteen  men  living. 

"The  same  day,  order  was  again  given  that  every 
man  should  be  employed  for  the  repairing  of  those 
houses  which  we  found  standing,  and  also  to  make  other 
new  cottages  for  such  as  should  need." 

From  Manteo,  a  friendly  Indian  of  Croatan,  the  colo 
nists  learned  that  the  fifteen  men  had  been  killed  by 
Indians. 

On  the  18th  of  August  "  Eleanor,  daughter  to  the 
governor,  and  wife  of  Ananias  Dare,  one  of  the  assist 
ants,  was  delivered  of  a  daughter  in  Roanoke,  and  the 
same  was  christened  there  the  Sunday  following;  and 
because  this  child  was  the  first  Christian  born  in  Vir 
ginia,  she  was  named  Virginia.  By  this  time,  our  ships 
had  unladen  the  goods  and  victuals  of  the  planters  and 
begun  to  take  wood  and  fresh  water,  and  to  new  calk 


WALTER   RALEIGH  61 

and  trim  them  for  England ;  the  planters,  also,  prepared 
their  letters  and  tokens  to  send  back  to  England." 

The  colonists  united  in  asking  Governor  White  to 
return  to  England  to  hasten  the  supplies  so  much 
needed.  At  first  he  refused  but  finally  consented  as 
the  ships  were  ready  to  sail.  He  expected  to  return  as 
soon  as  possible. 

But  when  White  reached  England  he  found  every 
body  fearing  a  Spanish  invasion.  Grenville,  Raleigh, 
Drake,  Frobisher,  and  all  to  whom  he  could  look  for 
assistance  were  busy  planning  resistance.  Yet  Raleigh, 
after  a  time,  found  means  to  send  White  with  two  vessels 
of  supplies.  But  desiring  to  make  the  voyage  a  gainful 
one,  the  ships  ran  after  Spanish  cruisers,  and  instead 
of  gaining  a  prize,  were  forced  to  return  to  England 
in  a  disabled  condition.  The  delay  was  fatal,  for  the 
Invincible  Armada  must  be  defeated  before  further 
thought  could  be  given  to  the  colonists.  Raleigh  had 
spent  so  much  money  in  his  attempts  to  colonize 
America  and  in  the  wars,  that  his  fortune  was  almost 
gone.  He  tried,  however,  to  organize  a  company  of  mer 
chants  to  go  to  his  colony  in  Virginia  but  more  tha-n 
another  year  elapsed  before  White  could  return  to  search 
for  his  colony  and  his  daughter.  Upon  reaching  Roa- 
noke  he  found  the  settlers  gone. 

Of  the  search  for  this  lost  colony,  Governor  White  says : 


62  PIONEERS    ON    LAND    AND    SEA 

"As  we  entered  up  the  sandy  bank,  upon  a  tree,  in  the 
very  brow  thereof,  were  curiously  carved  these  fair  Roman 
letters,  CRO  :  which  letters  presently  we  knew  to  signify 
the  place  where  I  should  find  the  planters  seated,  accord 
ing  to  a  secret  token  agreed  upon  between  them  and  me 
at  my  last  departure  from  them.  Which  was,  that  in  any 
ways  they  should  not  fail  to  write  or  carve  upon  the  trees 
or  posts  of  the  doors  the  name  of  the  place  where  they 
should  be  seated ;  for  at  my  coming  away  they  were  pre 
pared  to  remove  from  Roanoke  fifty  miles  into  the  main. 
Therefore  at  my  departure  from  them  in  1587,  I  willed 
them,  that  if  they  should  happen  to  be  distressed  in  any 
of  those  places,  then  they  should  carve  over  the  letters  or 
name  a  cross  .  .  .  but  we  found  no  such  sign  of  distress. 
And  having  well  considered  of  this,  we  passed  toward  the 
place  where  they  were  left  in  sundry  houses;  but  we 
found  the  houses  taken  down,  and  the  place  very  strongly 
enclosed  with  a  high  palisado  of  great  trees,  with  curtains 
and  flankers,  very  fort-like.  And  one  of  the  chief  trees 
or  posts  at  the  right  side  of  the  entrance  had  the  bark 
taken  off ;  and  five  feet  from  the  ground,  in  fair  capital 
letters,  was  graven  CROATAN,  without  any  cross,  or 
sign  of  distress.  This  done  we  entered  the  palisado, 
where  we  found  many  bars  of  iron,  two  pigs  of  lead  .  .  . 
and  such  like  heavy  things,  thrown  here  and  there,  almost 
overgrown  with  grasses  and  weeds. 


WALTER    RALEIGH 


*'  From  thence  we  went  along  by  the  water-side,  toward 
the  point  of  the  creek,  to  see  if  we  could  find  any  of  theii 
boats  or  pinnace ;  but  we  could  perceive  no  sign  of  them. 


RETURN  OF  WHITE  TO  ROANOKE  ISLAND 

.  .  .  At  our  return  from  the  creek,  some  of  the  sailors, 
meeting  us,  told  us  they  had  found  where  divers  chests 
had  been  hidden,  and  long  since  digged  up  again,  and 


64  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

broken  up,  and  much  of  the  goods  in  them  spoiled  and 
scattered  about,  but  nothing  left,  of  such  things  as  the 
savages  knew  any  use  of,  undefaced.  Presently  Captain 
Cooke  and  I  went  to  the  place,  which  was  in  the  end  of 
an  old  trench,  made  two  years  past  by  Captain  Amadas, 
where  we  found  five  chests  that  had  been  carefully  hidden 
of  the  planters,  and  of  the  same  chests  three  were  my 
own ;  and  about  the  place  many  of  my  things  spoiled  and 
broken,  and  my  books  torn  from  the  covers,  the  frames  of 
some  of  my  pictures  and  maps  rotten,  and  spoiled  with 
rain,  and  my  armor  almost  eaten  through  with  rust.  This 
could  be  no  other  but  the  deed  of  the  savages,  our  ene 
mies,  .  .  .  who  had  watched  the  departure  of  our  men  to 
Croatan,  and,  as  soon  as  they  were  departed,  digged  up 
every  place  where  they  suspected  anything  to  be  buried. 
But  although  it  much  grieved  me  to  see  such  spoil  of  my 
goods,  yet  on  the  other  side  I  greatly  joyed  that  I  had 
found  a  certain  token  of  their  safe  being  at  Croatan, 
which  is  the  place  where  Manteo  was  born,  and  the  sav 
ages  of  the  island  our  friends." 1  Unfortunately,  weather, 
which  "grew  to  be  fouler  and  fouler,"  and  some  broken 
cables,  as  well  as  a  scarcity  of  victuals  and  water,  made  it 
necessary  for  the  vessel  to  "go  for  St.  John,  or  some 
other  island  to  the  southward,"  and  no  trace  of  the  lost 
colony  has  ever  been  discovered. 

1  Higginson's  "  Young  Folks'  Book  of  American  Explorers." 


WALTER    RALEIGH  65 

About  this  time  Raleigh  married  secretly  a  young  girl 
who  was  Elizabeth's  maid  of  honor.  When  Elizabeth 
heard  of  this  marriage,  she  was  very  angry  and  had 
Raleigh  sent  to  the  Tower  to  punish  him.  He  had  been  a 
prisoner  here  some  time  when  some  of  his  ships  which 
had  been  out  to  look  for  Spanish  prizes  brought  in  a 
Spanish  vessel  loaded  with  valuable  goods.  As  Raleigh 
was  chief  owner  of  the  fleet  which  had  captured  the  prize 
he  was  set  free  so  that  he  might  help  divide  the  booty. 
Elizabeth  was  much  pleased  with  her  share  and  upon 
Raleigh's  return  to  prison  sent  word  that  he  might  be 
liberated.  He  lived  quietly  in  one  of  his  castles  with  his 
beautiful  wife  for  a  while,  but  hearing  of  the  wonders  of 
Guiana  in  South  America,  he  resolved  to  visit  that  coun 
try  and  to  add  it  and  its  wealth  to  his  beloved  England. 

According  to  Spanish  accounts  this  Guiana  on  the 
north  coast  of  South  America  was  in  truth  the  land  of 
gold.  Stories  were  told  of  a  great  city  which  stood  on 
the  heights  in  the  interior  of  the  country,  "where  the 
very  troughs  at  the  corners  of  the  streets  at  which  the 
horses  were  watered  were  made  of  solid  blocks  of  gold 
and  silver ;  and  where  billets  of  gold  lay  about  in  heaps 
as  if  they  were  logs  of  wood  marked  out  to  be  burned." 
It  was  also  said  that  Montezuma  had  sent  his  great  treas 
ures  to  this  city  when  he  was  captured  by  Cortes,  and  that 
the  boundless  wealth  of  the  Inca  of  Peru  had  been  sent 


66  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

to  the  same  place  when  he  was  conquered  by  Pizarro. 
Raleigh  disliked  the  Spaniards  very  much  and  to  prevent 
their  getting  this  land  of  gold  he  determined  to  go  him 
self  to  take  possession  of  it  in  the  name  of  his  queen, 
Elizabeth.  He  had  given  up  his  attempts  to  colonize 
Virginia  after  so  many  failures  but  this  seemed  a  new 
and  more  promising  field  for  colonization.  In  1594  five 
stout  ships  provided  with  crews  and  arms  and  provisions, 
and  with  Sir  Walter  Raleigh  himself  as  commander,  left 
the  harbor  of  Plymouth.  The  fleet  reached  Guiana  in 
safety.  Raleigh  ascended  the  Orinoco  some  distance  and 
brought  away  some  stones  containing  gold.  He  returned 
to  England  to  get  more  men,  as  he  feared  the  Spaniards 
would  try  to  keep  from  him  the  great  wealth  he  expected 
to  bring  to  England.  When  he  reached  England  he 
was  needed  in  an  attack  against  Spain  and  could  riot 
return  to  America. 

Soon  after  this  Elizabeth  died  and  King  James  of  Scot 
land  became  king  of  England.  Now  James  did  not  like 
Raleigh  and  took  from  him  his  offices  and  estates.  This 
made  Raleigh  angry  and  he  said  many  bitter  things  of  the 
king.  Some  of  his  enemies  claimed  that  he  was  guilty  of 
treason  and  he  was  tried  and  convicted,  though  there  was 
really  no  proof  that  he  was  guilty.  He  was  imprisoned 
in  the  Tower  where  he  remained  thirteen  years.  While  in 
prison  he  wrote  a  history  of  the  world.  At  last  he  was 


WALTER   KALEIGH  67 

released  from  prison  that  he  might  go  again  to  Guiana  to 
find  the  gold  mines  of  which  he  had  heard. 

This  expedition  was  not  successful  and  upon  his  return 
Raleigh  was  again  thrown  into  prison.  The  old  charge  of 
treason  was  revived  and  Raleigh  was  taken  from  prison 
and  beheaded.  His  efforts  to  found  colonies"  in  America 
had  not  been  successful,  but  he  had  kept  up  the  interest 
of  Englishmen  in  America  and  soon  afterward  colonies 
were  successfully  planted. 


CHAPTER   IV 

JOHN  SMITH  i 

THE  adventures  of  John  Smith  began  when  he  was  very 
young.  Before  reaching  his  twentieth  year  he  had  fought 
for  a  while  in  the  French  army  and  had  served  three  years 
in  the  Netherlands.  In  the  year  1600  he  returned  to  his 
home  in  England,  u  where,"  he  says  in  the  history  of  his 
life,  "  within  a  short  time,  being  glutted  with  too  much 
company  wherein  he  took  small  delight,  he  retired  himself 
into  a  little  woody  pasture  a  good  way  from  any  town, 
environed  with  many  hundred  acres  of  woods.  Here  by 
a  fair  brook  he  built  a  pavilion  of  boughs  where  only  in 
his  clothes  he  lay."  Here  he  read  books  upon  the  art  of 
war  and  studied  the  wise  sayings  of  Marcus  Aurelius.  He 
also  took  exercise  with  "  a  good  horse,  with  lance  and 
ring ;  his  food  was  thought  to  be  more  of  venison  thac 
anything  else."  But  he  soon  grew  tired  of  this  quiet  life. 
"  He  was  desirous  to  see  more  of  the  world  and  try  his 
fortune  against  the  Turks  ;  both  lamenting  and  repenting 
to  have  seen  so  many  Christians  slaughtering  one  another." 

1  Authority :  Fiske's  "  Old  Virginia  and  Her  Neighbors "  and  other 
sources. 

66 


JOHN   SMITH  69 

After  an  adventure  in  France  with  robbers,  in  which  he 
lost  everything  he  had  with  him,  he  reached  Marseilles. 
Here  he  embarked  for  Turkey  with  a  band  of  pilgrims. 
A  storm  arose  "  which  they  said  was  all  because  of  their 
having  this  heretic  on  board,  and  so,  like  Jonah,  the 
young  adventurer  was  thrown  into  the  sea.  He  was  a 
good  swimmer,  however,  and  '  God  brought  him,'  he  says, 
Ho  a  little  island  with  no  inhabitants  but  a  few  kine  and 
goats.' '  Next  morning  he  was  picked  up  by  a  Breton 
vessel  whose  captain  knew  some  of  Smith's  friends  in 
France  and  treated  him  with  much  kindness.  The  vessel 
was  bound  for  Egypt  and  Cyprus.  On  the  return  voyage 
they  were  fired  upon  by  a  Venetian  argosy  and  a  hot  fight 
took  place  until  the  Venetian  struck  her  colors.  After 
taking  from  her  a  rich  treasure  of  silks  and  velvet  and 
Turkish  coins  in  gold  and  silver,  the  Bretons  let  her  go  on 
her  way.  When  the  spoil  was  divided,  Smith  received 
£225  in  coin  and  a  box  of  goods  worth  nearly  as  much 
more.  His  friend,  the  captain,  landed  him  in  Piedmont, 
and  he  journeyed  to  Naples,  enjoying  himself  i:  sight  see 
ing."  He  visited  Rome,  Florence,  and  Bologna,  and 
finally  made  his  way  to  Venice.  From  here  he  went  to 
Styria  and  entered  the  service  of  the  Emperor  Rudolph  II. 
He  was  soon  given  command  of  a  company  of  250  cavalry, 
with  the  rank  of  captain.  "  On  one  occasion  he  made 
himself  useful  by  devising  a  system  of  signals,  and  on 


70  PIONEERS    ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

another  occasion  by  inventing  a  kind  of  rude  missiles 
which  he  called  *  fiery  dragons/  which  sorely  annoyed  the 
Turks  by  setting  fire  to  their  camp." 

During  the  years  1601  and  1602  Smith  saw  much 
rough  fighting.  The  troop  to  which  his  company  be 
longed  passed  into  the  service  of  Prince  Sigismund  of 
Transylvania.  "  The  Transylvanians  were  besieging  Re 
gal,  one  of  their  towns  which  the  Turks  had  occupied,  and 
the  siege  made  but  little  progress,  so  that  the  barbarians 
from  the  top  of  the  wall  hurled  down  sarcasms  upon  their 
assailants  and  complained  of  growing  fat  for  lack  of  exer 
cise.  One  day  a  Turkish  captain  sent  a  challenge,  declar 
ing  that  ( in  order  to  delight  the  ladies,  who  did  long  to 
see  some  court-like  pastime,  he  did  defy  any  captain  that 
had  the  command  of  a  company,  who  durst  combat  with 
him  for  his  head.'  The  challenge  was  accepted  by  the 
Christian  army,  it  was  decided  to  select  the  champion  by 
lot,  and  the  lot  fell  upon  Smith.  A  truce  was  proclaimed 
for  the  single  combat,  the  besieging  army  was  drawn  up 
in  battle  array,  the  town  walls  were  crowded  with  veiled 
dames  and  turbaned  warriors,  the  combatants  on  their 
horses  politely  exchanged  salutes,  and  then  rushed  at  each 
other  with  levelled  lances.  At  the  first  thrust  Smith 
killed  the  Turk,  and  dismounting,  unfastened  his  helmet, 
cut  off  his  head  and  carried  it  to  the  commanding  general 
who  accepted  it  graciously.  The  Turks  were  so  chagrined 


JOHN   SMITH  71 

that  one  of  their  captains  sent  a  personal  challenge  to 
Smith,  and  next  day  the  scene  was  repeated."  This  time 
both  lances  were  shivered  and  pistols  were  used.  The 
Turk  received  a  ball  which  threw  him  to  the  ground  and 
then  Smith  beheaded  him.  "  Some  time  afterward  our 
victorious  champion  sent  a  message  into  the  town  '  that 
the  ladies  might  know  he  was  not  so  much  enamoured 
of  their  servants'  heads,  but  if  any  Turk  of  their  rank 
would  come  to  the  place  of  combat  to  redeem  them,  he 
should  have  his  also  upon  the  like  conditions,  if  he  could 
win  it.'  The  defiance  was  accepted.  This  time  the  Turk, 
having  the  choice  of  weapons,  chose  battle-axes,  and 
pressed  Smith  so  hard  that  his  axe  flew  from  his  hand, 
whereat  loud  cheers  arose  from  the  ramparts ;  but  with  a 
quick  movement  of  his  horse  he  dodged  his  enemy's  next 
blow,  and  drawing  his  sword  gave  him  a  fearless  thrust  in 
the  side  which  settled  the  affair;  in  another  moment 
Smith  had  his  head.  At  a  later  time,  after  Prince 
Sigisrnund  had  heard  of  these  exploits,  he  granted  to 
Smith  a  coat-of-arms  with  three  Turk's  heads  in  a 
shield."  1 

At  a  battle  fought  in  1602  Smith  was  taken  prisoner 
by  the  Turks  and  sold  into  slavery.  After  enduring 
many  hardships  he  escaped  by  killing  his  master  and 
made  his  way  to  Russia.  From  there  he  went  to  Leipsic, 

1  See  Fiske's  "  Old  Virginia  and  Her  Neighbors,"  pp.  86-88. 


72  PIONEERS    ON    LAND    AND   SEA 

where  he  found  Prince  Sigismund.  After  travelling  for 
some  time  on  the  continent  he  returned  to  England. 

At  the  time  of  Smith's  return  to  London,  the  Lon 
don  Company  had  just  fitted  out  an  expedition  to  plant 
a  colony  in  Virginia.  There  were  three  ships,  with 
Captain  Christopher  Newport  in  command.  Smith  had 
talked  with  Newport,  Gosnold,  and  other  captains  who 
had  visited  America,  and  his  love  of  adventure  and 
strong  geographical  curiosity  urged  him  to  join  this 
company.  The  three  ships  sailed  on  New  Year's  Day 
with  105  colonists  on  board.  The  names  of  the  per 
sons  appointed  by  the  London  Company  to  the  colonial 
council  were  carried  in  a  sealed  box,  not  to  be  opened 
until  the  little  squadron  reached  the  end  of  its  journey. 
The  voyage  was  a  long  one,  as  they  first  went  down  to 
the  Canary  Islands  and  followed  Columbus' s  route  across 
to  the  West  Indies.  In  the  year  1602  Gosnold,  who 
was  second  in  command,  had  crossed  directly  from  the 
English  Channel  to  Cape  Cod  and  it  seems  strange  that 
this  shorter  route  was  not  tried  again.  The  stock  of 
provisions  was  sadly  diminished  before  the  journey  was 
ended. 

Some  trouble  arose  between  Smith  and  Wingfield,  one 
of  the  colonists.  Smith  was  accused  of  plotting  mutiny 
and  was  kept  in  irons  more  than  a  month  until  the 
ships  reached  Virginia.  After  leaving  the  West  Indies 


JOHN    SMITH  73 

they  lost  their  reckoning,  but  on  the  26th  of  April 
they  reached  the  cape  which  they  named  Henry,  after 
the  Prince  of  Wales,  as  the  cape  opposite  was  after 
ward  named  for  his  younger  brother,  Charles.  A  few 
of  the  company  went  on  shore,  "  where  they  were  at 
once  attacked  by  Indians,  and  two  were  badly  injured 
by  arrows.  That  evening  the  sealed  box  was  'opened, 
and  it  was  found  that  Bartholomew  Gosnold,  Edward 
Wingfield,  John  Smith,  John  Ratcliffe,  John  Martin, 
and  George  Kendall  were  appointed  members  of  the 
council,  —  six  in  all,  of  whom  the  president  was  to 
have  two  votes."  * 

As  the  ships  sailed  into  the  quiet  waters  of  Hamp 
ton  Roads,  leaving  the  stormy  weather  they  had  en 
countered,  they  named  the  promontory  at  the  entrance, 
Point  Comfort.  Then  they  entered  the  broad  river 
which  they  named  James,  in  honor  of  their  king. 
They  sailed  along  the  banks  until  they  found  a  spot 
which  seemed  suited  for  a  settlement  and  there  they 
landed  on  the  13th  of  May.  As  soon  as  the  company 
had  landed,  all  the  members  of  the  council,  except 
Smith,  were  sworn  into  office  and  then  they  chose 
Wingfield  president  for  one  year.  On  the  next  day 
the  men  went  to  work  building  their  fort.  They  called 
it  Fort  James,  but  soon  the  settlement  came  to  be 

1  Fiske's  "  Old  Virginia  and  Her  Neighbors." 


74 


PIONEERS    ON    LAND    AND    SEA 


known  as  Jamestown.  There  was  some  dispute  about 
the  site  and  the  one  selected  was  just  what  they  had 
been  told  to  avoid.  In  their  letter  of  instructions  they 
were  warned  not  to  select  a  place  that  was  low  and 
damp,  as  it  was  likely  to  prove  unhealthful.  At  high 
tide  the  waters  half  covered  the  little  peninsula  upon 

which  the  fort  was  built,  but  the 
narrow  neck  was  easy  to  guard 
and    that,   perhaps,    decided    the 
choice  of  the  place. 

Smith  was  no  longer  a  prisoner 
but  his  enemies  would  not  admit 
him  to  the  council.  Newport  was 
to  explore  the  river  and  Smith, 
with  four  other  gentlemen,  four 
skilled  mariners,  and  fourteen 
common  sailors,  went  with  him. 
They  sailed  up  about  as  far  as 
the  present  site  of  Richmond,  fre 
quently  meeting  parties  of  Indians 
on  the  banks  and  passing  Indian 
villages.  Newport  was  always  kind  and  wise  in  his  deal 
ings  with  the  Indians,  and  they  seemed  quite  friendly. 
These  Indians  were  Algonquins,  of  the  tribe  called  Pow- 
hatans.  After  a  few  days  the  exploring  party  reached  a 
village  called  Powhatan,  consisting  of  about  a  dozen  houses 


MAP  OF  VIRGINIA 


JOHN   SMITH  75 

"pleasantly  seated  on  a  hill."  These  were  large  clan 
houses  with  framework  of  beams  and  covering  of  bark, 
much  like  the  long  houses  of  the  Iroquois.  The  Pow- 
hatans  seemed  to  be  the  leading  tribe  of  the  neighbor 
hood.  Their  principal  village  was  oil  the  York  River 
about  fifteen  miles  from  Jamestown  and  the  chief  who 
lived  there  was  called  the  Powhatan. 

When  Newport  and  Smith  returned  to  Jamestown,  they 
found  that  it  had  been  attacked  by  a  force  of  two  hundred 
Indians.  They  had  been  driven  off  but  one  English 
man  had  been  killed  and  eleven  wounded.  In  the  course 
of  the  next  two  weeks  these  enemies  were  very  annoying. 
They  would  hide  in  the  grass  about  the  fort  and  try  to  pick 
off  men  with  their  barbed,  stone-tipped  arrows.  Some  of 
their  new  acquaintances  from  the  Powhatan  tribe  came  to 
visit  them  and  told  Newport  that  the  Indians  who-  had 
attacked  Jamestown  belonged  to  a  hostile  tribe  against 
which  they  would  willingly  form  an  alliance.  They  ad 
vised  the  English  to  cut  the  grass  around  the  fort,  which 
seems  to  prove  that  they  were  sincere  in  what  they  said. 

Smith  now  demanded  a  trial.  Though  Wingfield  ob 
jected,  a  jury  was  granted  and  he  was  acquitted  of  all  the 
charges  against  him.  Then  he  was  allowed  to  take  his 
place  in  the  council.  Newport  soon  after  sailed  for  England 
with  a  cargo  of  sassafras,  and  fine  wood  for  wainscoting. 
He  promised  to  be  back  in  Virginia  within  twenty  weeks. 


76  PIONEERS  ON   LAND   AND  SEA 

but  all  the  food  he  could  leave  in  the  fort  was  reckoned  to 
be  scarcely  enough  for  fifteen  weeks,  so  that  the  company 
were  put  upon  short  rations.  One  hundred  and  five  people 
were  left  in  Jamestown.  A  record  given  at  the  tinnj  sa^s 
that  besides  the  six  councillors,  the  clergyman,  and  the  sur 
geon,  there  were  twenty-nine  gentlemen,  six  carpenters, 
one  mason,  two  bricklayers,  one  blacksmith,  one  sailor, 
one  drummer,  one  tailor,  one  barber,  twelve  laborers,  and 
four  boys  "  with  38  whom  he  neither  names  nor 
classifies  but  simply  mentions  as  '  divers  others.' '  The 
food  left  for  this  company  was  not  appetizing.  After  the 
ship  was  gone,  says  one  of  the  number,  "  there  remained 
neither  tavern,  beer-house,  nor  place  of  relief  but  the  com 
mon  kettle ;  .  .  .  and  that  was  half  a  pint  of  wheat  and 
as  much  barley,  boiled  with  water,  for  a  man  a  day;  and 
this,  having  fried  some  26  weeks  in  the  ships  hold, 
contained  as  many  worms  as  grains.  .  .  .  Our  (only) 
drink  was  water.  .  .  .  Had  we  been  as  free  from  all  sins 
as  gluttony  and  drunkenness,  we  might  have  been  canon 
ized  for  saints."  It  seems  they  found  but  little  game, 
though  some  caught  crabs  and  sturgeon  in  the  river.  The 
poor  diet,  the  great  heat  of  an  American  summer,  and  the 
unaccustomed  work,  soon  added  sickness  to  their  suffer 
ings.  Before  the  end  of  September  more  than  fifty  of  the 
company  were  dead.  One  of  the  survivors  of  this  dread 
ful  time  writes :  "  There  were  neuer  Englishmen  left  in  a 


JOHN    SMITH  77 

forreigne  Countrey  in  such,  miserie  as  wee  were  in  this 
new  discouered  Virginia.  Wee  watched  euery  three 
nights,  lying  on  the  bare  .  .  .  ground,  what  weather  so- 
euer  came ;  (and)  warded  all  the  next  day ;  which  brought 
our  men  to  bee  most  feeble  wretches.  Our  food  was  but  a 
small  Can  of  Barlie  sodden  in  water  to  fiue  men  a  day. 
Our  drink  cold  water  taken  out  of  the  River ;  which  was 
at  a  floud  verie  salt :  at  a  low  tide  full  of  slime  and  filth; 
which  was  the  destruction  of  many  of  ovr  men.  Thus  we 
lived  for  the  space  of  fiue  months  in  this  miserable  dis- 
tresse,  not  hauing  fiue  able  men  to  man  our  Bulwarkes 
upon  any  occasion.  If  it  had  not  pleased  God  to  haue  put 
a  terrour  in  the  Sauages  hearts,  we  had  all  perished  by 
those  wild  and  cruell  Pagans,  being  in  that  weake  estate 
as  we  were ;  our  men  night  and  day  groaning  in  every 
corner  of  the  Fort  most  pittiful  to  heai^e.  If  there  were 
any  conscience  in  men,  it  would  make  their  harts  to  bleed 
to  heare  the  pitifull  murmurings  and  outcries  of  our  sick 
men  without  reliefe,  euery  night  and  day  for  the  space  of 
sixe  weekes :  some  departing  out  of  the  World,  many  times 
three  or  foure  in  a  night;  in  the  morning  their  bodies  be 
ing  trailed  out  of  their  Cabines  like  Dogges,  to  be  buried. 
In  this  sort  did  I  see  the  mortalitie  of  diuers  of  our 
people."  x 

Captain  Gosnold  died  of   the  fever.     After  his  death 

1  Fiske's  "Old  Virginia  and  Her  Neighbors.' 


78  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

the  quarrel  between  Smith  and  Wingfield  was  renewed. 
"  To  control  the  rations  of  so  many  hungry  men  was  no 
easy  matter.  It  was  charged  against  Wingfield  that  he 
kept  back  sundry  dainties,  and  especially  some  wine  and 
spirits  for  himself  and  a  few  favored  friends;  but  his 
quite  plausible  defence  is  that  he  reserved  two  gallons  of 
sack  for  the  communion  table  and  a  few  bottles  of  brandy 
for  extreme  emergencies,  but  the  other  members  of  the 
council,  whose  flasks  were  all  empt}^  did  long  for  to  sup  up 
that  little  remnant."  It  was  also  said  that  he  intended 
to  take  one  of  the  small  vessels  remaining  in  the  river  and 
abandon  the  colony.  He  was  later  required  to  pay  Smith 
heavy  damages  for  defaming  his  character.  He  was 
finally  deposed  and  John  Ratclift'e  was  elected  in  his 
place. 

During  these  troubled  times  Smith's  activity  in  trading 
with  the  Indians  for  corn  helped  the  colony  greatly.  In 
the  autumn  so  many  wild-fowl  were  shot  that  the  diet 
was  greatly  improved.  In  December  Smith  started  on 
a  trip  for  exploration  up  the  Chickahominy  River.  He 
went  as  far  as  his  shallop  would  go,  then  leaving  it  with 
seven  men  to  guard  it  he  went  on  in  a  canoe  with  only 
two  white  men  and  two  Indian  guides.  After  going  some 
distance  this  little  party  was  attacked  by  two  hundred 
Indians,  led  by  a  brother  of  Powhatan.  Smith's  two  com 
rades  were  killed  and  he  was  captured,  but  not  until  he 


JOHN    SMITH  79 

had  slain  two  Indians  with  his  pistol.  "  It  was  quite  like 
the  quick-witted  man  to  take  out  his  ivory  pocket  com 
pass,  and  to  entertain  the  childish  minds  of  the  barbarians 
with  its  quivering  needle  which  they  could  plainly  see 
through  the  glass,  but,  strange  to  say,  could  not  feel  when 
they  tried  to  touch  it.  Very  like  him  it  was  to  improve 
the  occasion  with  a  brief  discourse  on  star  craft,  eked  out 
no  doubt  with  abundant  gesticulation,  which  may  have 
led  his  hearers  to  regard  him  as  a  wizard."  They  did  not 
seem  to  agree  as  to  what  they  should  do  with  him.  He 
was  tied  to  a  tree  and  a  cruel  death  seemed  to  await  him, 
when  the  chief  held  up  the  compass.  Then  the  captive 
was  untied  and  the  Indians  marched  away  through  the 
forest,  taking  him  with  them. 

After  some  time  spent  in  wandering  from  place  to 
place,  he  was  brought  before  the  Powhatan,  who  received 
him  in  his  long  wigwam.  "  The  elderly  chieftain  sat 
before  the  fireplace,  on  a  kind  of  bench,  and  was  covered 
with  a  robe  of  raccoon  skins,  all  with  the  tails  on  and 
hanging  like  ornamental  tassels.  Beside  him  sat  his 
young  squaws,  a  row  of  women  with  their  faces  and  bare 
shoulders  painted  bright  red  and  chains  of  white  shell 
beads  about  their  necks  stood  around  by  the  walls,  and  in 
front  of  them  stood  the  grim  warriors."  Smith,  in  his 
account  of  what  followed,  says  the  Indians  departed 
together  and  presently  two  big  stones  were  placed  before 


80 


PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 


the   chief  and  Smith  was  dragged  hither   and   his  head 
laid  upon  them ;  but  even  while  warriors  were  standing. 


Kiny  Powhatan  cemandr C.'Smitfi  to  b 
is  life  hi 
and  htnv  he  Subiecltd  fyefthtir  fen# 


This  picture  was  drawn  by  an  artist  from  Captain  Smith's  own  description. 

with   clubs   in  hand,  to  beat   his   brains  out,  the  chief's 
young   daughter,   Pocahontas,  rushed   up  and   embraced 


JOHN    SMITH  81 

him  and  laid  her  head  upon  his  to  shield  him,  whereupon 
her  father  spared  his  life.1  "Two  days  afterward  the 
Powhatan  '  having  disguised  him  self  e  in  the  most 
fearfullest  manner  he  could/  caused  Captain  Smith  to  be 
brought  forth  to  a  great  house  in  the  woods,  and  there 
upon  a  mat  by  the  fire  be  left  alone.  Not  long  after  from 
behind  a  mat  that  divided  the  house  was  made  6  the  most 
dolefullest  noyse  he  ever  heard.'  Then  the  old  chieftain, 
looking  more  like  the  devil  than  a  man,  came  to  Smith 
and  told  him  that  now  they  were  friends  and  he  might 
go  back  to  Jamestown ;  then  if  he  would  send  to  the 
Powhatan  a  couple  of  cannon  and  a  grindstone,  he  should 
have  in  exchange  a  piece  of  land  in  the  neighborhood,  and 
that  chief  would  evermore  esteem  him  as  his  own  son." 
The  next  time  Smith  visited  the  Powhatan  he  was  called 
by  this  chief  a  "  werowance,"  or  chief  of  the  tribe.  The 
Powhatan  also  ordered  "that  all  his  subjects  should  so 
esteem  us,  and  no  man  account  us  strangers  .  .  .  but 
Powhatans,  and  that  the  corn,  women,  and  country  should 
be  to  us  as  to  his  own  people." 

On  the  very  day  that  Smith  returned  to  Jamestown, 
Captain  Newport  arrived  with  120  colonists.  There  were 
only  38  men  who  had  survived  the  hardships  at  James 
town.  The  supply  of  food  brought  by  the  ships  was  not 
enough  for  so  many  people,  so  Smith  took  his  "  Father 

1  See  Fiske's  "  Old  Virginia  and  Her  Neighbors,"  pp.  102-111. 


82  PIONEERS    ON   LAND    AND   SEA 

Newport "  to  visit  the  Powhatan.  With  blue  glass  beads 
they  bought  a  large  quantity  of  corn.  In  the  spring 
Newport  sailed  for  England  again  and  Wingfield  went 
with  him.  In  the  summer  of  1608  Smith  made  two 
voyages  of  exploration  up  the  Chesapeake  Bay  and  into 
the  Potomac,  Patapsco,  and  Susquehanna  rivers.  He 
met  some  Iroquois  warriors  and  found  them  carrying  a 
few  French  hatchets  which  had  evidently  come  from 
Canada.  Daring  his  absence  there  was  trouble  at  James 
town  and  Ratcliffe  was  deposed.  On  Smith's  return,  in 
September,  he  was  at  once  chosen  president.  Only  28 
were  lost  this  year,  and  when  Newport  arrived  in  Sep 
tember  with  70  more  persons,  the  colony  numbered  200. 
There  were  two  women  in  this  company. 

The  London  Company  was  getting  impatient  with  the 
great  expense  and  small  return  from  the  colony,  and  had 
told  Newport  "  that  he  must  find  either  the  way  to  the 
South  Sea,  or  a  lump  of  gold,  or  one  of  White's  lost 
colonists,  or  else  he  need  not  come  back  and  show  his 
face  in  England."  When  Smith  heard  these  instructions 
he  "bluntly  declared  that  the  London  Company  were 
fools,  which  seems  to  have  shocked  the  decorous  mariner/' 
Newport  was  also  ordered  to  crown  their  "new  ally, 
the  mighty  Emperor  Powhatan.  Newport  and  Smith 
did  it,  and  much  mirth  it  must  have  afforded  them.  The 
chief  refused  to  come  to  Jamestown,  so  Mahomet  had  to 


JOHN    SMITH 


83 


go  to  the  mountain.  Up  in  the  long  wigwam  the  two 
Englishmen  divested  the  old  fellow  of  his  raccoon  skin 
garment  and  put  on  him  a  scarlet  robe  which  greatly 
pleased  him.  Then  they  tried  to  force  him  down  upon 


CROWNING  THE  CHIEF  OF  THE  POWHATANS 

his  knees  —  which  he  did  not  like  at  all  —  while  they  put 
the  crown  on  his  head.  When  the  operation  was  safely 
snded,  the  forest-monarch  grunted  acquiescence,  and 
handed  to  Newport  his  old  raccoon  skin  cloak  as  a  present 
For  his  royal  brother  in  England." 


84  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

Newport  was  not  able  to  find  a  nugget  of  gold  or  an 31 
traces  of  Eleanor  Dare  and  her  friends.  The  Indians 
told  him  that  there  were  mountains  westward  and  that 
it  would  be  useless  to  look  for  a  salt  sea  there.  New 
port  tried,  however,  and  came  back  tired  out  before  he 
reached  the  Blue  Ridge.  Of  these  adventures  one  of  the 
colonists  says :  "  Now  was  there  no  way  to  make  us 
miserable  but  to  neglect  that  time  to  make  our  provision 
whilst  it  was  to  be  had  ;  the  which  was  done  to  perfourme 
this  strange  discovery,  but  more  strange  coronation.  To 
lose  that  time,  spend  that  victuall  we  had,  tire  and 
strane  our  men,  having  no  means  to  carry  victuall,  mu 
nition,  the  hurt  or  si  eke,  but  their  own  backes :  how  or 
by  whom  they  were  invented  I  know  not  ...  as  for 
the  coronation  of  Powhatan  and  his  presents  of  bason, 
ewer,  bed,  clothes,  and  such  costly  nouelties ;  they  had 
bin  much  better  well  spared  than  so  ill  spent;  for  we  had 
his  favour  much  better  onlie  for  a  poore  peece  of  copper, 
till  this  stately  kinde  of  soliciting  made  him  so  much 
overvalue  himselfe,  that  he  respected  us  as  much  as 
nothing  at  all." 

Newport  returned  to  England  and  took  with  him 
Ratcliffe,  the  deposed  president,  thus  ridding  the  colony 
of  a  man  of  doubtful  character.  It  is  said  his  real 
name  was  Sickelmore  and  that  he  had  taken  the  other 
name  to  conceal  his  past.  With  Newport,  Smith  sent 


JOHN   SMITH  85 

his  new  map  of  Virginia,  showing  the  country  he  had 
discovered  and  explored.  This  was  "a  map  of  remark 
able  accuracy  and  witness  to  an  amount  of  original 
labor  that  is  marvellous  to  think  of.  ...  None  but  a 
man  of  heroic  mould  could  have  done  the  geographical 
work  involved  in  making  it. 

"With  the  map  Smith  sent  what  he  naively  calls 
his  '  Rude  Answer '  to  the  London  Company,  a  paper 
bristling  with  common  sense  and  not  timid  when  it 
comes  to  calling  a  spade  a  spade." 

It  was  thought  in  England  that  Virginia  would  bring 
much  wealth  to  the  mother  country.  In  a  play  per 
formed  on  the  stage  in  1605  one  of  the  characters  asks 
of  Virginia,  "  But  is  there  much  treasure  there,  Cap 
tain,  as  I  have  heard  ? "  and  the  answer  is :  "I  tell 
thee,  gold  is  more  plentiful  there  than  copper  is  with 
us;  and  for  as  much  red  copper  as  I  can  bring  I'll 
have  thrice  the  weight  in  gold.  Why,  man,  all  their 
dripping-pans  are  pure  gold,  and  all  the  chains  with 
which  they  chain  up  their  streets  are  massy  gold,  all 
the  prisoners  they  take  are  fettered  in  gold ;  and  for 
rubies  and  diamonds  they  go  forth  on  holidays  and 
gather  'em  by  the  seashore  to  hang  on  their  children's 
coats,  and  stick  in  their  children's  caps." 

It  was  in  search  of  gold  that  so  many  gentlemen 
came  to  this  new  country.  Then  to  care  for  it  there 


86  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

were  two  goldsmiths,  two  refiners,  and  one  jeweller 
brought  over  with  the  first  supply.  At  this  time  some 
one  discovered  a  bank  of  bright  yellow  dirt  which  was 
thought  to  contain  gold.  Then  "there  was  no  thought, 
no  discourse,  no  hope,  and  no  work  but  to  dig  gold, 
wash  gold,  refine  gold,  and  load  gold."  On  his  return 
"Newport  carried  a  shipload  of  the  yellow  stuff  to 
London,  and  found,  to  his  chagrin,  that  all  is  not  gold 
that  glitters.  On  that  same  voyage  he  carried  home  a 
coop  of  plump  turkeys,  the  first  that  ever  graced  an 
English  bill  of  fare." 

Smith  soon  gave  up  the  search  for  gold  and  turned 
his  thoughts  to  other  industries.  Valuable  timber  was 
cut  and  the  making  of  tar  and  soap  was  tried ;  also 
the  manufacture  of  glass.  These  efforts  were  not  very 
successful.  The  London  Company  was  not  satisfied  with 
a  few  shiploads  of  rough  boards  and  sassafras  where 
they  had  expected  gold  and  jewels.  Then  Wingfield 
and  other  enemies  of  Smith  had  criticised  his  manage 
ment  of  the  colony  before  the  London  Company.  When 
the  instructions  brought  by  Newport  with  the  second 
supply  were  read,  something  said  therein  made  Smith 
angry  and  provoked  the  "Rude  Answer"  with  which 
he  tries  to  defend  himself.  Of  the  quarrels  among  the 
colonists  he  says :  "  For  our  factions,  unless  you  would 
have  me  run  away  and  leave  the  country,  I  cannot  pre- 


JOHN    SMITH  87 

vent  them.  ...  I  do  make  many  stay  that  would  els  fly 
any  whither."  Of  the  tasks  asked  of  Captain  Newport 
he  says :  "  Expressly  to  follow  your  directions  by  Cap 
tain  Newport,  though  they  be  performed,  I  was  directly 
against  it ;  but  according  to  our  Commission,  I  was 
content  to  be  ruled  by  the  major  part  of  the  council > 
I  fear  to  the  hazard  of  us  all ;  which  is  now  generally- 
confessed  when  it  is  too  late.  .  .  .  For  him  (Newport) 
at  that  time  to  find  the  South  Sea,  a  mine  of  gold,  or 
any  of  them  sent  by  Sir  Walter  Raleigh,  I  told  them 
was  as  likely  as  the  rest.  But  during  this  great  voyage 
of  discovery  of  thirty  miles  (which  might  as  well  have 
been  done  by  one  man,  and  much  more,  for  the  value 
of  a  pound  of  copper  at  a  seasonable  time)  they  had  the 
pinnace  and  all  the  boats  with  them  (save)  one  that  re 
mained  with  me  to  serve  the  fort. 

"In  their  absence  I  followed  the  new  begun  works 
of  pitch  and  tar,  glass,  soap  ashes  and  clapboard; 
whereof  some  small  quantities  we  have  sent  you. 

"For  the  coronation  of  Powhatan,  by  whose  advice 
you  sent  him  such  presents  I  know  not;  but  this,  give 
me  leave  to  tell  you,  I  fear  will  be  the  confusion  of  us 
all  ere  we  hear  from  you  again.  At  your  ship's  arrival 
the  salvage's  harvest  was  newly  gathered  and  we  going 
to  buy  it ;  our  own  not  being  half  sufficient  for  so  great 
a  number.  As  for  the  two  (ship-loads)  of  corn  New- 


88  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

port  promised  to  provide  us  from  Powhatan,  he  brought 
us  but  14  bushels.  From  your  ship  we  had  not  provi 
sion  or  victuals  worth  £20,  and  we  are  more  than  200  to 
live  upon  this ;  the  one  half  sick,  the  other  little  better. 
Oar  diet  is  a  little  meal  and  water,  and  not  sufficient  of 
that.  Though  there  be  fish  in  the  sea,  fowls  in  the  air, 
and  beasts  in  the  woods,  their  bounds  are  so  large,  they 
so  wild,  and  we  so  weak  and  ignorant  that  we  cannot 
much  trouble  them. 

"  When  you  send  again,  I  entreat  you  send  but  30 
carpenters,  husbandmen,  gardeners,  fishermen,  black 
smiths,  masons,  and  diggers  up  of  trees'  roots,  well  pro 
vided  (rather)  than  1000  of  such  as  we  have ;  for 
except  we  be  able  both  to  lodge  them  and  feed  them, 
the  most  will  consume  with  want  of  necessaries  before 
they  can  be  made  good  for  anything." 

That  Smith  had  labored  with  some  of  the  gentlemen 
with  some  success  is  shown  by  the  testimony  of  Amos 
Todkill,  one  of  the  first  company  of  settlers.  He  tells 
how  Smith  conducted  a  party  of  thirty  of  them  five 
miles  from  the  fort  "to  learn  to  ...  cut  down  trees 
and  make  clapboard."  Two  lately  arrived  gallants  were 
among  the  number,  "both  proper  gentlemen.  Strange 
were  these  pleasures  to  their  conditions;  yet  lodging, 
eating  and  drinking,  working  or  playing,  they  (were) 
but  doing  as  the  President  did  himselfe.  All  these 


JOHN    SMITH  89 

things  were  carried  on  so  pleasantly  as  within  a  week 
they  became  masters ;  making  it  their  delight  to  heare 
the  trees  thunder  as  they  fell ;  but  the  axes  so  oft  blis 
tered  their  tender  fingers  that  many  times  every  third 
blow  had  a  loud  othe  to  drowne  the  eccho;  for  remedie 
of  which  sinne,  the  President  devised  how  to  have 
every  man's  othes  numbred,  and  at  night  for  every  othe 
to  have  a  cann  of  water  powred  downe  his  sleeue,  with 
which  every  offender  was  so  washed  (himself e  and  all) 
that  a  man  should  scarce  hear  an  othe  in  a  weeke. 

'  For  he  who  scorns  and  makes  but  jests  of  cursings  and  his  othe 
He  doth  contemne,  not  man  but  God,  nor  man,  but  both/ 

"  By  this  let  no  man  thinke  that  the  President  and  these 
gentlemen  spent  their  time  as  common  wood  hackers 
at  felling  of  trees,  or  such  other  like  labours;  or  that 
they  were  pressed  to  it  as  hirelings  or  common  slaves; 
for  what  they  did,  after  they  were  but  once  inured,  it 
seemed  and  some  conceited  it  only  as  a  pleasure  and 
recreation :  ...  30  or  40  of  such  voluntary  gentlemen 
would  doe  more  in  a  day  than  100  of  the  rest  that  must 
be  prest  to  it  by  compulsion."  Then  he  adds,  "twenty 
good  workmen  had  been  better  than  them  all." 

After  Newport  was  gone,  the  thing  that  Captain  Smith 
had  feared  came  to  pass.  The  Indians  refused  to  furnish 
them  with  corn.  During  the  past  winter  Pocahontas 


yU  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND  SEA 

had  often  visited  the  colony,  bringing  presents  of  corn 
and  game,  and  had  thus  helped  to  keep  off  famine.  But 
the  Indians  were  growing  jealous  of  the  increasing  num 
bers  of  the  settlers  and  wished  to  get  rid  of  them.  When 
Smith  first  visited  the  Powhatan,  he  had  been  asked  why 
the  English  had  come  to  this  part  of  the  world.  Smith 
did  not  think  it  safe  to  say  that  they  had  come  to  stay, 
so  he  invented  a  story  of  their  being  defeated  by  the 
Spaniards  and  driven  ashore.  As  their  boat  was  leaky, 
Father  Newport  had  left  them  while  he  went  away  to 
get  it  mended.  Now  Father  Newport  had  come  twice 
and  had  brought  many  more  children  than  he  had  taken 
away.  There  were  now  two  hundred  men  at  Jamestown. 
"  Every  painted  and  feathered  warrior  knew  that  these 
pale  children  were  not  good  farmers,  and  that  their  lives 
depended  upon  a  supply  of  corn.  By  withholding  this 
necessary  of  life,  how  easy  it  might  be  to  rid  the  land 
of  their  presence."  1 

As  winter  came  on  and  the  Indians  refused  to  sell 
their  corn,  the  condition  of  the  colonists  became  serious. 
Smith  decided  that  if  the  Indians  would  not  trade  of  their 
own  free  will,  they  must  be  made  to  trade.  The  Pow- 
hatan  had  asked  for  help  on  a  house  he  was  building 
and  Smith  sent  him  fourteen  men.  He  soon  followed 
with  twenty-seven  men  in  the  pinnace  and  barge.  When 

1  Fiske's  "  Old  Virginia  and  Her  Neighbors." 


JOHN   SMITH  91 

they  stopped  the  first  night,  a  chieftain  told  them  to  be 
ware  of  the  treachery  of  the  Powhatan,  who  intended 
to  kill  them.  "  Captain  Smith  thanked  the  red-skin 
for  his  good  counsel,  assured  him  of  his  undying  affec 
tion,  and  went  on  down  the  river  to  Hampton."  Here 
he  was  kindly  welcomed  by  a  small  tribe  of  Indians 
numbering  about  twenty  warriors.  A  storm  of  snow 
and  sleet  lasting  about  a  week,  from  December  30,  1608, 
to  January  6,  1609,  made  the  party  stay  in  the  well- 
warmed  wigwams  of  their  friends.  They  were  well  fed 
with  oysters,  fish,  venison,  and  wild-fowl.  When  they 
continued  their  journey  and  came  near  the  York  River, 
the  Indians  seemed  less  friendly.  When  they  reached 
the  village  of  the  Powhatan,  "the  river  was  frozen  for 
nearly  half  a  mile  from  shore,  but  Smith  rammed  and 
broke  the  ice  with  his  barge  until  he  had  pushed  up  to 
a  place  where  it  was  thick  enough  to  walk  safely." 
The  barge  was  sent  back  to  the  pinnace  to  bring  the 
rest  of  the  party.  When  all  were  landed,  they  took 
possession  of  the  first  house  they  came  to  and  sent  to 
the  Powhatan  for  food.  He  sent  them  venison,  turkeys, 
and  corn  bread. 

The  next  day  the  chief  visited  them  and  asked  them 
how  long  they  meant  to  stay.  He  said  he  had  not  asked 
the  English  to  come  to  see  him  and  he  had  no  corn  for 
them.  He  knew,  however,  where  he  could  get  forty 


92  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND    SKA 

baskets  of  it,  if  they  would  give  a  sword  for  each 
basket.  Smith  pointed  to  the  new  house  already  begun 
and  to  the  men  he  had  sent  to  build  it.  "  Powhatan," 
he  said,  "  I  am  surprised  to  hear  you  say  that  you  have 
not  invited  us  hither;  you  must  have  a  short  memory." 
This  answer  made  the  old  chieftain  laugh,  but  he  in 
sisted  that  he  would  sell  his  corn  for  swords  and  guns, 
but  not  for  copper.  He  could  eat  corn  but  not  copper. 
Then  Captain  Smith  said  :  "  Powhatan,  to  testify  my  love 
I  sent  you  my  men  for  your  building,  neglecting  mine 
own.  Now  you  think  by  consuming  the  time  we  shall 
consume  for  want,  not  having  wherewith  to  fulfil  your 
strange  demands.  As  for  swords  and  guns,  I  told  you 
long  ago  I  had  none  to  spare.  You  must  know  that 
the  weapons  I  have  can  keep  me  from  want,  yet  steal 
or  wrong  you  I  will  not,  nor  dissolve  that  friendship  we 
have  mutually  promised,  except  you  constrain  me  by  bad 
usage." 

The  Powhatan,  understanding  the  threat,  quickly  said 
that  he  would  soon  let  the  English  have  all  the  corn  he 
could  spare.  Then  he  said,  "  I  have  some  doubt,  Cap 
tain  Smith,  about  your  coining  hither,  which  makes  me 
not  so  kindly  seek  to  relieve  you  as  I  would.  For  many 
do  inform  me  that  your  coming  hither  is  not  for  trade 
but  to  invade  my  people  and  possess  my  country.  They 
dare  not  come  to  bring  you  corn,  seeing  you  thus  armed 


JOHN   SMITH  93 

with  your  men.  To  free  us  of  this  fear,  leave  your 
weapons  aboard  the  ship,  for  here  they  are  needless,  we 
being  all  friends,  and  forever  Powhatans." 

"  With  many  such  discourses,"  says  the  chronicle,  "  did 
they  spend  the  day ;  and  on  the  morrow  the  parley  was 
renewed."  Again  and  again  the  old  chief  insisted  that  be 
fore  the  corn  could  be  brought,  the  visitors  must  leave 
their  arms  on  shipboard ;  but  Smith  was  not  so  blind  as 
to  walk  into  such  a  trap.  He  said,  "  Powhatan,  the  vow 
I  made  you  of  my  love,  both  myself  and  my  men  have 
kept.  As  for  your  promise,  I  find  it  every  day  violated 
by  some  of  your  subjects ;  yet  for  your  sake  only  we  have 
curbed  our  thirsting  desire  for  revenge ;  else  had  they 
known  as  well  the  cruelty  we  use  to  our  enemies  as  our 
true  love  and  courtesy  to  our  friends.  And  I  think  your 
judgment  sufficient  to  conceive  —  as  well  by  the  adven 
tures  we  have  undertaken  as  by  the  advantage  we  have 
in  our  arms  over  yours  —  that  had  we  intended  you  any 
hurt,  we  could  long  ere  this  have  effected  it.  Your  peo 
ple  coming  to  Jamestown  are  entertained  with  their  bows 
and  arrows,  without  any  exceptions;  we  esteeming  it 
with  you  as  it  is  with  us,  to  wear  our  arms  as  our  apparel. 
As  for  your  hiding  your  provisions  ...  we  shall  not  so 
unadvisedly  starve  as  you  conclude ;  your  friendly  care  in 
that  behalf  is  needless,  for  we  have  ways  of  finding  food 
that  are  quite  beyond  your  knowledge." 


94  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

The  hint  that  the  white  men  could  get  along  without 
his  corn  had  its  effect  upon  the  Powhatan.  Baskets  filled 
with  corn  were  brought,  but  before  they  were  given  to 
Smith  the  chief  said :  "  Captain  Smith,  I  never  used  any 
chief  so  kindly  as  yourself,  yet  from  you  I  receive  the 
least  kindness  of  any.  Captain  Newport  gave  me  swords, 
copper,  clothes,  a  bed,  towels,  or  whatever  I  desired ;  ever 
taking  what  I  offered  him,  and  would  send  away  his  guns 
when  I  entreated  him.  None  doth  refuse  to  do  what  I 
desire  but  only  you;  of  whom  I  can  have  nothing  but 
what  you  regard  not,  and  yet  you  will  have  whatsoever 
you  demand.  You  call  me  father,  but  I  see  you  will  do 
what  you  list.  But  if  you  intend  so  friendly  as  you  say, 
send  hence  your  arms  that  I  may  believe  you." 

Smith  felt  sure  that  this  whimpering  speech  was  merely 
the  cover  for  a  meditated  attack.  Of  his  thirty-eight 
Englishmen  but  eighteen  were  with  him  at  the  moment. 
He  sent  a  messenger  to  his  vessels,  ordering  all  save  a 
guard  of  three  or  four  men  to  come  ashore,  and  he  set 
some  Indians  to  work  breaking  the  ice,  so  that  the  barge 
could  be  forced  up  near  to  the  bank.  For  a  little  while 
Captain  Smith  and  John  Russell  were  left  alone  in  a 
house  with  the  Powhatan  and  a  few  squaws,  when  all  at 
once  the  old  chief  slipped  out  and  disappeared  from  view. 
While  -Smith  was  talking  with  the  women  a  crowd  of 
armed  warriors  surrounded  the  house,  but  instantly  Smith 


JOHN   SMITH  95 

and  Russell  sprang  forth  and  with  drawn  swords  charged 
upon  them  so  furiously  that  they  all  turned  and  fled, 
tumbling  over  one  another  in  their  headlong  terror. 

Now  the  English  felt  sure  of  a  plot  against  them,  but 
the  Indians  "  to  the  uttermost  of  their  skill  sought  ex 
cuses  to  dissemble  the  matter ;  and  Powhatan,  to  excuse 
his  flight  and  the  sudden  coming  of  this  multitude,  sent 
our  Captain  a  great  bracelet  and  a  chain  of  pearl,  by  an 
ancient  orator  that  bespoke  us  to  this  purpose ;  perceiving 
even  then  from  our  pinnace,  a  barge  and  men  departing 
and  coming  unto  us :  Captain  Smith,  our  chief  is  fled ; 
fearing  your  guns,  and  knowing  when  the  ice  was  broken 
there  would  come  more  men,  sent  these  numbers  but  to 
guard  his  corn  from  stealing,  which  might  happen  with 
out  your  knowledge.  Now,  though  some  be  hurt  by  your 
misprision,  yet  the  Powhatan  is  your  friend,  and  so  will 
ever  continue.  Now  since  the  ice  is  open  he  would  have 
you  send  away  your  corn,  and  if  you  would  have  his  com 
pany  send  away  also  your  guns."  Captain  Smith  did  not 
send  away  his  guns,  and  "never  set  eyes  on  his  Father 
Powhatan  again.  With  faces  frowning,  guns  were  loaded 
and  cocked,  the  Englishmen  stood  by  while  a  file  of 
Indians  with  baskets  on  their  backs  carried  down  the 
corn  and  loaded  it  into  the  barge."  l 

The  Englishmen  would  have  departed  at  once,  but  the 

1  Fiske's  "  Old  Virginia  and  Her  Neighbors." 


96 


PIONEERS    ON    LAND   AND    SEA 


tide  had  left  their  boat  stranded  and  they  must  wait  foi 
high  water.  They  decided  to  pass  the  night  in  the  house 
where  they  were  already  quartered  as  it  was  some  dis 
tance  from  the  village,  and  they  sent  word  to  the  Powha- 
tan  to  send  them  some  supper.  Here  Pocahontas,  that 

"dearest  jewel,  in  that  dark 
night  came  through  the  irk 
some  woods,  and  told  our 
Captain  great  cheer  should 
be  sent  us  by  and  by,  but 
Powhatan  and  all  the  power 
he  could  make  would  after 
come  kill  us  all,  if  indeed 
they  that  brought  it  did 
not  kill  us  when  we  were 
at  supper.  Therefore,  if 
we  would  live  she  wished 
us  presently  to  be  gone. 
Such  things  as  she  delighted  in  we  would  have  given 
her ;  but  with  the  tears  running  down  her  cheeks  she 
said  she  durst  not  be  seen  to  have  any,  for  if  Powhatan 
should  know  it  she  were  but  dead ;  and  so  she  ran  away 
by  herself  as  she  came."  1 

Soon  eight  or  ten  Indians  came  with  venison  and  other 
dainties  "  and  begged  the  English  to  put  out  the  matches 

1  Fiske's  "  Old  Virginia  and  Her  Neighbors." 


POCAHONTAS 


JOHN    SMITH  97 

of  their  matchlocks,  for  the  smell  of  the  smoke  made 
them  sick."  Smith  sent  them  back  to  the  Powhatan 
with  the  message,  "  If  he  is  coming  to  visit  me  to-night 
let  him  make  haste,  for  I  am  ready  to  receive  him."  The 
Powhatan  did  not  come.  A  few  scouts  prowled  about,  but 
the  English  kept  guard  till  high  tide  and  then  sailed 
away. 

The  courage  and  tact  of  Smith  had  preserved  peace 
between  the  Powhatan  and  the  English,  and  his  fear 
lessness  and  quick  action  helped  them  in  another  ad 
venture  on  the  way  home.  When  they  arrived  at  his 
village,  the  brother  of  the  Powhatan,  chief  of  the 
Pamunkeys,  received  them  pleasantly,  but  soon  they 
were  surrounded  by  a  great  crowd  of  armed  warriors. 
It  did  not  seem  best  to  fire  upon  the  crowd,  as  Smith 
was  anxious  to  avoid  bloodshed.  Smith,  with  three 
men,  rushed  into  the  chieftain's  house,  "  seized  him  by 
the  long  scalp-lock,  dragged  him  before  the  astonished 
multitude,  and  held  a  pistol  to  his  breast."  This  so 
frightened  the  Indians  that  they  hurriedly  brought  out 
their  corn,  and  the  vessels  made  their  way  back  to 
Jamestown  "  loaded  with  some  300  bushels  of  it,  besides 
a  couple  of  hundred-weight  of  venison  and  deer  suet. 
In  itself  it  was  but  a  trifle  of  a.  pound  of  meat  and  a 
bushel  and  a  half  of  grain  for  each  person  in  the  col 
ony  But  the  chief  result  was  the  profound  impression 


98  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

made  upon  the  Indians/'  It  seems  that  they  decided 
that  such  brave  men  were  better  as  friends  than  as 
enemies. 

Now  that  the  fear  of  the  Indians  was  past,  Captain 
Smith  had  time  to  look  after  affairs  at  Jamestown. 
Things  there  were  in  a  bad  state.  The  chief  difficulty 
lay  in  the  fact  that  the  colony  had  been  begun  on  a 
communistic  plan,  that  is,  everything  was  owned  in 
common.  Each  man  worked  not  for  himself  and  family 
but  for  the  whole  community.  Whatever  he  got  in 
hunting  or  fishing,  or  trading  with  the  Indians,. was  for 
all  and  not  for  himself.  The  idle  and  lazy  fared  as 
well  as  the  hardest  worker,  and  so  easy  was  it  to  live 
without  work  that  the  time  came  when  some  thirty  or 
forty  people  were  supporting  the  whole  colony  of  two 
hundred.  Then  Smith  "  applied  the  strong  hand."  He 
called  them  together  one  day  and  told  them  that  as 
their  lawfully  chosen  ruler  he  had  a  right  to  punish 
those  that  would  not  obey  his  laws,  and  they  must  all 
understand  that  hereafter  he  that  will  not  work  shall 
not  eat.  The  rule  was  enforced  and  for  a  while  the 
colony  prospered.  "  By  the  end  of  April  twenty  houses 
had  been  built,  a  well  of  pure  sweet  water  had  been 
dug  in  the  fort,  thirty  acres  or  more  of  ground  had 
been  broken  up  and  planted,  and  nets  and  weirs  ar 
ranged  for  fishing.  A  few  hogs  and  fowl  had  been  left 


JOHN   SMITH  99 

by  Newport,  and  now  could  be  heard  the  squeals  of 
sixty  pigs  and  the  peeping  of  five  hundred  spring 
chickens.  The  manufacture  of  tar  and  soap-ashes  went 
on,  and  a  new  fortress  was  begun  in  an  easily  defensi 
ble  position,  upon  a  commanding  hill." 

But  a  new  trouble  arose.  Rats,  brought  over  from 
time  to  time  by  the  ships,  had  increased  rapidly  and 
made  such  havoc  in  the  granaries  that  little  corn  was  left. 
It  was  not  a  long  time  before  harvest  and  work  were 
stopped  while  everybody  searched  for  food.  The  Ind 
ians  were  friendly  and  traded  what  they  could  spare, 
but  that  was  not  much.  By  midsummer  the  settlers 
were  scattered,  some  among  the  Indians,  some  were 
picking  berries  in  the  woods,  and  others  down  at  Point 
Comfort  fishing.  It  was  the  fishermen  "  that  were  the 
first  to  hail  the  bark  of  young  Samuel  Argall,  who  was 
coming  for  sturgeon  and  whatever  else  he  could  find, 
and  had  steered  a  straighter  course  from  London  than 
any  mariner  before  him."  Argall  brought  letters  from 
the  company  complaining  that  the  goods  sent  home  in 
the  ships  were  not  of  greater  value,  and  saying  that 
Smith  had  been  accused  of  dealing  harshly  with  the 
Indians.  He  also  brought  news  that  a  great  expedi 
tion,  commanded  by  Lord  Delaware,  was  about  to  sail 
for  Virginia. 

Part    of    the    new    expedition    reached    Virginia    in 


100  PIONEERS   ON    LAND    AND   SEA 

/ 

August,  and  unfortunately  the  mischief-maker,  Ratcliffe, 
was  with  them.  He  instantly  called  upon  Smith  to 
abdicate  and  some  of  the  newcomers  supported  him. 
But  the  old  settlers  were  loyal  to  Smith,  and  there 
was  much  confusion  until  the  latter  arrested  Ratcliffe 
as  a  disturber  of  the  peace.  The  newcomers  were,  as 
Smith  says,  "  unruly  gallants,  packed  thither  by  their 
friends  to  escape  ill  destinies."  They  were  sure  to 
make  trouble  but  for  a  while  Smith  held  them  in 
check.  He  decided  to  find  a  better  site  for  a  colony 
than  the  low  marshy  Jamestown.  In  September  he 
sailed  up  to  the  Indian  village  of  Powhatan  and  bought 
of  the  natives  a  tract  of  land  near  the  present  site  of 
Richmond.  This  was  a  range  of  hills  that  could  be 
easily  defended,  with  so  fair  a  landscape  that  Smith 
called  the  place  Nonesuch.  On  his  way  back  to  James 
town  a  bag  of  gunpowder  in  his  boat  exploded  and 
wounded  him  so  badly  that  he  was  obliged  to  go  to 
England  in  the  ship  that  sailed  in  October,  for  surgical 
aid. 

The  winter  after  Smith  left  the  colony  was  one  of 
great  suffering  to  the  settlers  and  is  known  as  "the 
starving  time."  Of  the  490  persons  in  the  colony  in 
October,  only  60  lived  through  the  winter.  One  of 
these  survivors  wrote  of  Smith :  "  What  shall  I  say  ? 
but  thus  we  lost  him  that  in  all  his  proceedings  made 


JOHN   SMITH  101 

justice  his  first  guide  and  experience  his  second;  ever 
hating  baseness,  sloth,  pride,  and  indignity  more  than 
any  dangers;  that  never  allowed  more  for  himself  than 
his  soldiers  with  him ;  that  upon  no  danger  would 
send  them  where  he  would  not  lead  himself;  that 
would  never  see  us  want  what  he  either  had,  or  could 
by  any  means  get  us ;  that  loved  actions  more  than 
words,  and  hated  falsehood  and  covetousness  worse  than 
death;  whose  adventures  were  our  lives,  and  whose 
loss  our  deaths." 

In  1614  Smith  again  visited  America,  being  sent  out 
by  the  Plymouth  Company  to  explore  the  coast  given 
to  it.  He  sailed  from  Penobscot  Bay  to  Cape  Cod 
and  made  an  excellent  map  of  the  coast.  He  called 
the  country  New  England,  the  name  by  which  it  has 
been  known  ever  since.  The  next  year  Smith  started 
on  another  expedition  but  was  captured  by  a  French 
squadron  and  taken  to  France.  He  was  again  in  Eng 
land  when  Pocahontas,  who  had  married  an  English 
man  named  John  Rolfe,  made  her  visit  at  court.  She 
was  received  as  a  princess,  for  the  English  in  London 
still  thought  of  her  father  as  a  mighty  sovereign. 
Smith  was  making  preparations  for  another  voyage  to 
New  England  when  he  heard  of  Pocahontas's  arrival 
and  called  on  her.  When  he  called  her  Lady  Rebekah. 
as  all  did  in  England,  "she  seemed  hurt  and  turned 


102  PIONEERS    ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

away,  covering  her  face  with  her  hands.  She  insisted 
upon  calling  him  Father  and  having  him  call  her  his 
child,  as  formerly  in  the  wilderness.  Then  she  added, 
6  They  did  always  tell  us  you  were  dead,  and  I  knew 
not  otherwise  till  I  came  to  Plymouth." 

The  remaining  sixteen  years  of  Smith's  life  were  spent 
in  England  writing  books,  publishing  maps,  and  encour 
aging  emigration  to  the  New  World.  He  was  only  thirty- 
seven  when  his  adventures  ended  with  his  capture  by  the 
French  while  on  his  way  to  start  a  colony  in  New  Eng 
land,  but  he  lived  until  1631,  —  long  enough  to  know  that 
a  successful  settlement  had  been  made  in  New  England 
and  that  Virginia  was  prospering. 


CHAPTER  V 

POPHAM'S  SETTLEMENT 

IN  1605  an  English  noble  became  so  much  interested 
in  the  reports  of  the  fine  country  about  Cape  Cod  which 
Gosnold  had  before  visited,  that  he  fitted  out  a  ship  with 
Captain  Weymouth  to  visit  and  examine  the  country 
still  further.  Captain  Weymouth  came  in  sight  of  Cape 
Cod  and  was  driven  by  the  winds  northward,  where  he 
entered  the  broad  mouth  of  a  noble  river,  the  Kennebec. 
He  and  his  companions  were  delighted  with  the  forest- 
covered  hills  and  wide  river  mouths,  where  hundreds  of 
great  ships  might  safely  anchor.  They  found  the  coast 
waters  swarming  with  excellent  fish,  of  which  they 
caught  cod  four  and  five  feet  long.  Noble  forests 
clothed  the  hillsides,  from  which  lumber  for  building  and 
for  ships  could  be  had.  Game  on  land  was  plentiful; 
the  springs  and  brooks  coining  from  the  valleys  were 
delightful. 

They  made  special  efforts  to  win  the  friendship  of  the 
Indians  and  to  excite  their  wonder  and  respect  for  white 
men.  Weymouth  had  been  authorized  to  capture  and 
bring  back  with  him  to  England  some  of  these  natives, 

103 


104  PIONEERS   ON   LAND    AND   SEA 

But  they  were  so  timid  and  suspicious  that  at  first  he 
could  not  entice  them  into  his  ship.  But  he  finally  suc 
ceeded  in  kidnapping  five  of  the  Indians  and,  getting 
them  on  board,  sailed  for  home. 

On  his  return  to  England  with  his  captive  Indians, 
Captain  Weymouth  gave  a  glowing  description  of  the 
Kennebec  as  a  place  for  planting  a  colony.  The  broad 
mouth  of  the  river  leading  up  into  a  well-wooded  country, 
where  beaver  skins  and  other  furs  could  be  purchased 
of  the  Indians  for  trifles,  seemed  to  offer  a  great  tempta 
tion  to  settlers.  The  abundance  and  variety  of  fishing 
along  the  coast,  the  good  harbors,  and  the  prospect  for 
raising  plenty  of  vegetables  and  maize  also  gave  much 
encouragement.  In  the  summer-time,  especially,  the  coun 
try  was  beautiful,  and  with  the  boundless  resources  of 
land  and  sea,  and  with  friendly  natives,  the  success  of  a 
settlement  seemed  certain. 

At  any  rate  Weymouth' s  reports  awakened  much 
interest  in  England,  and  the  next  year  the  Plymouth 
Company,  under  the  leadership  of  Sir  John  Popham,  who 
was  chief  justice  of  England,  sent  out  a  colony  of  120 
persons  to  settle  at  the  mouth  of  the  Kennebec.  On  the 
last  of  July  they  got  sight  of  the  coast  of  Maine,  and 
the  two  ships,  the  Mary  and  John  and  the  Gift  of  Gfod, 
sailed  along  the  coast  till  they  reached  the  mouth  of  the 
Kennebec.  The  Indians  became  friendly  when  they  saw 


POPHAM  S   SETTLEMENT 


105 


with  the  whites  one  of  the  Indians  whom  Weymouth  had 
carried  off. 

On  Sunday  the  colonists  landed  upon  an  island  at  the 
mouth  of  the  Kennebec  and  held  a  religious  service,  the 
first  upon  the  shores  of  New  England. 

After  exploring  the  coast  until  the  middle  of  August, 
they  returned  to  the  mouth  of  the  Kennebe^  and  landed 


A  NEW  ENGLAND  BLOCK  HOUSE 

at  a  place  near  the  island  of  Sequin.  Here  the  designs  of 
the  Company  were  explained  to  the  settlers  and  soon 
all  were  actively  at  work  carrying  out  these  plans. 
Among  the  first  buildings  constructed  were  a  fort  and  a 
storehouse.  Trees  were  cut  down,  a  clearing  was  made ; 
the  carpenters  began  to  trim  the  logs  and  frame  them 
into  buildings.  The  surrounding  forests  furnished  abun 
dant  building  materials  and  a  large  number  of  log  cabins 


106  PIONEERS   ON   LAND    AND   SKA 

were  built.  Before  the  winter  set  in  the  colonists  were  so 
industrious  that  they  had  completed  the  fort  and  mounted 
twelve  cannon  upon  its  walls,  built  a  storehouse  and 
church,  and  finished  about  fifty  cabins. 

During  the  same  time  the  ship-builders  had  put  to 
gether  a  pinnace,  or  small  sailing  vessel  supplied  with 
oars,  with  which  they  could  explore  the  coasts,  inlets, 
and  rivers.  In  the  meantime  Captain  Gilbert  was  explor 
ing  the  neighboring  coasts  and  getting  acquainted  with 
the  surrounding  country. 

The  Indians  scarcely  knew  what  to  make  of  these  white 
people.  They  were  suspicious  of  them,  yet  very  curious 
to  watch  and  discover  their  plans.  While  they  were  in 
clined  to  be  hostile,  they  had  great  respect  for  the  guns 
and  other  weapons  of  the  white  men.  The  natives  had 
only  bows,  arrows,  and  spears,  to  match  the  armor  and 
guns  of  the  whites.  The  latter  were  afraid  to  trust  the 
Indians,  and  therefore  had  to  carry  about  their  heavy 
guns,  and  were  burdened  also  with  steel  armor,  sword,  and 
head-dress.  It  was  difficult,  therefore,  to  move  about 
quickly.  Once  in  going  up  the  river  in  a  boat,  Gilbert 
had  a  narrow  escape  from  battling  with  the  Indians. 
They  suddenly  threw  his  firebrand  for  lighting  the  guns 
into  the  river,  threatened  the  whites  with  their  arrows, 
and  seized  the  ropes  to  draw  the  boat  ashore.  But 
the  whites  frightened  the  Indians  by  pointing  their 


POPHAM'S  SETTLEMENT  107 

guns  at  them  as  if  to  shoot  and  they  ran  off  to  the 
woods. 

As  the  winter  came  on,  it  proved  much  more  severe  than 
they  expected.  Instead  of  the  green  foliage  of  summer, 
the  bleak  hills  were  covered  with  snow  and  in  spite  of 
their  preparations  they  suffered  many  hardships.  Some 
of  the  men  fell  sick.  George  Popham,  the  president,  and 
others  also  of  the  colony  died.  The  winter  lasted  longer 
than  usual  and  before  the  warm  days  of  spring  returned 
many  had  grown  homesick.  This  new  land  had  not  come 
up  to  their  expectations. 

In  the  spring  a  ship  came  laden  with  full  supplies  of 
food,  arms,  and  tools,  and  all  things  needful  for  the  colony. 
But  it  also  brought  the  report  that  Lord  Popham,  the 
brother  of  George  Popham  and  the  chief  supporter  of 
the  enterprise,  was  dead.  Captain  Gilbert,  who  since  the 
death  of  George  Popham  had  been  leader  of  the  colonists, 
heard  that  his  own  brother,  whose  estates  he  inherited,  was 
dead  and  he  was  anxious  to  get  back  to  England.  There 
was  no  one  left  to  lead  a  colony  to  success,  and  it  was 
decided  to  abandon  the  attempt  to  found  one  and  to 
return  to  England. 

Upon  their  return  home  the  colonists  spread  the  report 
that  the  coasts  of  New  England  were  too  cold  and  severe 
for  permanent  settlement,  and  no  attempt  was  made  for 
several  years  to  repeat  the  experiment. 


CHAPTER  VI 


JOHN  SMITH'S  DESCRIPTION  OF  NEW  ENGLAND* 

IN   the   month  of   April,   1614,  with  two  ships  from 
London,  of  a  few  merchants,  I  chanced  to  arrive  in  New 

England,  a  part  of 
America,  at  the  isle 
of  Mohegan  in  43 J° 
of  northerly  latitude. 
Our  plan  was  there 
to  take  whales  and 
make  trial  of  a  mine 
of  gold  and  copper. 
If  those  failed,  fish 
and  furs  were  then  our 
refuge.  We  found 
the  whaling  a  costly 
affair.  We  saw  many 
and  spent  much  time 
chasing  them,  but 
could  not  kill  any, 
besides  they  were  not  the  kind  that  yield  fins  and  oil.  As 
for  the  gold  mine,  it  was  rather  a  device  to  get  a  voyage 

1  Condensed  and  slightly  modified  from  Captain  Smith's  own  account. 

108 


JOHN  SMITH'S  DESCRIPTION  OF  NEW  ENGLAND       109 

started  than  any  knowledge  of  such  a  mine.  By  our  late 
arrival  and  long  time  spent  after  whales,  we  lost  the  best 
time  for  fishing  and  furs.  Yet  in  July  some  fish  were 
taken  but  not  enough  to  pay  our  expenses. 

While  the  sailors  fished,  myself,  with  eight  or  nine 
others  of  them  that  might  best  be  spared,  ranged  the 
coast  in  a  small  boat.  We  got  for  trifles  near  eleven  hun 
dred  beaver  skins,  one  hundred  marten  skins,  and  near  as 
many  others,  and  the  most  of  them  within  the  distance  of 
twenty  leagues. 

We  ranged  the  coast  both  east  and  west  much  farther, 
but  eastward  our  goods  were  not  much  esteemed,  they 
were  so  near  the  French,  who  offered  them  better;  and 
right  over  against  us  on  the  mainland  was  a  ship  of  Sir 
Francis  Popham's  that  had  much  acquaintance  there, 
having  used  only  that  port  many  years,  and  further  west 
were  two  other  French  ships  that  had  made  there  a  great 
voyage  for  trade. 

With  these  furs,  oil,  and  fish,  I  returned  to  England  in 
the  Bark,  where  within  six  months  after  our  departure  we 
safe  arrived  back. 

New  England  is  that  part  of  America  in  the  Ocean  Sea 
opposite  to  New  Albion  (California),  discovered  by  the 
most  memorable  Sir  Francis  Drake  in  his  voyage  about 
the  world.  Now  because  I  have  been  so  oft  asked  such 
strange  questions  of  the  goodness  and  greatness  of  these 


110 


PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 


spacious  tracts  of  land,  how  they  can  be  thus  long  im 
known  or  not  possessed  by  the  Spaniards,  I  entreat  your 
pardons  if  I  chance  to  be  too  plain  or  tedious  in  relating 
my  knowledge  for  plain  men's  satisfaction.  .  .  . 


[J  f\     ;:-  cs_^sSc^f     JBW 

*  A  it  »tL.?  '^-     Al.or.len 

^',  ^    \^ 

DunftfcgS 


Schooler*  hill 
Sandwichfe? 
Dartmouth^. 


4 

" 


SMIXH'S  MAP  OF  NEW  ENGLAND 


I  have  drawn  a  map  (of  the  New  England  coast)  from 
point  to  point,  isle  to  isle,  and  harbor  to  harbor,  with  the 


JOHN   SMITH'S    DESCRIPTION   OF   NEW   ENGLAND          111 

soundings,  sands,  rocks,  and  landmarks,  as  I  passed  close 
along  the  shore  in  a  little  boat,  although  there  be  many 
things  to  be  observed  which  the  haste  of  other  affairs  did 
cause  me  to  omit.  For  being  sent  to  get  present  prod 
ucts  rather  than  knowledge  by  discoveries  for  any  future 
good,  I  had  not  power  to  search  as  I  would. 

Thus  you  may  see  that  of  this  two  thousand  -miles  of 
coast  (east  coast  of  North  America)  more  than  half  is  yet 
unknown  to  any  purpose ;  no,  not  so  much  as  the  borders 
of  the  sea  are  yet  certainly  discovered.  As  for  the  good 
ness  and  true  substance  of  the  land,  we  are  for  the  most 
part  ignorant  of  them. 

That  part  we  call  New  England  is  betwixt  the  degrees 
41  and  45,  but  that  part  here  spoken  of  stretcheth  from 
Penobscot  to  Cape  Cod,  75  leagues  by  a  right  line  from 
each  other;  within  which  bounds  I  have  seen  at  least 
forty  several  habitations  upon  the  sea  coast,  and  sounded 
about  25  excellent  good  harbors,  in  many  whereof  there 
is  anchorage  for  500  sail  of  ships  of  any  burden;  in 
some  of  them,  for  5000,  and  more  than  200  isles  over 
grown  with  good  timber  of  divers  sorts  of  wood. 

For  their  fur  trade  and  merchandize :  to  each  of  their 
habitations  they  have  different  towns  and  peoples  belong 
ing,  and  by  their  relations  and  descriptions,  more  than 
twenty  several  habitations  and  rivers  that  stretch  them 
selves  far  up  into  the  country,  even  to  the  borders  of 


112  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

divers  great  lakes,  where  they  kill  and  take  most  of  their 
beavers  and  otters. 

From  Penobscot  to  Sagadahock  this  coast  is  all  moun 
tains  and  isles  of  huge  rocks,  but  overgrown  with  all  sorts 
of  excellent  good  woods  for  building  houses,  boats,  barks, 
or  ships ;  with  an  incredible  abundance  of  most  sorts  of  fish, 
much  fowl,  and  sundry  sorts  of  good  fruits  for  man's  use. 

Betwixt  Sagadahock  and  Sawocatuck  there  are  but  two 
or  three  sandy  bays  but  betwixt  that  and  Cape  Cod  very 
many.  Especially  the  coast  of  Massachusetts  is  so  indif 
ferently  mixed  with  high  clayey  or  sandy  cliffs  in  one 
place,  and  then  tracts  of  large  long  ledges  of  divers  sorts 
and  quarries  of  stones,  in  other  places  so  strongly  divided 
with  tinctured  veins  of  divers  colors :  as  free  stone  for 
building,  slate  for  tiling,  smooth  stone  to  make  furnaces 
and  forges  for  glass  or  iron,  and  iron  ore,  sufficient  con 
veniently  to  melt  them.  All  which  are  so  near  adjoining 
to  those  other  advantages  I  observed  in  these  parts,  that 
if  the  ore  prove  as  good  iron  and  steel  in  those  parts  as 
I  know  there  is  within  the  bounds  of  the  country,  I  dare 
engage  my  head  (having  men  skillful  to  work  the  sim 
ples  there  growing)  to  have  all  things  belonging  to  the 
building  and  rigging  of  ships  of  any  size  and  good  mer 
chandize  for  freight,  within  a  square  of  ten  or  fourteen 
leagues. 

And  surely  by  reason  of  those  sandy  cliffs  and  cliffs  of 


JOHN  SMITH'S  DESCRIPTION  OP  NEW  ENGLAND       113 

rocks,  both  which  we  saw  so  planted  with  gardens  and 
corn  fields,  and  so  well  inhabited  with  a  goodly,  strong, 
and  well-proportioned  people,  besides  the  greatness  of  the 
timber  growing  on  them,  the  greatness  of  the  fish  and 
the  moderate  temper  of  the  air,  who  can  but  approve 
this  a  most  excellent  place  both  for  health  and  fertility  ? 
And  of  all  the  four  parts  of  the  world  that  I  have  yet 
seen  not  inhabited,  could  I  have  but  means  to  transport 
a  colony,  I  would  rather  live  here  than  anywhere;  and 
if  it  did  not  maintain  itself,  were  we  once  indifferently 
well  fitted  out,  let  us  starve. 

The  main  staple  from  hence  to  be  expected  for  the 
present^  to  produce  the  rest,  is  fish,  which  however  may 
seem  a  mean  and  base  commodity ;  yet  whoever  will  take 
the  pains  and  consider  the  sequel,  I  think  will  allow  it 
well  worth  the  labor. 

Here  is  ground  also  as  good  as  any  that  lyeth  in  the 
height  of  forty  one,  forty  two,  forty  three  degrees,  etc., 
where  is  as  fruitful  land  as  between  any  parallels  in 
the  world. 

Therefore,  I  conclude  if  the  heart  and  entrails  of  those 
regions  were  sought,  if  their  land  were  cultured,  planted, 
and  manured  by  men  of  industry,  judgment,  and  experi 
ence,  what  hope  is  there  or  what  need  they  doubt,  having 
those  advantages  of  the  sea,  that  it  might  equal  any  of 
those  famous  kingdoms  (in  Europe)  in  all  commodities, 


114  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

pleasures,  and  conditions;  seeing  that  even  the  very 
edges  do  afford  us  such  plenty,  that  no  ship  need  return 
away  empty.  If  they  will  but  use  the  season  of  the  sea, 
fish  will  return  an  honest  gain  besides  all  other  advan 
tages,  her  treasures  having  never  yet  been  opened,  nor 
her  originals  wasted,  consumed,  nor  abused. 

The  ground  is  so  fertile  that  questionless,  it  is  capable 
of  producing  any  grain,  fruits,  or  seed  you  will  sow  or 
plant,  but  it  may  be  not  every  kind  to  that  perfection  of 
delicacy,  or  some  tender  plants  may  miscarry,  because 
the  summer  is  not  so  hot,  and  the  winter  is  more  cold  in 
those  parts  we  have  tried  near  the  sea  side,  than  we  find 
in  the  same  latitude  in  Europe  and  Asia.  Yet  I  made 
a  garden  on  the  top  of  a  rocky  isle  in  43±°,  four  leagues 
from  the  maine,  in  May,  that  grew  so  well  as  it  served 
us  for  salads  in  June  and  July. 

All  sorts  of  cattle  may  here  be  bred  and  fed  in  the  isles 
or  peninsulas,  securely  for  nothing.  In  the  interim,  till 
they  increase,  observing  the  seasons,  I  undertake  to -have 
corn  enough  from  the  savages. 

In  March,  April,  May,  and  half  of  June  here  is  cod  in 
abundance,  in  May,  June,  July,  and  August,  mullet  and 
sturgeon,  and  surely  there  is  an  incredible  abundance 
upon  this  coast.  The  mullets  here  are  in  that  abundance 
you  may  take  them  with  nets,  sometimes  by  the  hundreds. 
Much  salmon  some  have  found  up  the  rivers  as  they  have 


JOHN  SMITH'S  DESCRIPTION  OF  NEW  ENGLAND       115 

passed  and  here  the  air  is  so  temperate  as  all  these  at  any 
time  may  well  be  preserved.  Now  young  boys  and  girls, 
savages  or  any  other,  be  they  never  such  idlers,  may  turn, 
carry,  and  return  fish,  without  either  shame  or  any  great 
pain.  He  is  very  idle  that  is  past  twelve  years  of  age 
and  cannot  do  so  much  and  she  is  very  old  that  cannot 
spin  a  thread  to  make  nets  to  catch  them. 

Salt  upon  salt  may  assuredly  be  made.  Then  the  ships 
may  transport  kine,  horses,  goats,  coarse  cloth  and  other 
goods  as  we  want,  against  whose  arrival  may  be  made  that 
provision  of  fish  to  freight  the  ships  that  they  stay  not. 

Of  the  muskrat  may  be  well  raised  gains  well  worth 
their  labor  that  will  endeavor  to  make  trial  of  their 
goodness.  Of  beavers,  otters,  martens,  black  foxes  and 
furs  of  price,  may  yearly  be  six  or  seven  thousand  and,  if 
the  trade  of  the  French  were  prevented,  many  more. 

Twenty  five  thousand  this  year  (1614)  were  brought 
from  those  northern  parts  into  France,  of  which  trade  we 
may  have  as  good  part  as  the  French,  if  we  take  good 
courses. 

Of  mines  of  gold,  silver,  copper,  and  probabilities  of 
lead,  crystal  and  alum,  I  could  say  much  if  reports  were 
good  assurances.  But  I  am  no  alchemist  nor  will  promise 
more  than  I  know. 

But  to  return  a  little  more  to  the  particulars  of  this 
country  —  the  most  northern  part  I  was  at  was  the  Bay 


116  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

of  Periobscot  which  is  east  and  west,  north  and  south, 
more  than  ten  leagues.  I  found  that  this  river  ran  far 
up  into  the  land  and  was  well  inhabited  with  many 
people,  but  they  were  away  from  their  habitations,  either 
fishing  among  the  isles  or  hunting  the  lakes  and  woods 
for  deer  and  beavers.  The  bay  is  full  of  great  islands  of 
one,  two,  six,  eight  or  ten  miles  in  length,  which  divide 
it  into  many  fair  and  excellent  good  harbors. 

On  the  east  of  it  are  the  Tarran tines,  mortal  enemies  of 
those  at  Penobscot ;  where  inhabit  the  French,  as  they 
report,  that  live  with  those  people  as  one  nation  or 
family,  and  northwest  of  Penobscot  is  Mecaddacut  at 
the  foot  of  a  high  mountain  (a  kind  of  fortress  against 
the  Tarrantines)  adjoining  to  the  high  mountains  of 
Penobscot,  against  whose  feet  doth  beat  the  sea;  but 
over  all  the  lands,  isles  or  other  impediments  you 
may  well  see  them  sixteen  or  eighteen  leagues  from 
their  situation. 

Up  this  river  (at  Sagadahock)  where  was  the  western 
plantation,  are  Anmuckcaugen,  Kennebeck  and  divers 
others,  where  there  are  planted  some  corn-fields.  Along 
this  river  forty  or  fifty  miles  I  saw  nothing  but  great  high 
cliffs  of  barren  rocks,  overgrown  with  wood ;  but  where 
the  savages  dwelt,  there  the  ground  is  exceeding  fat  and 
fertile. 

Westward  of  this  river  is  the  country  Ancosisco,  in  the 


JOHN  SMITH'S  DESCRIPTION  OF  NEW  ENGLAND       117 

bottom  of  a  large  deep  bay,  full  of  many  great  isles  which 
divide  it  into  many  good  harbors. 

But  all  this  coast  to  Penobscot  and  as  far  as  I  could  see 
eastward  of  it,  is  nothing  but  such  high  craggy,  cliffy 
rocks  and  stony  isles,  that  I  wondered  such  great  trees 
could  grow  upon  so  hard  foundations.  It  is  a  country 
rather  to  affright  than  to  delight  one.  And  how  to 
describe  a  more  plain  spectacle  of  desolation,  or  more 
barren,  I  know  not.  Yet  the  sea  there  is  the  strangest 
fish  pond  I  ever  saw ;  and  those  barren  isles,  so  furnished 
with  good  woods,  springs,  fruits,  fish,  arid  fowl,  that  it 
makes  me  think,  though  the  coast  be  rocky  and  affright- 
able,  the  valleys,  plains,  and  interior  parts  may  well  be 
very  fertile.  But  there  is  no  kingdom  so  fertile  that  hath 
not  some  barren  part ;  and  New  England  is  great  enough 
to  make  many  kingdoms  and  countries  were  it  all 
inhabited. 

As  you  pass  the  coast  still  westward,  Accominticus  and 
Passataquach  are  two  convenient  harbors  for  small  barks, 
and  a  good  country  within  their  craggy  cliffs.  Angoam  is 
the  next.  This  place  might  content  a  right  curious  judg 
ment  ;  but  there  are  many  sands  at  the  entrance  of  the 
harbor  and  the  worst  is  it  is  embayed  too  far  from  the 
deep  sea.  Here  are  many  rising  hills  and  on  their  tops 
and  descents  many  corn-fields  and  delightful  groves. 

From  thence  (Naimkech)  doth  stretch  into  the  sea  the 


118  PIONEERS   ON  LAND  AND  SEA 

fair  headland  of  Tragabigzanda  fronted  with  three  isles 
called  the  Three  Turks'  Heads.  To  the  north  of  this  doth 
enter  a  great  bay,  where  were  found  some  habitations  and 
corn-fields.  They  report  a  great  river  and  at  least  thirty 
habitations.  But  because  the  French  had  got  their  trade, 
I  had  no  leisure  to  discover  it. 

The  isles  of  Mattahunts  are  on  the  west  side  of  this 
bay,  where  are  many  isles  and  questionless  good  harbors, 
and  then  the  country  of  the  Massachusetts,  which  is  the 
paradise  of  all  those  parts.  For  here  are  many  isles  all 
planted  with  corn,  groves,  mulberries,  savages'  gardens, 
and  good  harbors;  the  coast  is  for  the  most  part  high, 
clayey,  sandy  cliffs.  The  sea-coast  as  you  pass  shows 
you  all  along  corn-fields  and  great  troops  of  well-propor 
tioned  people.  But  the  French,  having  remained  here 
near  six  weeks,  left  us  no  occasion  to  examine  the 
number  of  people,  the  rivers,  and  other  things. 

We  found  the  people  in  those  parts  very  kind  but  in 
their  fury  no  less  valiant.  For  upon  a  quarrel  we  had 
with  one  of  them,  he,  only  with  three  others,  crossed  the 
harbor  of  Quanahassit  to  certain  rocks  whereby  we  must 
pass,  and  there  let  fly  their  arrows  for  our  shot  till  we 
were  out  of  danger. 

Then  came  we  to  Acconmac,  an  excellent  good  harbor, 
good  land,  and  no  want  of  anything  but  industrious  peo 
ple.  After  much  kindness,  upon  a  small  occasion,  we 


JOHN   SMITH'S   DESCRIPTION   OF   NEW   ENGLAND          119 

fought  also  with  forty  or  fifty  of  those ;  though  some  were 
hurt  and  some  slain,  yet  within  an  hour  after  they  became 
friends. 

Cape  Cod  is  the  next  that  presents  itself,  which  is  only 
a  headland  of  high  hills  of  sand,  overgrown  with  shrubby 
pines,  hurts,  and  such  trash,  but  an  excellent  harbor  for 
all  weathers.  This  cape  is  made  by  the  main  sea  on  one 
side  and  a  great  bay  on  the  other  in  the  form  of  a  sickle. 
On  it  doth  inhabit  the  people  of  Paumet  and  in  the  bot 
tom  of  the  bay  the  people  of  Chawum. 

Toward  the  south  and  west  of  this  cape  is  found  a  long 
and  dangerous  shoal  of  sands  and  rocks.  But  so  far  as  I 
encircled  it,  I  found  thirty  fathoms  of  water  aboard  the 
shore  and  a  strong  current,  which  makes  me  think  there 
is  a  channel  about  this  shoal ;  where  is  the  best  and  great 
est  fish  to  be  had  winter  and  summer  in  all  that  country. 

The  herbs  and  fruits  (of  New  England)  are  of  many 
sorts :  currants,  mulberries,  vines,  plums,  walnuts,  chest 
nuts,  small  nuts,  etc.,  pumpkins,  gourds,  strawberries, 
beans,  peas,  and  maize ;  a  kind  or  two  of  flax  wherewith 
they  make  nets,  lines,  and  ropes. 

There  are  eagles,  many  kinds  of  hawks,  cranes,  geese, 
brants,  cormorants,  ducks,  sheldrakes,  teals,  gulls,  turkeys, 
dive-droppers,  and  many  other  sorts  whose  names  I  know 
not;  whales,  grampus,  porpoises,  turbot,  sturgeon,  cod, 
hake,  haddock,  cole,  shark,  mackerel,  eels,  crabs,  lobsters. 


120 


PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 


mussels,  oysters,  and  many  others ;  moose,  a  beast  bigger 
than  a  stag,  deer,  red  and  fallow,  beavers,  wolves,  foxes, 
wildcats,  bears,  otters,  martens,  and  divers  sorts  of  ver 
min  whose  names  I  know  not. 

All  these  and  divers  other  good  things  do  here  for  want 
of  use  increase  and  decrease.  They  grow  to  that  abun 
dance  that  you 
shall  scarce  find 
any  bay,  shallow 
shore,  or  cove  of 
sand,  where  you 
may  not  take 
many  clams  and 
lobsters,  and  in 
many  places  load 
your  boat  if  you 

—^ 

=m^  please;  nor  isles 
where  you  find 
not  fruits,  birds,  or 
crabs,  or  mussels, 
or  all  of  them,  for 
the  taking  at  low 
water.  And  in  the  harbors  we  frequented,  a  little  boy 
might  take,  of  cunners  and  pinacks  and  such  delicate  fish, 
at  the  ship's  stern,  more  fish  than  six  or  ten  men  can  eat 
in  a  day;  but  with  the  casting  net  thousands  when  we 


INDIANS  WISHING 


JOHN  SMITH'S  DESCRIPTION  OF  NEW  ENGLAND       121 

pleased.  And  scarce  any  place  but  cod,  cuske,  halibut, 
mackerel,  skate,  or  such  like,  a  man  may  take  with  a 
hook  or  line  what  he  will.  And  in  divers  sandy  bays  a 
man  may  draw  with  a  net  great  store  of  mullets,  bass, 
and  other  sorts  of  such  excellent  fish,  as  many  as  his  net 
can  draw  on  shore. 

There  is  no  river  where  there  is  not  plenty  of  sturgeon, 
or  salmon,  or  both,  all  of  which  are  to  be  had  in  abun 
dance,  observing  but  their  seasons.  But  if  a  man  will 
go  at  Christmas  to  gather  cherries  in  Kent,  he  may  be 
deceived,  though  there  be  plenty  in  summer.  So  here 
these  plenties  have  each  their  seasons,  as  I  have  expressed. 


CHAPTER  VII 

CHRISTOPHER  COLUMBUS* 

CHRISTOPHER  COLUMBUS  was  born  at  Genoa  about  1436. 
The  family  had  been  weavers.  Columbus  was  probably 
sent  to  school  till  he  was  about  fourteen,  when  he  turned 
to  the  sea,  and  for  many  years  made  voyages  in  the  Medi 
terranean,  and  later  beyond  that  to  England,  and  also 
south  along  the  coast  of  Africa. 

He  became  in  time  an  expert  geographer  and  map- 
maker,  and,  being  also  an  experienced  seaman,  he  made 
charts  for  sea-captains  and  merchants. 

His  native  place,  Genoa,  in  northwestern  Italy,  was  an 
important  port  and  shipping  centre  for  Mediterranean 
countries,  and  Columbus  often  returned  here  between  his 
voyages  and  probably  employed  his  time,  while  at  home, 
in  map-making.  A  number  of  interesting  stories  are  told 
of  his  adventures  and  shipwreck  in  these  early  voyages, 
but  little  is  definitely  known  except  that  he  became  a 
thoroughly  seasoned  and  expert  sailor  and  sea-captain. 

About  the  year  1470  he  made  his  way  to  Lisbon,  where 
his  younger  brother,  Bartholomew,  had  gone  before,  as  it 

1  Authorities :  Fiske's  "Discovery  of  America"  and  Irving's  "Life  oi 
Columbus." 

122 


CHBISTOtHEK   COLUMBUS 


128 


had  become  a  famous  centre  for  navigators  and  sea-faring 
men.  Under  the  guidance  of  Prince  Henry  of  Portugal, 
the  Portuguese  had  become  greatly  interested  in  explora 
tions  along  the 
west  coast  of 
Africa.  It  is 
probable  that 
Columbus  sailed 
as  far  as  the 
equator  on  some 
of  these  voy 
ages,  and  he 
himself  tells  of 
one  of  his  voy 
ages  to  England 
and  beyond  as 
far  as  Iceland. 

At  Lisbon,  in 
1473,  Columbus 
married  a  beau-  

tiful  Portuguese  COLUMBUS 

lady,  Philippa,  whose  father  had  been  governor  of  Porto 
Santo,  one  of  the  Madeira  Islands.  Soon  afterward 
Columbus  and  his  wife  went  to  live  for  a  few  years  on 
this  island.  Philippa's  father  had  left  property  there, 
including  valuable  charts,  and  it  is  believed  that,  while 


124  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND  SEA 

dwelling  upon  this  island,  three  hundred  miles  west  of 
the  coast  of  Africa,  Columbus  first  formed  the  idea  of 
sailing  westward  to  the  coast  of  India. 

On  account  of  their  rich  products  the  lands  along  the 
southern  coast  of  Asia,  known  as  India,  were  regarded 
by  the  people  of  Europe  as  the  richest  of  all  lands.  It 
was  supposed  that  any  one  who  could  find  an  easy  way 
to  India  would  gain  boundless  wealth.  Before  the 
time  of  Columbus  the  trade  with  India  was  carried  on 
by  ships  to  the  Black  Sea,  where  caravans  carried  goods 
from  Bagdad  and  the  Persian  Gulf  along  the  Tigris  to 
Trebizond.  Another  caravan  route  was  from  the  Tigris 
to  Damascus  and  then  to  the  Mediterranean  at  Tyre 
and  Sidon.  A  third  route  was  by  way  of  Alexandria 
in  Egypt,  up  the  Nile  and  across  to  the  Red  Sea.  By 
these  'different  routes,  there  were  brought  from  India, 
partly  by  water,  partly  by  caravan,  oil,  fruits,  gold  and 
precious  stones,  beautiful  silks  and  embroidered  robes, 
spices  and  fine  weapons.  The  trade  in  these  valuable 
products  centred  in  Venice  and  made  that  city  very  rich. 
But  the  cities  along  the  overland  route  to  northern 
Europe,  like  those  of  the  Rhine  and  Danube,  were  made 
prosperous  by  this  trade  with  the  East.  From  Europe, 
cotton  and  woollen  goods,  toys,  and  other  products  were 
sent  to  India.  When  Columbus  was  a  boy,  the  Turks 
conquered  Constantinople  and  closed  up  the  trade  routes 


2 


126  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

by  way  of  the  Black  Sea  and  the  Persian  Gulf,  and  later 
they  took  possession  of  Egypt  also  and  thus  almost 
closed  up  thi§  way  of  reaching  India. 

Columbus  believed  that  by  sailing  westward  from 
Spain  he  would  come  to  the  islands  of  India.  If  such 
a  route  to  the  rich  lands  and  cities  of  India  could  be 
found,  it  would  be  much  shorter  and  easier  than  by  way 
of  the  Mediterranean  and  by  caravans  across  the  deserts 
to  India. 

Columbus  had  many  good  reasons  for  thinking  that 
the  earth  is  spherical  like  a  ball,  so  that  India  could 
be  reached  by  going  westward  as  well,  and  perhaps 
better  than  by  going  eastward.  He  had  learned  some 
things  from  his  own  observations  as  a  sailor  during 
thirty  years  and  more.  By  watching  ships  disappear  on 
the  sea  he  had  one  proof.  He  had  been  almost  to  the 
equator  on  the  south,  and  to  Iceland  in  the  north,  and 
he  had  observed  that  the  North  Star  and  other  stars 
toward  the  north  appear  higher  in  the  heavens  than 
farther  south.  Besides  this,  Columbus  had  read  much 
in  books  of  geography  and  astronomy  and  had  found 
that  many  of  the  wisest  writers  believed  the  world  to 
be  shaped  like  a  ball.  In  order  to  be  still  more  surely 
convinced,  he  wrote  a  letter  to  Toscanelli,  a  famous 
astronomer  of  Florence,  explaining  his  belief  that  he 
should  find  India  by  sailing  west.  Toscanelli,  who 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  127 

was  an  old  man  of  seventy-seven  years,  was  much  pleased 
with  the  letter  and  plans  of  a  voyage,  and  not  only  en 
couraged  Columbus  to  sail  westward  but  drew  a  map  of 
Spain,  Africa,  and  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  marking  down  the 
islands  and  showing  how  far  he  thought  Columbus 
would  need  to  sail  before  reaching  India.  This  map 
Columbus  kept  and  used  on  the  voyage. 

Columbus  became  thus  firmly  convinced  that  he  could 
reach   India    by   sailing   westward   across    the   Atlantic. 

V 

But  he  had  no  money  with  which  to  build  ships  and 
hire  sailors  for  so  dangerous  a  voyage.  For  some 
years  he  had  been  at  Lisbon  from  time  to  time  and  had 
succeeded  in  getting  an  audience  with  King  John  II, 
in  which  he  urged  his  plan  upon  the  king.  The  king 
did  not  feel  like  deciding  so  difficult  a  question  and 
called  a  council  of  geographers  and  learned  men.  They 
condemned  Columbus's  plan,  thinking  it  a  wild  dream. 
Still  the  king  was  interested  in  the  matter  and  called 
another  council  of  the  most  learned  men  in  the  king 
dom.  Some  of  the  council  approved  of  his  plan,  but 
others  thought  it  too  expensive  or  dangerous  or  im 
possible.  King  John  allowed  himself  to  treat  Columbus 
very  meanly.  Having  secured  Columbus's  charts  and 
plans  of  the  voyage,  he  secretly  sent  out  a  ship  with  a 
captain  and  crew  to  see  whether  they  could  not  find  the 
way  to  India  and  thus  outwit  Columbus.  The  expedi- 


128  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

tion  proceeded  to  the  Cape  Verde  Islands  and  thence  sailed 
westward.  The  captain  and  sailors  had  not  gone  far  be 
fore  they  became  frightened  at  the  great  waste  of  ocean 
around  them,  so  they  turned  back  and  on  their  return  to 
Lisbon  ridiculed  Columbus's  plan.  When  this  meanness 
and  dishonesty  came  to  the  ears  of  Columbus,  he  was 
very  indignant  at  the  king.  He  left  Portugal  at  once 
and  set  out  for  Spain,  where  he  hoped  for  better  treat 
ment  from  the  king  and  queen. 

In  the  autumn  of  1484  Columbus  was  in  Spain  with 
his  little  son,  Diego,  whom  he  left  with  an  aunt,  his 
mother's  sister,  at  Huelva,  near  Palos,  on  the  south 
west  coast  of  Spain.  At  this  time  Ferdinand  and 
Isabella,  king  and  queen  of  Spain,  were  carrying  on  a 
great  war  with  the  Moors,  who  were  not  Christians, 
trying  to  capture  the  old  castle  and  city  of  Granada  arid 
drive  the  Moors  out  of  Spain  into  Africa.  Then  Ferdi 
nand  and  Isabella  would  rule  over  the  whole  of  Spain 
and  be  free  from  the  Mohammedan  Moors. 

The  king  and  queen  were  so  busy  raising  money  and 
armies  to  carry  on  this  war  that  Columbus,  for  some 
time,  was  unable  to  get  a  hearing.  But  the  Spanish 
treasurer  became  interested  in  his  ideas  and  in  the  fall 
of  1486  a  council  of  learned  men  was  called  at  the 
University  of  Salamanca,  where  much  opposition  to 
Columbus  was  shown.  His  idea  that  the  earth  is  spheri- 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  129 


cal  was  ridiculed.  Texts  of  scripture  were  brought  up 
against  him  and  some  passages  of  ancient  books  were 
quoted  to  prove  him  in  the  wrong.  Some  of  the  priests 
and  scholars,  indeed,  were  strongly  in  favor  of  Columbus 
and  adopted  his  views.  But  nothing  was  done  to  help 
him  in  his  undertaking. 

In  the  fall  of  1488  Columbus  made  another  visit  to 
Lisbon  to  see  his  brother,  Bartholomew,  who  had  just 
returned  from  a  great  voyage  with  Diaz,  in  which  they 
had  explored  southward  along  the  coast  of  Africa  till  they 
came  to  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  and  thus  opened  up  the 
way  to  India  by  passing  round  Africa.  Columbus  now 
sent  bis  brother  to  England  with  maps  and  plans  to  secure 
the  aid  of  King  Henry.  He  was  received  and  well  treated 
by  the  king  but  was  not  given  money  or  ships.  Bartholo 
mew,  therefore,  set  out  for  France  to  make  another  effort. 

Columbus  returned  to  Spain  and  joined  the  Spanish 
army  fighting  against  the  Moors,  where  he  showed  great 
valor  as  a  soldier.  Not  receiving  help  from  the  king,  he 
applied  to  one  of  the  great  nobles,  the  Duke  of  Medina- 
Sidonia,  who  refused  to  aid  him.  Then  the  Duke  of 
Medina-Celi  proved  a  strong  friend,  kept  Columbus  at  his 
palace  for  two  years,  and  proposed  to  fit  out  some  vessels 
with  which  he  could  make  his  voyage.  The  queen  refused 
to  grant  the  duke  the  privilege  but  she  herself  failed  to 
take  up  the  matter,  and  Columbus,  disgusted  with  long 


130  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

waiting,  resolved  to  shake  off  the  dust  of  Spain  from  his 
feet  and  to  go  to  France  or  England.  He  deserted  the 
Spanish  court,  set  out  for  Huelva  to  get  his  little  son, 
Diego,  who  should  go  with  him.  As  he  and  the  boy  were 
walking  one  afternoon  along  the  road  in  sight  of  the 
ocean,  a  few  miles  from  Palos,  they  stopped  at  a  little 
monastery,  La  Rabida,  to  get  food  and  drink.  At  this 
time  Columbus  was  very  much  discouraged ;  for  many 
years  he  had  labored  with  the  kings  of  Portugal  and  Spain 
to  secure  help  for  his  great  plan,  but  now,  after  so  many 
years  of  fruitless  toil,  he  was  about  to  leave  Spain  and 
start  out  for  new  and  strange  lands  and  kings  to  seek 
help.  Little  did  he  dream  that  in  this  little  home 
of  monks,  a  mile  or  two  from  Palos,  he  was  to  meet  the 
man  who  would  greatly  aid  him  in  his  plan. 

The  prior,  or  head  of  the  monastery,  was  Juan  Perez, 
who  saw  Columbus  and  talked  with  him  as  he  entered  the 
gate.  He  had  never  before  met  the  navigator;  but  he 
was  a  wise  man,  and  as  they  talked  together  he  became 
interested  in  Columbus's  plan  of  a  great  voyage  and  asked 
many  questions.  He  persuaded  Columbus  to  stay  over 
night  and  sent  for  a  young  physician  of  Palos,  Garcia, 
and  Martin  Pinzon,  a  sea-captain,  who  talked  over  Colum 
bus's  plan  with  enthusiasm.  A  few  years  before,  Juan 
Perez  had  been  confessor  to  Isabella  at  the  court,  and  he 
now  offered  to  go  to  court  and  persuade  Isabella  to  under- 


CHRISTOPHER    COLUMBUS  131 

take  the  expense  of  the  voyage.  He  sent  a  letter  to  the 
queen  and  was  at  once  summoned  to  appear  at  court. 
After  a  few  weeks  he  returned  from  Granada  with  a  sum 
equivalent  to  $1180  to  pay  Columbus's  expenses  for  ap 
pearing  again  at  court.  Columbus  bought  a  court  suit, 
a  mule,  and  other  things  and  set  out  again  to  visit  the 
queen.  His  little  son,  Diego,  he  left  with  one  of  the  priests. 
As  soon  as  Columbus  reached  Granada  he  was  well 
received  and  his  plan  was  again  discussed  by  a  council  of 
learned  men.  But,  although  some  opposed  him,  many 
of  the  leading  men  were  strong  supporters  of  his  plan, 
and  the  queen  promised  to  undertake  it  as  soon  as  Gra 
nada  was  captured  and  the  war  against  the  Moors  ended. 
This  happened  very  soon,  in  the  spring  of  1492,  but  then 
a  difficulty  arose  that  threatened  to  put  an  end  to  the 
whole  plan.  Columbus  was  unwilling  to  undertake  the 
voyage  unless  the  queen  promised  to  make  him  admiral  of 
the  ocean  and  governor  of  all  the  lands  he  should  discover, 
and  allow  him  to  receive  one-eighth  of  all  the  profits 
coming  from  those  lands.  The  queen  felt  that  these 
demands  were  too  large  and  the  agreement  was  broken 
off.  Columbus  refused  to  undertake  the  voyage  on  any 
less  favorable  terms,  so  he  mounted  his  mule  and  started 
to  leave  the  court  a '  second  time.  Some  of  the  chief 
advisers  of  the  queen  went  to  her  and  urged  that  she 
was  losing  a  great  chance. 


132 


PIONEERS   ON   LAND    AND   SEA 


She  was  persuaded  to  think  the  matter  over  and  a  swift 
horseman  was  sent  to  overtake  Columbus,  who  was  found 
jogging  along  on  his  mule  about  six  miles  from  Granada. 
He  was  persuaded  to  return  and  soon  an  agreement  was 
made  that  was  satisfactory  to  both  parties. 


THE  DEPARTURE  OF  COLUMBUS 


Now,  in  a  second  meeting  with  the  queen,  it  was 
agreed  that  Columbus  should  be  admiral  in  all  the  islands 
and  countries  he  might  discover,  that  he  should  be  gov 
ernor  of  these  new  lands,  that  he  should  iiave  for  himself 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  133 

one-tenth  of  all  the  precious  stones,  pearls,  gold,  silver, 
spices,  and  merchandise  obtained  in  those  regions,  that  he 
should  be  judge  of  all  disputes  arising  as  to  trade  in  those 
countries.  Columbus  was  to  meet  one-eighth  of  all  the 
expenses  of  the  fitting  out  of  vessels  for  the  journey. 
Some  of  Columbus's  friends  furnished  him  the  money 
for  this  purpose.  The  queen  herself  and  her  treasurer, 
Santangel,  undertook  the  work,  and  Ferdinand,  the  king, 
was  not  directly  concerned  in  it. 

At  the  port  of  Palos,  on  the  southeast  coast  of  Spain, 
Columbus  was  to  prepare  his  men  and  fleet.  The  little 
town  itself  was  required  to  raise  a  tax  upon  its  citizens  to 
help  pay  the  expense  and  this  they  grumbled  at.  When 
Columbus  went  down  to  Palos  to  begin  work,  the  town 
was  in  an  uproar,  the  sailors  and  people  were  frightened 
by  such  a  voyage  out  on  the  great  unknown  sea.  Colum 
bus  was  cursed  on  account  of  the  forced  tax  but  the  Pin- 
zon  brothers  (sea-captains)  were  his  strong  friends  and 
supported  the  undertaking. 

Three  ships  (caravels)  were  secured,  the  Santa  Maria, 
the  admiral's  flag-ship,  the  Pinta,  a  smaller  but  swifter 
vessel,  and  the  Nina.  The  two  smaller  vessels  were  not 
decked  amidships.  Columbus  had  more  trouble  in  secur 
ing  men  than  ships.  Those  going  on  this  rash  journey 
scarcely  expected  to  see  their  homes  again.  To  persuade 
men  to  join  the  crews  debts  were  forgiven  and  some  pris- 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  135 

oners  were  released  from  jail  on  the  promise  of  going 
with  Columbus.  Ninety  persons  were  at  length  secured 
to  man  the  three  vessels.  August  3, 1492,  before  sunrise, 
they  set  sail  from  Palos  in  the  midst  of  sorrow  and  weep 
ing.  They  stood  southward  to  the  Canaries.  Before 
they  reached  the  islands  there  were  bad  signs  of  trouble. 
The  Pinta  broke  her  rudder  and  Columbus  suspected  that 
its  owners,  who  were  on  board,  had  purposely  disabled  it 
so  that  their  vessel  might  be  left  behind.  At  the  Cana 
ries,  Columbus  stopped  to  repair  the  Pinta.  These  were 
Spanish  islands  and  a  safe  place  for  Spanish  ships  to  stop. 
But  even  here  two  things  threatened  danger.  First,  it  was 
reported  that  some  Portuguese  ships  were  near  to  prevent 
Columbus  sailing.  A  volcano  on  one  of  the  islands  had 
an  eruption  and  caused  a  second  terror  to  the  supersti 
tious  sailors.  But  in  spite  of  all  these  fears,  on  Septem 
ber  6,  they  set  sail  from  the  Canaries  on  the  first  great 
voyage  out  into  the  Atlantic.  As  they  sailed  westward 
they  saw  the  lighted  mountain  behind  them  sending  out 
fire  and  smoke.  A  short  distance  from  the  coast  they  were 
becalmed  and  made  only  thirty  miles  in  two  days.  Then 
the  breeze  freshened  and  the  islands  passed  out  of  sight. 
Many  of  the  sailors  cried  and  sobbed  like  children. 

The  weather  was  fine  and  but  for  the  fears  of  the 
sailors  this  might  have  been  a  pleasant  voyage.  Many 
things  happened  to  excite  their  anxious  fears.  Septem- 


136 


PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 


ber  13  the  ship  crossed  the  line  where  the  needle 
pointed  straight  north,  and  Columbus  was  astonished  to 
see  that  the  compass  needle  began  to  sway  from  the 
right  to  the  left  of  the  Pole  Star.  When  the  pilots 
found  the  compass  acting  so  queerly,  they  thought  it 
bewitched  and  playing  a  foul  trick  as  a  punishment 


THE  FLEET  OF  COLUMBUS 

for   their   boldness.      Columbus  himself,  though  puzzled, 
soothed  their  fears  with  a  shrewd  explanation. 

On  September  16  the  vessels  entered  a  vast  tract  of 
floating  seaweed  and  grasses,  where  many  timny  fish 
and  crabs  were  seen.  "  They  had  entered  the  wonder 
ful  Sargasso  Sea,  where  vast  tangles  of  vegetation  cover 


CHRISTOPHER    COLUMBUS  137 

the  surface  of  water  more  than  two  thousand  fathoms 
deep."  At  first  the  ships  went  through  this  tangle 
with  considerable  ease,  but,  the  wind  becoming  light,  they 
found  progress  difficult.  Then  the  crews  became  fright 
ened  and  thought  of  stories  they  had  heard  of  "myste 
rious  impassable  seas  and  of  overbold  sailors  whose 
ships  stuck  fast  in  them."  Some  were  afraid  they  might 
be  stranded  on  shoals,  but  sounding  they  were  aston 
ished  to  find  their  longest  line  failed  to  reach  the  bot 
tom.  After  a  few  days  stronger  winds  blew  and  on 
September  22  the  ships  had  passed  the  sea  of  grass. 

Now  a  new  fear  was  aroused  in  the  sailors  by  the 
trade  winds  which  blew  steadily  westward.  Perhaps 
they  would  never  be  able  to  return  in  the  face  of  these 
winds.  After  a  while  the  wind  changed  to  the  south 
west  and  their  fears  were  quieted. 

The  crews  were  now  impatient  at  not  finding  land. 
Columbus,  fearing  this,  had  kept  two  logs,  one  for  him 
self  and  one  for  the  crew.  In  the  log  for  the  crew  he 
never  told  the  full  number  of  miles  sailed  each  day 
and  they  did  not  know  how  far  they  really  were  from 
the  Canaries.  Lately  many  signs  of  land  had  appeared. 
Strange  birds  were  seen  flying  through  the  air.  A 
mirage  showed  what  appeared  to  be  a  coast-line  but 
the  next  morning  it  was  gone,  and  then  the  men  were 
sure  they  had  reached  an  enchanted  place.  Some  one 


138  PIONEERS   ON   LAND    AND   SEA 

suggested  pushing  Columbus  overboard  in  such  manner 
that  it  would  seem  he  had  fallen  while  looking  at  the 
stars.  The  fear  that  the  fleet  might  not  be  able  to 
return  to  Spain  without  him  probably  saved  his  life. 

On  October  4  there  were  signs  of  mutiny  and  Colum 
bus,  to  please  his  pilots,  changed  his  course  to  the  south 
west.  They  were  now  2724  miles  from  the  Canaries, 
though  the  log  for  the  crew  showed  only  2200  miles. 
This  change  to  the  southwest,  although  they  did  not 
know  it,  shortened  the  distance  to  land  about  two  hun 
dred  miles,  as  the  coast  of  Florida  directly  west  of  them 
was  farther  than  the  island  they  finally  reached.  On 
October  11  signs  of  land  became  unmistakable  and  all 
were  much  excited.  A  reward  was  promised  to  the  one 
that  first  saw  the  land  and  all  watched  eagerly.  About 
ten  o'clock  the  admiral,  standing  on  the  high  poop  of 
his  vessel,  saw  a  moving  light  as  if  some  one  were  run 
ning  along  the  shore  with  a  torch.  A  few  hours  later 
a  sailor  on  the  Pinta  saw  land  and  soon  all  could  see 
the  low  coast  some  five  miles  away.  This  was  at 
two  o'clock  in  the  morning  of  Friday,  October  12th  —  just 
ten  weeks  since  they  had  sailed  from  Palos  and  thirty- 
three  days  since  they  lost  sight  of  Ferro.  The  sails 
were  now  taken  in,  and  the  ships  lay  to,  waiting  for 
dawn. 

At  daybreak  Columbus,  with  most  of  his  men,  went 


140  PIONEERS   OK  LAND   AND   SEA 

ashore.  Beautiful  trees  and  shrubs  were  upon  every 
side.  All  was  strange  and  new  and  beautiful.  The 
sailors  were  wild  with  delight.  They  had  at  last 
reached  Cipango  (Japan)  and  her  great  wealth  was 
theirs.  The  officers  embraced  Columbus  or  kissed  his 
hands,  while  the  sailors  threw  themselves  at  his  feet 
and  begged  his  pardon. 

The  people  of  the  island  gathered  around,  watching 
the  strangers  with  amazement.  The  natives  were  un 
like  any  people  the  Spaniards  had  ever  seen.  All  were 
naked  and  most  of  them  were  greased  and  painted. 
They  thought  the  ships  were  sea-monsters  and  the  white 
men  strange  creatures  from  the  sky.  At  first  they  ran 
away  as  the  strangers  came  ashore,  but  finding  they 
were  not  hurt  they  came  slowly  back,  stopping  every 
few  paces  to  throw  themselves  down  to  show  their 
respect.  The  Spaniards  received  them  with  nods  and 
smiles  and  they  soon  came  close  to  the  visitors  and 
touched  them,  as  if  to  make  sure  that  they  were  real, 
and  not  a  mere  vision.  The  Spaniards  offered  them 
presents  of  glass  beads  and  hawks'  bells  and  received 
in  return  cotton  yarn,  tame  parrots,  and  small  gold 
ornaments.  Columbus  tried  to  ask  them,  with  signs, 
where  they  got  their  gold  and  they  pointed  to  the 
south.  Then  Columbus  decided  that  he  was  a  little 
north  of  the  rich  Cipango.  This,  he  soon  discovered 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  141 

was  a  small  island  and  he  understood  the  name  to  be 
Guanahani.  He  took  formal  possession  of  it  for  Cas 
tile  and  gave  it  a  Christian  name,  San  Salvador.  The 
island  discovered  was  one  of  the  Bahamas.  The  name 
San  Salvador  is  still  given  to  one  of  this  group,  though 
perhaps  not  the  one  first  seen  by  Columbus. 

For  ten  days  the  ships  sailed  among  the  Bahamas 
and  visited  four  of  the  islands.  Columbus  was  satis 
fied  that  he  was  in  the  ocean  east  of  Cathay,  for  Marco 
Polo  had  said  it  was  studded  with  thousands  of  spice- 
bearing  islands,  and  some  of  them  were  inhabited  by 
naked  savages.  Although  he  had  found  no  spices,  there 
were  many  strange  trees  and  shrubs;  and  the  air  was 
full  of  fragrance  and  this  might  mean  anything.  When 
the  natives  were  asked  where  they  found  their  gold, 
they  always  pointed  southward  and  there  must  lie  the 
island  he  was  seeking. 

He  sailed  to  the  south,  intending  to  stay  a  short  time 
at  Ciparigo  and  then  sail  on  to  China. 

Soon  he  reached  Cuba  and  was  charmed  with  the 
beauty  of  its  scenery.  Pearl  oysters  were  found  along 
the  shore.  He  was  sure  he  had  reached  Cipango,  though 
no  large  cities  could  be  seen.  He  tried  to  talk  with  the 
natives,  and  understood  them  to  say  that  Cuba  was  a  part 
of  the  Asiatic  continent  and  that  there  was  a  king  in  th', 
neighborhood  that  was  at  war  with  the  Great  Khan.  So 


142  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

he  sent  two  messengers,  one  of  them  a  converted  Jew 
who  spoke  Arabic,  a  language  heard  in  parts  of  Asia,  to 
find  the  two  kings.  These  messengers  found  pleasant 
villages,  with  large  houses  surrounded  by  fields  of  to 
bacco  and  of  such  unknown  vegetables  as  maize  and  pota 
toes.  Columbus  says  in  his  diary,  "  The  two  Christians 
met  on  the  road  a  great  many  people  going  to  their  vil 
lages,  men  and  women  with  brands  in  their  hands,  made 
of  herbs  for  taking  their  customary  smoke."  The  Span 
iards  little  dreamed  that  the  tobacco  fields  would  some  day 
bring  greater  wealth  than  the  spices  they  were  seeking. 
They  passed  acres  of  growing  cotton  and  saw  in  the 
houses  piles  of  yarn  that  was  to  be  woven  into  rough 
cloth  or  twisted  into  nets  for  hammocks.  They  found 
neither  cities  nor  kings,  neither  gold  nor  spices,  and  soon 
returned  to  the  coast. 

Columbus  was  puzzled.  If  this  was  the  continent  of 
Asia,  where  was  Cipango  ?  He  thought  the  natives  said 
there  was  a  great  island  to  the  southwest  where  much 
gold  was  found,  so  he  sailed  in  that  direction.  On  the 
20th  of  November,  Martin  Pinzon,  whose  ship  could 
outsail  the  others,  deserted  him.  Pinzon  seemed  to  think 
that  he  might  get  credit  for  the  discovery  of  the  islands  if 
he  first  carried  home  the  news. 

For  two  weeks  after  Pinzon's  desertion,  Columbus  sailed 
slowly  eastward  along  the  coast  of  Cuba.  He  found 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  143 

pearls  and  mastic  and  aloes  and  it  seemed  to  him  there 
were  signs  of  gold.  Passing  the  island,  he  reached,  on 
the  6th  of  December,  the  island  of  Hayti,  which  he 
called  Hispaniola,  or  "Spanish  land."  Here  again  he 
thought  the  natives  spoke  of  gold  inland  and,  as  they 
called  the  island  Cibano,  he  was  sure  they  meant  Cipango 
and  that  he  had  at  last  reached  the  place  he  sought. 
The  scenery  was  beautiful.  Columbus  says :  "  The  land 
is  elevated  with  many  mountains  and  peaks  .  .  .  most 
beautiful,  of  a  thousand  varied  forms,  accessible,  and  full 
of  trees  of  endless  varieties,  so  tall  that  they  almost  touch 
the  sky ;  and  I  have  been  told  that  they  never  lose  their 
foliage.  The  nightingale  and  other  small  birds  .of  a 
thousand  kinds  were  singing  in  November  (December) 
when  I  was  there."  l  Before  he  had  done  much  exploring 
an  accident  made  him  change  his  plans.  On  Christmas 
morning,  through  carelessness  of  the  helmsman,  the  flag 
ship  struck  upon  a  sand-bank,  where  the  waves  soon 
dashed  her  to  pieces. 

After  the  desertion  of  the  Pinta  and  of  her  crew  and 
captain,  the  loss  of  the  flag-ship  Santa  Maria  caused 
Columbus  to  fear  that  he  would  not  be  able  to  get  back 
to  Spain.  The  only  ship  left,  the  Nina,  was  small,  and 
might  never  be  able  to  cross  the  ocean  back  to  Spain. 
Columbus  therefore  prepared  to  return.  After  the  loss  of 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


144  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

the  flag-ship,  more  men  were  left  than  could  well  return 
on  the  little  Nina,  and  some  of  them  desired  to  be  left 
on  the  island  to  await  Columbus's  return  on  a  second  voy 
age.  The  climate  was  so  delightful  and  the  Indians  so 
friendly  that  the  men  were  eager  to  stay.  Forty  of  them 
remained  on  the  island.  From  the  wrecked  timbers  of 
the  ship  a  fort  was  built  and  the  guns  of  the  lost  vessel 
Dlaced  upon  it,  and  when  the  preparations  were  made, 
Columbus  with  one  ship  set  sail  on  his  return. 

Two  days  later,  while  sailing  along  the  northern  coast 
of  Hispaniola,  the  Nina  -came  in  -sight  of  the  Pinta. 
The  commander  pretended  to  be  glad  to  see  Columbus 
and  tried  to  explain  that  he  had  been  separated  from 
Columbus  by  bad  weather.  Columbus  was  glad  to  see 
the  other  ship  again  and  to  have  her  company  on  the 
return  voyage,  though  he  believed  that  the  captain  had 
tried  to  desert  him. 

As  soon  as  the  ships  got  out  into  the  ocean  they  met 
the  westward  blowing  trade-winds  which  made  sailing 
eastward  slow  and  difficult.  In  order  to  avoid  these  trade- 
winds  Columbus  sailed  to  the  northeast  till  he  reached 
the  37th  parallel,  which  is  outside  of  the  limit  of  trade- 
winds.  Then  he  sailed  directly  toward  Spain.  They  had 
started  back  across  the  ocean  on  January  4.  On  Febru 
ary  12  a  storm  overtook  the  two  small  vessels  and  tossed 
them  with  great  violence  for  four  days.  It  was  so  severe 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  145 

and  long  continued  that  Columbus  almost  despaired  of 
holding  out.  Fearing  that  his  ships  would  both  go  down, 
he  wrote  out  on  parchment  two  accounts  of  his  voyage 
and  discoveries,  addressed  to  Ferdinand  and  Isabella, 
wrapped  them  in  cloth  and  then  surrounded  them  with  a 
cake  of  wax.  Each  of  these  was  securely  fastened  in  a 
tight  barrel.  One  of  the  barrels  was  cast  overboard. 
The  two  vessels  were  separated  during  the  storm  and  did 
not  meet  again  upon  the  sea.  Before  the  tempest  ceased 
the  Nina  came  in  sight  of  land,  which  proved  to  be  one 
of  the  Azores  Islands.  These  belonged  to  Portugal  and 
when  a  company  of  Columbus's  sailors  landed  and  went  to 
one  of  the  churches  to  offer  thanks  for  their  deliverance 
from  the  storm,  they  were  arrested  and  cast  into  prison, 
where  they  were  left  five  days.  Columbus  threatened  the 
governor  with  the  punishment  of  Spain  unless  the  men 
were  given  up  and  at  length  they  were  sent  back  to  the 
ship. 

As  Columbus  with  his  single  ship  now  sailed  eastward 
toward  Cape  St.  Vincent,  they  met  another  fierce  storm 
and  were  carried  to  the  north,  and  at  length  found  refuge 
in  the  harbor  of  Lisbon  at  the  mouth  of  the  Tagus.  But 
here  also  danger  threatened  the  little  crew  of  the  Nina. 
Some  of  King  John's  councillors  desired  him  to  have 
Columbus  arrested  or  put  to  death.  But  King  John  was 
too  wise  for  this-  He  invited  Columbus  to  his  court  and 


146  1'IONEERS   ON   LAND  AND  SEA 

treated  him  honorably  and  on  March  13  allowed  him 
to  set  sail  for  Palos.  Two  days  later  the  little  ship  sailed 
back  into  the  harbor  of  Palos  and  was  at  once  recognized 
by  the  people,  who  were  greatly  excited  and  rejoiced. 
They  had  scarcely  expected  to  see  again  the  friends  who 
had  sailed  away  the  year  before  out  into  the  unknown 
ocean.  That  evening,  while  the  bells  were  ringing  and 
everybody  was  rejoicing,  the  Pinta  sailed  into  the  harbor. 
Captain  Pinzon  of  the  Pinta,  hoping  that  Columbus  had 
gone  down  in  the  storm,  had  written  a  letter  to  the  king 
and  queen,  claiming  the  credit  of  the  discovery  for  him 
self.  His  vessel  had  been  driven  northward  in  the  storm 
to  France  but  he  returned  to  Palos  on  the  same  day 
as  Columbus.  He  was  greatly  disappointed  in  finding 
Columbus  already  in  port.  Discouraged  and  worn  out 
and  knowing  how  unjustly  he  had  acted,  he  died  a  few 
days  later. 

Columbus  sent  a  message  to  the  king  and  queen  of  his 
safe  arrival  but  the  news  had  spread  to  them  before  the 
letter  reached  them.  He  was  summoned  to  appear  before 
them  at  Barcelona  and  to  give  an  account  of  his  dis 
coveries.  His  reception  by  the  king  and  queen  was  a 
grand  scene.  He  was  bidden  to  sit  down  in  the  presence 
of  the  monarchs,  an  honor  usually  granted  only  to  mem 
bers  of  the  royal  family.  The  curious  products  of  the 
newly  discovered  islands  —  parrots,  plants,  pearls,  and 


CHRISTOPHER  COLUMBUS  147 

gold  —  were  displayed,  and  even  six  savages  brought  from 
Hispaniola  were  presented  as  interesting  curiosities. 


RECEPTION  OP  COLUMBUS  ON  HIS  RETURN 

The  islands  discovered  by  Columbus  were  supposed 
to  be  a  part  of  the  eastern  coast  of  Asia,  especially  Japan. 
The  whole  coast  of  eastern  Asia,  called  India,  was  but 
very  imperfectly  known  to  Europeans  and  these  natives 
were  therefore  called  Indians.  In  fact,  it  was  many  years 


148  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

after  this  before  people  found  out  that  the  islands  dis 
covered  by  Columbus  are  separated  from  India  and 
China  by  a  great  continent  and  by  thousands  of  miles 
of  ocean. 

The  discovery  of  these  islands  and  of  this  supposed 
western  route  to  India  was  a  cause  of  great  pride  and 
pleasure  to  Ferdinand  and  Isabella.  The  rich  countries 
of  India  would  thus  fall  into  the  hands  of  Spain  and 
great  wealth  was  expected. 

King  John  of  Portugal,  who  had  refused  to  help 
Columbus,  felt  bitterly  disappointed  that  he  had  let  slip 
this  great  chance  of  adding  to  his  kingdom  and  he  was 
very  envious  of  the  Spaniards. 

The  king  and  queen  were  now  anxious  to  send  out  a 
strong  fleet  of  ships,  with  soldiers,  sailors,  and  settlers, 
to  take  possession  of  the  new  lands  and  still  further  to 
explore  this  beautiful  and  boundless  region  of  wealth. 
The  war  which  Ferdinand  and  Isabella  had  waged  against 
the  Moors  in  southern  Spain  had  ended  in  the  capture  of 
the  chief  Moorish  city,  Granada,  and  the  expulsion  of  the 
Moors,  and  now  many  soldiers,  and  even  young  Spanish 
nobles,  were  ready  to  seek  adventure  and  wealth  in  the 
newly  discovered  lands  of  India. 

Columbus,  of  course,  must  be  the  commander  of  this 
expedition  and  by  the  agreement  made  with  Isabella  and 
Ferdinand  before  the  first  voyage,  he  was  governor- general 


COLUMBUS  149 

and  admiral  over  all  these  new  countries,  with  a  right 
to  keep  for  himself  and  his  children  these  honors  and 
with  them  one-tenth  of  all  the  wealth  obtained.  In  a 
word,  Columbus  had  become  a  great  Spanish  noble  and 
men  flocked  to  his  ships. 

In  September,  1493,  he  had  command  of  seventeen 
vessels  and  fifteen  hundred  men,  soldiers,  sailors,  and 
other  adventurers,  who  were  full  of  joyful  enthusiasm 
for  discovery  and  conquest. 

On  this  voyage  Columbus,  passing  farther  south,  first 
touched  the  Caribbean  Islands,  and,  after  stopping  at 
Porto  Rico,  passed  on  to  Hispaniola  and  La  Navidad. 
Much  to  his  sorrow  he  found  only  the  charred  ruins  of 
the  fort  in  which  he  had  left  forty  men  upon  his  first 
voyage.  The  boxes  of  provisions  and  chests  of  tools  had 
been  broken  open  and  carried  away,  and  the  bodies  of 
eleven  white  men  were  found  near  the  fort.  Later, 
Columbus  learned  from  the  Indians  that  the  white  men 
had  quarrelled  among  themselves  and  had  treated  the 
natives  so  badly  that  the  red  men  had  gathered  in  large 
numbers,  and  had  attacked  and  destroyed  the  fort  and 
all  the  white  men. 

Columbus  now  laid  out  a  town  at  a  good  harbor  on  the 
north  coast  of  Hispaniola,  and  named  it  Isabella,  where 
he  built  houses,  a  market,  and  a  church,  and  surrounded 
the  whole  with  a  stone  wall.  This  place  was  left  under 


150  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

the  command  of  his  brother,  Diego,  while  Columbus,  after 
sending  twelve  vessels  back  to  Spain  for  supplies,  took 
three  ships  for  a  voyage  of  further  exploration.  He 
passed  along  the  southern  coast  of  Cuba  and  the  islands 
about  a  thousand  miles,  then  returned  along  the  coast  of 
Jamaica,  and  finally  passed  eastward  around  the  southern 
coast  of  Hispaniola,  everywhere  searching  for  rich  cities 
which  he  did  not  find. 

Just  before  reaching  Isabella,  he  was  taken  very  sick 
and  was  for  several  weeks  unconscious.  As  he  recovered 
from  this  illness  at  Isabella,  he  found  the  affairs  of  his 
colony  in  very  bad  shape.  The  Spanish  soldiers  and 
nobles  had  been  quarrelsome  and  disobedient  to  the  gov 
ernor  and  wandered  about  the  island,  committing  wrongs 
against  the  natives  instead  of  working  and  strengthening 
the  colony.  Two  of  the  leading  Spaniards,  with  their 
friends,  seized  a  vessel  and  sailed  back  to  Spain  and 
made  bitter  complaints  against  Columbus  and  his  brother 
to  Ferdinand  and  Isabella. 

A  strong  native  chief  now  formed  a  plot  to  destroy  all 
the  white  men  but  it  was  discovered  and  the  chief  cap 
tured.  In  spite  of  his  capture,  an  Indian  war  broke  out 
and  Columbus  spent  a  year  in  subduing  the  savages^  and 
in  bringing  the  troublesome  and  disorderly  Spaniards 
under  control.  In  the  meantime  four  vessels  had  arrived 
with  much-needed  supplies,  but  they  also  had  on  board 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  151 

an  agent  sent  out  by  the  king  and  queen  to  examine  into 
the  condition  of  the  colony  and  its  government.  This 
man,  Aguado,  was  shrewdly  won  over  by  the  enemies  of 
Columbus,  so  that  Columbus  thought  it  best  to  go  back 
to  Spain  with  him  and  defend  his  own  conduct  at  court. 

A  short  time  before  starting,  rich  gold  mines  were 
discovered  near  the  south  coast  and  with  this  good  news 
Columbus  set  sail.  His  brother,  Bartholomew,  was  left  in 
command  and  the  next  summer,  1496,  transferred  the 
headquarters  of  the  colony  to  the  south  coast,  where  he 
founded  the  city  of  San  Domingo. 

The   two   ships   were    overloaded   with   two    hundred 
passengers  and  on  the  return  trip  got  out  of  food  and 
almost  starved,  the   men   even  threatening  to  eat   their 
Indian  captives.     Yet  Columbus  was  able  to  hinder  this 
and  the  starved  company  at  length  reached  Cadiz. 

Columbus  was  received  kindly  at  the  court,  and,  after 
much  delay  and  vexation  caused  by  his  enemies,  in  the 
spring  of  1498  he  had  six  ships  ready  for  his  third 
voyage.  Sailing  farther  south  on  this  cruise  so  as  to 
reach  the  supposed  Spice  Islands  and  gold  regions,  he  came 
into  the  region  of  cairns  just  north  of  the  equator. 
Irving  says :  "  The  wind  suddenly  fell  and  a  dead  sultry 
calm  commenced,  which  lasted  for  eight  days.  The  air 
was  like  a  furnace ;  the  tar  melted,  the  seams  of  the  ship 
yawned;  the  salt  meat  became  putrid;  the  wheat  was 


152  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND  SEA 

parched  as  if  with  fire ;  the  hoops  shrank  from  the 
wine  and  water  casks,  some  of  which  leaked  and 
others  burst,  while  the  heat  in  the  holds  of  the 
vessels  was  so  suffocating  that  no  one  could  remain 
below  a  sufficient  time  to  prevent  the  damage  that 
was  taking  place.  The  mariners  lost  all  strength  and 
spirit  and  sank  under  the  oppressive  heat.  It  seemed 
as  if  the  old  fable  of  the  torrid  zone  was  about  to 
be  realized  ;  and  that  they  were  approaching  a  fiery 
region,  where  it  would  be  impossible  to  exist."  (Quoted 
by  Fiske.) 

But,  while  there  was  no  breath  of  wind,  the  strong 
equatorial  current  carried  the  ships  steadily  toward  the 
northwest,  so  that  after  eight  days  they  arrived  again 
in  the  region  of  westward  trades,  and  with  ten  days  of 
good  sailing  came  in  sight  of  an  island  with  three 
mountain  peaks,  which  Columbus  called  Trinidad.  In 
passing  around  the  southern  side  of  this  island  the 
ships  were  caught  in  a  mighty  current  of  fresh  water 
which  swept  through  the  channel.  This  passage  he 
called  the  Serpent's  Mouth,  as  it  almost  swallowed  up 
his  ships,  and  led  him  to  guess  that  it  must  be  the 
mouth  of  some  great  river  draining  an  unheard-of  con 
tinent  to  the  south.  Sailing  westward  along  the  coast, 
he  made  a  collection  of  fine  pearls.  Here,  again,  ex 
hausted  with  his  anxieties  and  exertions,  he  became 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  153 

feverish,  his  eyes  failed,  and  he  was  forced  to  turn 
northward  to  San  Domingo. 

His  brother,  Bartholomew,  had  been  in  charge  of  the 
colony  during  his  .absence  and  had  found  no  end  of 
trouble  with  the  rebellious  Spaniards  and  with  the 
Indians  who  were  furious  against  the  white  man.  A 
Spanish  scoundrel  named  Roldan  had  raised  a  rebellion 
against  Bartholomew  and  had  joined  his  men  with  the 
Indians  in  the  western  part  of  the  island.  Columbus 
and  his  brother  managed  to  put  down  these  rebels, 
hanged  some  of  the  worst  leaders,  and  threw  others  into 
prison.  Reports  of  these  troubles  reached  Spain  from 
time  to  time,  and  the  powerful  enemies  of  Columbus  at 
the  court  filled  the  ears  of  the  Spanish  rulers  with 
complaints  and  false  charges  of  his  cruelty  and  wrong 
doing  against  the  Spaniards  and  Indians. 

At  length,  by  order  of  Ferdinand  and  Isabella,  a 
Spanish  knight,  Bobadilla,  was  sent  out  with  full  au 
thority  to  inquire  into  the  condition  of  the  colony, 
arrest  and  punish  wrong-doers,  and,  if  necessary,  to 
take  the  government  into  his  own  hands. 

When  Bobadilla  arrived  at  San  Domingo,  instead  of 
making  careful  inquiries  into  the  conduct  of  Columbus 
and  his  brother,  he  at  once  liberated  the  rebels  from 
prison,  joined  with  the  enemies  of  Columbus,  and  with 
out  notice  or  trial  threw  him  and  his  brothers  into 


154  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

prison  and  loaded  them  with  chains.  He  then  collected 
from  the  rebels  all  manner  of  complaints  against  Colum 
bus  and  forwarded  them,  with  him  as  a  prisoner,  to 
Spain.  The  sea-captain,  on  whose  vessel  Columbus  was 
put,  was  shocked  to  see  the  stately  form  of  the  old 
man  in  irons  and  offered  to  release  him,  but  Columbus 
replied  that  he  would  wear  the  fetters  till  removed  by 
the  order  of  his  sovereigns,  as  full  proof  of  the  foul 
treatment  he  had  received.  His  son,  Ferdinand,  wrote 
that  he  had  afterward  often  seen  these  fetters  hanging 
in  his  father's  room.  A  letter  written  on  shipboard  by 
Columbus  to  one  of  the  ladies  at  the  court,  and  de 
scribing  the  manner  in  which  he  had  been  treated, 
came  into  the  hands  of  the  queen  and  she  was  so 
much  shocked  that  she  sent  a  swift  messenger  to  Cadiz, 
ordering  that  he  and  his  brothers  be  released,  that 
Columbus  be  invited  at  once  to  the  court,  after  receiving 
a  purse  of  money  for  his  expenses. 

When  Columbus  arrived  at  the  palace  of  the  Alham- 
bra  in  Granada,  he  was  received  with  tears  by  the 
queen  and  was  so  much  overcome  that,  as  Fiske  says, 
"this  much-enduring  old  man,  whose  proud  and  mas 
terful  spirit  had  so  long  been  proof  against  all  wrongs 
and  insults,  broke  down.  He  threw  himself  at  the  feet 
of  the  sovereigns  in  an  agony  of  tears  and  sobs."  He 
was  promised  payment  for  all  his  losses.  But  it  was 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  155 

difficult  for  Isabella  to  fulfil  her  promises  to  him. 
The  Spaniards  hated  him  as  a  foreigner,  and  it  was 
extremely  difficult,  even  for  a  native  Spaniard,  to  rule 
successfully  his  cruel  and  plotting  countrymen.  Espe 
cially  was  this  true  upon  far-away  islands,  where  they 
had  but  little  fear  of  the  government  of  Spain,  and 
where  they  were  all  the  while,  by  mean  and  bloody 
deeds,  stirring  up  the  Indians  to  war.  Columbus  was, 
therefore,  fed  on  promises,  while  others  were  allowed  to 
rule  and  enrich  themselves  in  the  lands  which  he  had 
discovered. 

In  1502,  with  four  small  and  leaky  vessels,  he  was 
allowed  to  make  a  fourth  voyage  of  exploration,  hoping 
at  last  to  find  some  rich  empire  that  would  reward  him 
for  all  his  labors  and  pay  Spain  the  heavy  costs  of  his 
voyages  and  colonies.  He  finally  reached  the  shores  of 
Yucatan  and  sailed  southward  many  hundreds  of  miles 
along  the  coasts  of  Central  America,  finding,  indeed, 
races  of  men  who  dressed  in  cotton  and  built  large 
stone  or  adobe  houses.  The  natives  wore  also  gold 
ornaments  and  this  seemed  to  point  to  rich  gold-producing 
countries  to  the  west.  Passing  southward  in  hopes  of 
finding  a  passage  to  China,  which  he  thought  was  close 
at  hand,  he  began  to  suffer  great  hardships.  His  ships 
became  worm-eaten,  the  food  gave  out,  many  of  his 
men  were  killed  in  Indian  troubles,  and  he  was  com- 


156  PIONEERS   ON   LAND  AND  SEA 

pelled  to  sail  back  to  San  Domingo.  On  the  south 
coast  of  Cuba  his  leaky  vessels  were  met  by  a  storm 
and  were  driven  at  last  upon  the  coast  of  Jamaica, 
where  they  were  too  full  of  water  to  sail  farther. 
They  were  hauled  up  on  the  beach  and  two  men  were 
sent  in  a  canoe  across  to  San  Domingo  to  ask  help. 
But  the  governor,  Ovando,  made  no  effort  at  first  to 
rescue  them  and  Columbus  and  his  party  spent  a  mis 
erable  year  upon  this  wild  coast. 

A  mutiny  among  his  men  led  to  a  pitched  battle,  in 
which  Bartholomew  was  victor  and  killed  or  captured 
the  rebels.  Finally  Ovando  sent  two  vessels  to  bring 
back  the  suffering  company  of  Columbus  and  pretended 
to  treat  him  and  his  brothers  with  courtesy.  But  Co 
lumbus  was  glad  to  get  away  from  so  treacherous  a 
friend  and  sailed  for  Spain,  where  he  arrived  a  few 
days  before  the  death  of  Isabella.  After  her  death  he 
had  no  strong  friend  at  court  and  could  do  little  to 
secure  his  rights.  The  last  year  and  a  half  of  his  life 
was  spent  in  sickness  and  poverty,  and,  worn  out  with 
disappointment  and  sorrow,  he  died  May  20,  1506. 

But  Columbus  had  accomplished  more  than  even  he 
had  ever  dreamed.  He  did  not  know  that  he  had 
touched  upon  the  shores  of  two  vast  continents,  far 
more  important  to  Europe  than  India  and  China.  The 
rich  empires  of  Mexico  and  Peru  were  close  at  hand, 


CHRISTOPHER   COLUMBUS  157 

which  would  soon  put  vast  quantities  of  gold  into  the 
hands  of  the  conquering  Spaniards.  If  he  could  have 
opened  his  eyes  to  the  real  importance  of  his  dis 
coveries,  if  he  could  have  seen  the  great  map  of  North 
and  South  America,  as  we  know  it,  unrolled,  he  would 
have  been  filled  with  wonder. 

Columbus,  in  his  explorations  and  settlements  in  the 
West  Indies,  bad  two  very  difficult  classes  of  people  to 
deal  with,  —  the  Spaniards  and  the  Indians. 

In  exploring  the  islands,  the  Spaniards  had  to  support 
themselves  from  the  country  and  they  often  plundered 
and  maltreated  the  Indians.  The  Indians  in  turn  would 
plot  the  destruction  of  the  white  men,  and  bloody  war 
followed. 

In  order  to  establish  some  sort  of  peace  and  understand 
ing  between  the  Indians  and  the  whites,  Columbus  levied 
a  small  tribute,  or  tax,  upon  all  the  Indians,  which 
would  bring  a  sufficient  sum  to  meet  the  needs  of  the 
Spaniards.  Those  who  had  not  paid  this  tribute  were 
required  to  work  for  their  Spanish  masters.  This  soon 
led  to  a  form  of  slavery,  as  whole  villages  of  Indians 
were  required  to  till  the  soil  for  a  single  Spaniard  who 
ruled  the  district  as  if  it  were  his  plantation.  This  system 
grew  worse  and  worse  and  the  Spanish  masters  practised 
the  most  inhuman  cruelties  upon  their  Indian  subjects  or 
slaves.  Columbus  did  not  intend  to  establish  a  system 


158  PIONEERS   ON   LAND    AND   SEA 

of  slavery ;  but  soon  after  he  left  Hispaniola  the  system 
he  had  started  developed  into  the  most  cruel  form  of 
bondage.  Many  of  the  Indians  were  required  to  labor  in 
the  mines  of  San  Domingo  and  were  worked  so  hard  and 
treated  so  cruelly  tha.t  they  died  in  great  numbers. 

The  Indians  of  the  Caribbees  were  warlike  cannibals, 
who  tortured  and  roasted  the  victims  whom  they  cap 
tured  along  the  coast  of  Hispaniola.  Columbus,  in  order 
to  stop  their  raids,  and  at  the  same  time  to  win  the 
favor  of  the  Indians  in  San  Domingo,  sent  expeditions 
against  the  Caribbee  Indians,  captured  many  of  them  and 
sent  them  to  Europe  as  slaves,  hoping  thus  to  make 
Christians  out  of  them,  who  might  then  come  back  to 
civilize  their  people. 

Columbus  was  especially  unfortunate  in  dealing  with 
the  Spaniards  who  accompanied  him  on  his  voyages. 
They  were  treacherous  and  mutinous  and  were  con 
stantly  arousing  the  bitter  hatred  of  the  Indians  by  their 
cruelty  and  selfish  love  of  gold.  He  was  hated  by  the 
Spaniards  as  a  foreigner  and  they  placed  so  many 
difficulties  in  his  way  that  he  was  soon  deprived  of  his 
government  and  his  rights  were  never  restored,  though 
his  son,  Diego,  did  become  governor  of  Hispaniola  a  few 
years  after  his  father's  death. 

Columbus's  original  purpose  was  to  find  a  way  to  the 
Indies  by  the  route  westward.  While  the  Spaniards 


CHRISTOPHER    COLUMBUS  159 

under  the  leadership  of  Columbus  were  exploring  among 
the  islands,  the  Portuguese  had  passed  round  the  Cape  of. 
Good  Hope  and  even  pushed  across  the  Indian  Ocean  to 
India.  In  1497  Vasco  da  Gama  sailed  around  southern 
Africa,  crossed  the  Indian  Ocean  to  India,  and  brought 
home  a  rich  cargo  of  spices,  silks,  ivory,  robes,  and  pre 
cious  stones.  He  had  seen  great  cities  and  opened  up  for 
Portugal  the  splendid  commerce  of  the  East.  Columbus 
had  not  discovered  any  cities  or  powerful  kingdoms  and 
his  voyages  and  discoveries  had  'been  very  expensive, 
without  bringing  in  much  return.  It  seemed  as  if  the 
Portuguese  under  Da  Gama  and  others  had  really  won  the 
rich  prize,  while  Columbus  had  found  only  a  few  islands 
inhabited  by  savages.  By  a  decree  of  the  Pope  at  Rome, 
all  the  newly  discovered  lands  along  the  coast  of  Africa 
and  eastward  to  India  were  to  belong  to  Portugal,  while 
those  discovered  to  the  west,  by  Columbus  and  others, 
were  to  be  the  possession  of  Spain.  This  line  of  division 
was  drawn  at  first  on  a  meridian  three  hundred  leagues 
west  of  the  Cape  Verde  and  Canary  Islands. 

Columbus  fondly  hoped  that,  by  pushing  a  little  farther 
west  among  the  islands,  he  would  come  to  those  rich 
countries  of  India  (the  Spice  Islands,  Japan,  and  China) 
which  the  Portuguese  had  already  reached  by  sailing 
round  Africa  and  across  the  Indian  Ocean.  He  never 
even  dreamed  that  the  Spaniards,  soon  after  his  death, 


160  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

would  discover  and  conquer  rich  kingdoms  in  Mexico  and 
Peru,  more  than  ten  thousand  miles  from  the  Indies ;  so 
ignorant  was  he  of  the  real  geography  of  the  world  and 
of  that  vast  ocean  which  lay  westward  from  his  newly 
discovered  islands,  and  from  the  continents  which  he  had 
touched  without  knowing  what  they  were. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

FERDINAND  MAGELLAN 

FERDINAND  MAGELLAN  was  born  about  1480,  in  a 
rugged  mountain  district  in  Portugal.  He  belonged  to 
a  noble  family  and  as  a 
youth  was  early  sent  to  the 
court  of  Portugal,  where 
he  was  brought  up  in  the 
royal  household.  As  a  boy 
he  must  have  seen  the 
ships  coming  into  Lisbon 
from  exploring  voyages. 
When  about  twenty-five 
years  old  he  sailed  with 
Almeida,  the  Portuguese 
governor  of  India,  around 
the  coasts  of  Africa  and 
spent  the  next  seven  years 
in  service  as  a  soldier  and  sailor  in  conquering  the  East 
Indies  for  Portugal.  This  was  hard  service,  as  he  was 
engaged  in  many  fierce  fights  with  the  Arabs  and  native 
tribes  along  the  coasts  of  Asia  and  the  East  Indies. 

M  161 


MAGELLAN 


162  PIONEERS   ON   LAND    AND    SEA 

In  1509  he  was  with  the  first  European  ships  which 
sailed  along  the  coast  of  Malacca  under  the  command  of 
Sequeira.  While  the  Portuguese  were  loading  the  four 
vessels  with  ginger  and  pepper,  the  native  Malays  were 
allowed  to  throng  upon  the  ships.  The  Portuguese  had 
taken  all  the  boats  but  one  ashore  to  bring  the  cargo  and 
many  of  the  white  men  were  scattered  along  the  beach 
loading  the  boats.  The  shrewd  Malay  king  planned  to 
attack  the  Portuguese  suddenly  and  murder  them  all. 
The  signal  was  to  be  a  puff  of  smoke  from  a  tall  square 
tower  in  the  town  which  lay  on  the  hillside.  Sequeira, 
all  unconscious  of  danger,  was  playing  a  game  of  chess 
on  the  deck  of  his  flag-ship.  While  the  Malays  were 
standing  about,  apparently  friendly,  awaiting  the  signal, 
Magellan  heard  a  rumor  of  the  plot  from  a  friendly 
native  woman  and  taking  the  only  remaining  boat  and 
riding  to  the  flag-ship,  shouted  "  treason  "  just  in  time  to 
save  Sequeira.  The  men  on  board  the  ships  began  to 
drive  off  the  natives.  At  the  signal  from  the  tower,  the 
Malays  attacked  and  massacred  most  of  the  Portuguese  at 
work  along  the  shore,  but  Serrano,  the  captain,  and  a  few 
of  his  men  jumped  into  their  boats  and  pushed  off.  They 
were  swiftly  surrounded  by  a  great  number  of  Malay 
boats  and  overwhelmed  by  numbers.  Just  at  this  moment 
Magellan  rowed  up  with  his  men  and  attacked  the  Malay 
boats  with  such  fury  that  they  were  driven  off  and 


FERDINAND   MAGELLAN  163 

Serrano  and  his  men  were  saved.  The  Malays  then 
swarmed  about  the  ships  in  their  boats  but  the  European 
guns  soon  did  such  havoc  among  them  that  they 
withdrew. 

From  this  time  Serrano  and  Magellan  became  the 
closest  friends.  Serrano  pushed  still  farther  eastward 
and  became  settled  in  the  Molucca  or  Spice  Islands. 
Magellan  returned  to  Lisbon  in  1514  and  letters  from 
his  friend  Serrano  awakened  in  him  the  desire  to  sail 
to  those  islands  himself.  He  had  become  very  much 
interested  in  the  study  of  geography  and  navigation, 
and,  by  long  experience  and  study,  was  an  expert  sea 
man  and  pilot.  In  the  meantime,  Amerigo  Vespucius 
and  his  associates  had  sailed  along  the  coast  of  South 
America  to  20°  below  the  equator,  and  it  was  believed 
that  there  was  a  passage  farther  south  to  the  seas  be 
yond  and  thus  to  the  Indies.  Magellan  formed  the 
daring  plan  of  sailing  through  this  strait  and  beyond 
and  then  of  continuing  his  course  around  the  world.  In 
this  way  he  would  go  to  meet  his  friend,  Serrano,  in 
the  Moluccas,  from  the  East.  But  Magellan  had  no 
notion  of  the  vast  breadth  of  the  ocean  west  of  South 
America.  In  fact,  he  knew  very  little  about  South 
America  itself.  About  this  time  he  spent  a  year 
with  the  Portuguese,  fighting  against  the  Moors  in 
Morocco,  and  received  a  wound  in  the  knee  which  lamed 


164  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

him  for  life.  He  was  not  in  great  favor  with  King 
Emanuel  of  Portugal  and  when  he  presented  his  plan 
before  the  king,  it  was  not  well,  received. 

Magellan  therefore  decided  to  offer  his  services  to 
the  king  of  Spain  in  order  to  carry  out  his  great  idea 
of  circumnavigating  the  earth.  In  1517  he  settled  at 
Seville,  in  Spain,  and  soon  married  the  daughter  of  his 
friend  and  host,  Barbosa,  a  Portuguese  in  Spanish  ser 
vice.  At  the  Spanish  court  Magellan  was  well  received 
by  Charles  V,  the  young  king,  the  grandson  of  Ferdi 
nand  and  Isabella.  It  was  agreed  that  a  fleet  of  ships 
should  be  fitted  out  for  this  undertaking,  but  so  slow 
was  +he  work  that  it  was  more  than  a  year  before  all 
the  necessarj  preparations  had  been  made. 

The  king  of  Portugal,  on  hearing  that  Magellan  was 
fitting  out  such  an  expedition,  put  many  obstacles  in 
his  way.  Ruffians  were  hired  to  waylay  him  in  the 
streets,  orders  were  sent  to  the  East  Indies  commanding 
the  Portuguese  officer  in  charge  to  arrest  Magellan  should 
he  come  into  those  regions,  and,  worse  still,  the  crews 
which  were  to  sail  with  Magellan  were  corrupted  and 
three  out  of  four  of  his  captains  afterward  proved 
traitors.  The  Spaniards  at  court  were  naturally  jealous 
of  a  foreigner  who  was  sent  upon  so  important  an  expedi 
tion,  and  even  the  common  people  were  stirred  up  against 
him.  But  Magellan  had  the  firm  support  of  King  Charles, 


FERDINAND  MAGELLAN  165 

and  continued  his  preparations.  He  was  to  have  impor 
tant  rights  and  privileges  in  the  newly  discovered  lands, 
besides  the  honor,  if  successful,  of  being  the  first  to  sail 
round  the  world. 

The  five  ships,  Trinidad,  San  Antonio,  Conception, 
Victoria,  and  Santiago,  were  ready  in  September,  1519, 
and  were  manned  by  280  sailors  and  adventurers,  37  of 
whom  were  Portuguese  who  had  followed  Magellan. 
The  son  of  his  old  friend,  Serrano,  was  captain  of  the 
Santiago,  and  the  only  one  of  the  four  captains  faithful 
to  Magellan.  On  the  20th  of  September  the  little 
fleet  escaped  from  the  mouth  of  the  river  and  set  sail. 
The  boats  were  old  and  somewhat  weather-beaten,  the 
largest  120  tons  burden,  the  smallest  75  tons;  not  a 
very  promising  outfit  for  so  long  a  voyage  in  un 
known  seas.  A  few  days  later  a  small  vessel  overtook 
the  flag-ship,  with  an  anxious  message  from  Magellan's 
father-in-law,  Barbosa,  that  the  captains  had  sworn  to 
their  friends  to  kill  Magellan  if  they  got  into  trouble 
with  him.  Magellan  sent  back  the  reply  to  his  friends  to 
be  of  good  cheer,  as  he  would  carry  out  his  plan  in 
spite  of  the  traitors.  Pigafetta,  a  passenger  on  board 
the  fleet,  kept  a  journal  of  this  famous  voyage,  from 
which  our  knowledge  is  obtained. 

After  stopping  at  the  Canaries  for  water  and  wood, 
the  squadron  sailed  to  the  southwest  and  was  be- 


166  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

calmed  for  three  weeks.  On  account  of  bad  weather 
and  scarcity  of  food  and  water,  mutiny  began  to  show 
itself.  Carthagena,  the  captain  of  the  San  Antonio,  the 
largest  ship,  came  on  board  the  flag-ship  and  openly 
accused  Magellan.  Magellan  seized  him  with  his  own 
hands  and  put  him  in  irons,  thus  checking  the  mutiny 
for  the  time.  But  the  captains  waited  only  for  a  better 
opportunity. 

The  five  ships  arrived  at  Rio  Janeiro  Bay,  Decem 
ber  13,  after  a  trip  of  nearly  three  months.  Boats  were 
quickly  lowered  and  the  men  were  soon  on  land.  The 
natives  treated  the  Spaniards  very  kindly,  building  a  long 
hut  for  them  to  live  in  and  bringing  them  some  pigs. 
These  the  Spaniards  roasted  and  greatly  enjoyed  after 
months  of  diet  on  salt  meat  and  hardtack.  They  also 
tasted  the  pineapple  for  the  first  time  and  found  the 
sweet  potato,  which  was  described  as  having  the  form 
of  the  turnip  and  a  taste  resembling  the  chestnut.  The 
natives  had  no  metal  tools.  Their  large  canoes,  capable 
of  holding  thirty  or  forty  men,  were  dug  out  of  the  trunks 
of  trees  with  knives  of  stone. 

Magellan  was  in  search  of  a  passage  to  the  western 
sea  and  coming  to  the  mouth  of  the  La  Plata  in  Janu 
ary,  he  spent  three  weeks  examining  the  broad  bay  and 
river.  Finding  only  a  river's  mouth,  he  sailed  south 
along  the  coast  of  Patagonia.  He  and  his  companions 


FERDINAND   MAGELLAN  lf>7 

were  here  overtaken  by  violent  storms  during  February 
and  March  and  barely  saved  their  ships  from  wreck. 
The  southern  winter  was  setting  in.  "  The  cold  be 
came  so  intense  that,  finding  a  sheltered  harbor,  with 
plenty  of  fish,  at  Port  St.  Julian,  they  chose  it  for  win 
ter  quarters,  and  anchored  there  the  last  day  of  March."  { 
Magellan  proposed  now  to  spend  five  months  of  an 
antarctic  winter  in  this  bay,  and,  when  spring  opened 
again,  to  proceed  southward  till  a  strait  was  reached  or 
the  end  of  this  unexplored  continent. 
.  It  seemed  that  dangers  and  hardships  had  no  power 
to  weaken  the  determination  of  this  man,  yet  he  also 
showed  himself  kindly  disposed,  promised  his  men  great 
rewards,  and  appealed  to  their  pride  as  Spaniards  not 
to  give  up  the  expedition.  But  the  mutinous  captains 
thought  they  had  suffered  enough  of  storm  and  hardship. 
Food  was  scarce  and  the  ships  were  well  battered.  Per 
haps  Magellan  was  only  trying  to  lead  a  Spanish  squadron 
to  destruction.  To  spend  five  months  of  an  icy  winter 
idly  upon  their  ships  was  too  much. 

The  traitors,  Mendoza  and  Quesada,  had  already  per 
suaded  the  crews  of  their  ships  to  join  in  the  mutiny.  On 
Sunday  night  of  Easter  day,  Quesada,  with  Carthagena  and 
thirty  men,  boarded  the  third  ship,  San  Antonio,  seized 
the  captain,  a  cousin  of  Magellan,  and  put  him  in  irons. 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


168  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

They  took  possession  of  the  ship,  disarmed  the  loyal  men, 
and  persuaded  the  others  to  join  the  mutineers,  giving  out 
extra  portions  of  bread  and  wine.  The  rebels  were  now 
in  full  command  of  three  of  the  large  ships  and  felt  safe 
in  defying  Magellan.  On  Monday  morning  he  knew 
nothing  of  what  had  happened  till  he  despatched  a  boat 
to  one  of  the  ships,  which  was  sent  back  to  him  with 
the  insolent  reply  that  he  no  longer  commanded  that  ship. 
By  sending  the  boat  round  to  all  the  fleet,  Magellan  found 
that  only  the  smallest  ship,  the  Santiago,  with  Serrano, 
was  faithful.  Quesada  requested  a  conference  with  Ma 
gellan,  who  consented  by  asking  the  rebellious  captains 
on  board  the  flag-ship.  This  invitation  they  refused. 

Fiske  says  of  Magellan  at  this  juncture:  "Little  did 
they  realize  with  what  a  man  they  were  dealing.  Magel 
lan  knew  how  to  make  them  come  to  him.  He  had  reason 
to  believe  that  the  crew  of  the  Victoria  was  less  disloyal 
than  the  others,  and  selected  that  ship  for  his  first  coup  de 
main.  While  he  kept  a  boat  in  readiness  with  a  score  of 
trusty  men,  armed  to  the  teeth,  and  led  by  his  wife's 
brother,  Barbosa,  he  sent  another  boat  ahead  to  the  Victo 
ria  with  his  alguazil  or  constable,  Espinoza,  and  five  other 
men.  Luis  de  Mendoza,  captain  of  the  Victoria,  suffered 
this  small  party  to  come  on  board.  Espinoza  then  served 
on  Mendoza  a  formal  summons  to  come  to  the  flag-ship,  and 
upon  his  refusal,  quick  as  lightning  sprang  upon  him  and 


FERDINAND   MAGELLAN  169 

plunged  a  dagger  into  his  throat.  As  the  corpse  of  the 
rebellious  captain  dropped  upon  the  deck,  Barbosa's  party 
rushed  over  the  ship's  side  with  drawn  cutlasses,  the 
dazed  crew  at  once  surrendered,  and  Barbosa  took  com 
mand." 

Magellan  now  had  command  of  three  ships  and  in  the 
evening  his  men  boarded  the  San  Antonio  on  two  sides 
and  captured  her,  and  soon  after  the  other  ship  surren 
dered.  Thus  in  less  than  a  day  Magellan  brought  this 
dangerous  mutiny  to  a  close  and  established  his  authority 
more  firmly  than  before.  Quesada  was  beheaded  and 
Carthagena  and  a  guilty  priest  were  set  on  shore  the  fol 
lowing  spring  to  shift  for  themselves. 

The  smallest  ship,  while  out  exploring,  was  wrecked 
during  the  winter  and  after  extreme  hardships  the  crew 
was  rescued.  While  at  Port  St.  Julian,  the  voyagers  saw 
much  of  the  native  Patagonians,  who  were  almost  giants  in 
stature.  They  were  friendly  till  some  of  their  men  were 
invited  on  board  the  fleet  and  kept  as  prisoners.  During 
the  winter  the  ships  had  been  repaired  and  all  preparation 
made  for  the  voyage  southward  with  the  earliest  spring. 

On  the  24th  of  August  the  explorers  set  sail  again  but 
the  weather  was  very  stormy  and  they  were  nearly  two 
months  sailing  along  a  rocky  coast. 

As  the  squadron  moved  southward  it  was  overtaken  by 
a  fierce  storm,  which  for  several  days  threatened  either  to 


170  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

overwhelm  the  ships  or  to  dash  them  against  the  rocky 
shore.  One  of  the  vessels  sprang  a  leak  and  another 
barely  escaped  the  rocks.  At  last  they  rode  safely  at 
anchor  in  a  small  bay  where  the  sailors  demanded  the 
return  of  the  expedition  to  Spain.  They  had  suffered 
danger  enough,  they  said.  But  Magellan  stoutly  refused, 
and,  after  refitting  'the  ships  and  repairing  the  damage  of 
the  storm,  he  again  set  sail  southward,  seeking  a  passage 
to  the  western  ocean. 

On  the  morning  of  October  21,  1520,  Magellan  was 
celebrating  the  day  sacred  to  the  eleven  thousand  virgins, 
when,  as  the  ceremony  ended,  one  of  the  sailors  espied  a 
cape  or  headland,  beyond  which  nothing  could  be  seen, 
and,  as  they  rounded  the  point,  "  Magellan's  heart  leaped 
within  him  to  perceive  that  there  was  a  broad  inlet  run 
ning  in  a  southwesterly  direction,  and  that  while  the  land 
was  plainly  visible  on  its  southern  side,  its  limit  inland 
could  not  be  seen.  Naming  the  point  the  Cape  of  the 
Virgins,  he  gave  orders  that  the  fleet  should  boldly  enter 
the  inlet  and  endeavor  to  find  out  whither  it  led."  l 

The  shores  were  rugged  and  steep,  with  occasional  for 
ests.  The  main  channel  was  divided  into  many  inlets  and 
bays  and  in  places  was  almost  closed  up  by  rocky  islands. 
The  jutting  reefs  and  breakers  were  to  be  avoided  and 
it  was  necessary  to  survey  the  channel  closely  as  they 

i  Towle's  «  Life  of  Magellan." 


172  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

advanced.  Pigafetta,  as  quoted  by  Fiske,  says:  "The 
straight  now  cauled  the  straight  of  Magellanus,  beinge  in 
sum  place.  C.  x.  leaques  in  length :  and  in  breadth  sum- 
where  very  large  and  in  other  places  lyttle  more  than 
halfe  a  leaque  in  bredth.  On  both  the  sydes  of  this 
strayght  are  great  and  hygh  mountaynes  couered  with 
snowe,  beyonde  the  whiche  is  the  enteraunce  into  the  sea 
of  Sur.  .  .  .  Here  one  of  the  shyppes  stole  away  priuile 
and  returned  into  Spayne." 

More  than  five  weeks  were  spent  in  working  their  way 
through  these  winding  channels.  At  length,  in  a  shel 
tered  bay,  the  fleet  cast  anchor.  Two  ships  were  sent 
ahead  to  explore  the  channel  while  the  others  waited. 
While  attempting  to  return,  the  two  vessels  were  over 
taken  by  a  furious  storm  and  driven  forward,  and,  after 
passing  through  several  straits  and  bays,  they  reached  a 
channel  from  which  they  could  see  the  boundless  ocean 
beyond. 

At  last  Magellan  "was  relieved  by  seeing  them  speeding 
rapidly  toward  the  bay,  with  flags  and  streamers  flying 
gayly  at  their  mastheads.  They  were  soon  alongside 
the  flag-ship,  and  Mesquito,  hastening  on  board,  eagerly 
advanced  to  Magellan  and  fell  at  his  feet.  <  Praise  be  to 
God,  Admiral/  cried  he,  when  he  could  recover  his  breath 
so  as  to  speak, '  we  have  found  the  outlet.'  Magellan,  with 
flushed  face,  his  whole  body  trembling  with  excitement, 


FERDINAND   MAGELLAN  173 

raised  the  faithful  captain  from  the  deck,  and  clasping  him 
about  the  neck,  burst  into  tears  of  joy.  '  Is  it  indeed 
true  ? '  he  said,  with  faltering  voice.  '  And  have  you  seen 
the  other  ocean,  the  western  ocean  beyond  ?  '  '  We  have 
indeed  seen  it  with  these  very  eyes,'  replied  Mesquito. 
'  We  came  near  perishing  in  the  storm,  but  we  kept  on 
and  have  succeeded/  Having  embraced  the  other  officers, 
Magellan  said,  'My  Comrades,  we  have  at  last  triumphed. 
Our  perils  have  been  great,  our  trials  and  hardships  sore 
and  many.  But  the  reward  of  all  has  come.  The  passage 
that  leads  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  further  Ocean,  and 
opens  the"  nearest  way  from  Spain  to  the  rich  Molucca 
islands  is  found.  It  is  just  before  us.  We  shall  pass 
through  it  into  the  ocean  beyond,  if  God  still  pro 
tect  us.  We  shall  make  other  discoveries,  find  wealth 
and  fame  for  ourselves  and  new  lands  for  our  king. 
Let  the  captains  return  to  their  ships,  and  assemble 
their  crews  to  tell  the  good  tidings ;  let  your  cannon 
speak  to  awake  echoes  among  the  crags ;  float  the 
royal  flag  from  your  mastheads,  array  the  decks  with 
streamers  and  ribbons,  let  meat  and  drink  be  set  forth 
in  plenty,  and  render  thanks  to  God  for  leading  us  to  this 
great  discovery.' " l 

The  four  ships  were  anchored  alongside   and  the  day 
was  given  up  to   feasting  and    celebiation.     When   the 

1  Towle's  "  Life  of  Magellan/' 


174  PIONEERS    ON    LAND   AND    SEA 

feast  was  done,  altars  were  erected  on  the  deck  and  the 
priests  chanted  the  song  of  triumph. 

The  fleet  now  set  sail  and  advanced  through  the  chan 
nel  in  a  series  of  bays  and  narrow  straits.  Following 
the  course  of  the  first  two  ships  they  came  at  last  to  a 
narrow  strait  and  a  cape  that  jutted  into  it,  from  which 
they  could  dimly  see  the  distant  ocean.  This  place 
Magellan  named  Cape  Forward. 

But  at  this  point  the  channel  divides  into  two  parts, 
both  extending  far  away,  and  he  was  at  a  loss  to  know 
which  to  follow.  Before  sending  forward  the  ships  to 
explore  these  channels,  he  called  together  his  principal 
men  and  asked  their  opinions  about  his  future  course. 
Should  they  return  now  to  Spain  and  make  known  this 
discovery  or  proceed  on  the  long  voyage  across  the  new 
ocean  to  the  Moluccas  ?  In  spite  of  hardship,  riches  and 
honor  could  be  had  by  sailing  on  to  the  Moluccas.  Some 
were  eager  to  go  on  but  the  chief  pilot,  Gomez,  objected 
and  urged  Magellan  to  return  to  Spain  for  provisions  and 
better  ships.  Magellan  at  once  replied,  "  We  will  go  on 
even  if  we  have  to  eat  the  leather  from  the  ship's  yards." 

The  Conception  and  the  San  Antonio  were  now  sent 
out  to  explore  the  two  channels.  After  waiting  impa 
tiently  for  several  days,  Magellan  set  out  along  the 
southern  channel.  Advancing,  they  came  to  a  wide  cur 
rent  in  which  many  small  fishes  were  found.  Magellan 


FERDINAND    MAGELLAN  175 

named  it  the  Kiver  of  Sardines.  Suddenly  the  Concep 
tion  appeared,  to  the  great  delight  of  Magellan,  but  the 
other  ship,  the  San  Antonio,  was  not  seen  again  by  him. 
The  pilot,  Gomez,  had  persuaded  the  crew  to  seize  the 
captain,  Mesquito,  and  then  they  deserted  Magellan  and 
started  back  through  the  strait  and  across  the  Atlantic 
to  Spain,  and  after  six  months  reported  that  Magellan 
and  all  the  other  ships  were  lost. 

Magellan  sent  out  men  in  two  long  boats  to  explore  the 
River  of  Sardines  to  its  mouth.  After  three  days  they 
returned  and  said  that  it  flowed  into  the  ocean,  the 
shores  of  which  they  had  reached.  The  three  ships  pro 
ceeded  to  the  outlet  of  the  river  and  anchored  in  a  good 
harbor  near  a  hilly  cape  at  the  entrance  to  the  ocean, 
which  Magellan  called  Cape  Desire,  because  he  had  long 
desired  to  see  it.  As  he  looked  upon  the  rocky  cliffs 
reaching  northward,  and  the  boundless  ocean  to  the  west, 
his  heart  was  filled  with  thanks  for  the  great  discovery. 

At  this  place  they  spent  several  days,  exploring  the 
neighboring  hills,  mountains,  and  forests.  The  crews 
went  on  shore  and  refreshed  themselves  among  the 
forests  and  in  visits  with  the  native  Indians  of  large 
size  whom  they  found  here.  The  Indians  brought  pro 
visions  to  the  ships  and  were  greatly  delighted  with  the 
beads,  buttons,  and  little  bells  with  which  Magellan 
rewarded  them.  The  ships  were  now  repaired,  the  crews 


176  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

rested,  and  a  fresh  supply  of  water,  wood,  and  provisions 
was  taken  on  board.  They  were  making  ready  for  the 
unknown  voyage  northward  to  the  equator  and  westward 
to  India.  They  were  trying  to  reach  the  Moluccas  by 
a  route  over  which  no  traveller  had  ever  gone  before. 

As  the  ships  ploughed  the  waters  westward  the  sailors 
were  surprised  at  the  calm  of  the  ocean.  The  weather 
was  warm  and  sunny  and  the  sea  steadily  quiet.  Magel 
lan  studied  his  charts  and  attempted  to  reckon  the  dis 
tance  to  the  Indies.  What  if  he  should  reach  India  and 
sail  homeward  by  way  of  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope !  No 
navigator  had  ever  dared^  such  a  thing !  After  they  had 
sailed  many  days  through  a  quiet  sea,  Magellan  called 
his  captains  together  and  said  that  the  great  ocean 
through  which  they  were  now  the  first  to  sail  should  be 
called  the  Pacific,  because  of  its  peaceful  waters.  The 
first  part  of  this  long  journey  was  like  a  pleasure  trip, 
but  in  passing  over  so  vast  an  untravelled  waste  it  was 
hard  to  tell  what  troubles  might  lie  before  them.  As  the 
voyagers  approached  nearer  the  equator  they  turned  more 
to  the  west.  The  region  of  calms  was  at  length  reached 
and  for  days  together  the  ships  lay  idly  floating  on  the 
water.  The  winds  sprang  up  again  and  they  sped 
westward.  But  the  calms  returned,  till  the  crews  grew 
impatient.  Their  supply  of  food  and  water  was  running 
short.  Passing  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn,  they  came  upon 


FERDINAND   MAGELLAN  177 

very  hot  weather.  The  rosin  oozed  from  the  pine  boards 
on  deck.  An  island  hove  in  sight  but  it  was  barren 
and  lifeless.  Another  appeared  but  brought  no  relief. 
The  fleet  had  already  sailed  nearly  twice  as  far  as  Co 
lumbus  in  his  first  voyage  across  the  Atlantic  from  the 
Canaries  to  Guanahani,  and  there  were  still  five  thousand 
miles  of  ocean  before  the  men  would  again  see  land.  Their 
sufferings  may  be  best  understood  from  the  old  English 
narrative  of  Eden,  quoted  by  Fiske  :  — 

"  And  hauynge  in  this  tyme  consumed  all  theyr  bysket 
and  other  vyttayles,  they  fell  into  such  necessitie  that 
they  were  inforced  to  eate  the  pouder  that  remayned 
thereof  beinge  now  full  of  woormes.  .  .  .  Theyre  freshe 
water  was  also  putrifyed  and  become  yelow.  They  dyd 
eate  skynnes  and  pieces  of  lether  which  were  foulded 
abowt  certeyne  great  ropes  of  the  shyps.  (Thus  did  the 
captain-general's  words  come  true.)  But  these  skynnes 
being  made  verye  harde  by  reason  of  the  soonne,  rayne, 
and  wynde,  they  hunge  them  by  a  corde  in  the  sea  for 
the  space  of  foure  or  fiue  dayse  to  mollifie  them,  and 
sodde  them,  and  eate  them.  By  reason  of  this  famen 
and  vnclene  feedynge,  sumrne  of  theyr  gummes  grewe 
so  ouer  theyr  teethe  (a  symptom  of  scurvy),  that  they 
dyed  miserably  for  hunger.  And  by  this  occasion  dyed, 
xix.  men,  and  .  .  .  besyde  these  that  dyed,  xxv.  or.  xxx. 
were  so  sicke  that  they  were  not  able  to  doo  any  seruice 


178  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

with  theyr  handes  or  arms  for  feeblenesse :  So  that  was 
in  maner  none  without  sum  disease.  In  three  monethes 
and.  XK-  dayes,  they  say  led  foure  thousande  leaques  in 
one  goulfe  by  the  sayde  sea  cauled  Pacificum  (that  is) 
peaceable,  whiche  may  well  bee  so  cauled  forasmuch  as 
in  all  this  tyme  hauying  no  syght  of  any  lande,  they  had 
no  misfortune  of  wynde  or  any  other  tempest.  ...  So 
that  in  fine,  if  god  of  his  mercy  had  not  gyuen  them 
good  wether,  it  was  necessary  that  in  this  soo  greate  a 
sea  they  shuld  all  haue  dyed  for  hunger.  Whiche  neuer- 
theless  they  escaped  soo  hardely,  that  it  may  bee  doubted 
whether  euer  the  like  viage  may  be  attempted  with  so 
goode  successe." 

At  last  the  end  of  this  terrible  suffering  was  reached. 
Islands,  green  and  wooded,  appeared  in  the  edge  of 
the  sky.  As  the  ships  approached,  boat  loads  of  natives 
came  out  to  meet  them,  bringing  clusters  of  bananas, 
cocoanuts,  and  other  fruits.  These  the  sailors  were  soon 
eagerly  devouring.  Later,  on  account  of  the  disposi 
tion  of  the  people  to  steal  everything  they  could  lay 
their  hands  upon,  Magellan  called  these  the  Ladrones, 
or  islands  of  robbers. 

Ten  days  later,  on  the  16th  of  March,  the  voyagers  came 
to  the  islands  that  are  now  called  the  Philippines.  They 
first  landed  on  an  uninhabited  Island,  where  there  was 
good  water.  Two  large  tents  were  put  up  and  the  sick 


FERDINAND   MAGELLAN  179 

men  carefully  tended.  The  friendly  natives  from  the 
neighboring  islands  came  in  long  boats  bringing  fish 
and  oranges.  These  they  laid  at  the  feet  of  Magellan. 
He  brought  out  from  the  tents  and  distributed  among 
them  little  bells,  red  caps,  looking-glasses,  and  brass 
and  silver  ornaments.  These  things  delighted  the 
natives  and  they  brought  figs  and  cocoanuts  and  other 
food  with  which  he  stocked  his  vessels.  At  last  the 
chief  of  the  island,  with  his  leading  men,  visited  Ma 
gellan.  He  was  a  pleasant-mannered  old  man  and 
brought  two  loads  of  oranges  and  palm  wine,  and  also 
some  chickens.  Magellan  spent  a  week  with  these 
people  and  through  them  learned  much  about  the  sur 
rounding  islands.  The  crews  of  the  vessels  were  also 
greatly  refreshed  with  good  food  and  life  upon  land. 

Later  he  visited  the  island  of  Sebu  and  was  received 
in  friendly  spirit  by  the  Malay  chief,  who  not  only  con 
cluded  a  treaty  of  peace  with  the  Spaniards,  promising 
to  trade  only  with  them,  but  accepted  Christianity.  A 
great  bonfire  was  made  of  their  idols  and  the  tribe  be 
came  Christians;  a  cross  was  set  up  and  the  people  of 
the  island  were  baptized. 

Magellan  learned  by  conversing  with  these  tribes 
that  they  were  visited  by  Asiatic  traders  and  that  the 
Molucca  Islands  lay  to  the  south.  He  knew  also  by 
his  own  reckoning  that  he  had  already  passed  the  longi- 


180  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

tude  of  the  Moluccas.  In  short,  he  had  at  last  com 
pleted  the  journey  over  the  unknown  parts  of  the  ocean 
and  could  now  sail  through  the  East  Indies  and  the 
Indian  Ocean  back  to  Spain. 

Just  as  he  was  prepared  to  leave  Sebu  and  continue 
his  voyage  south  and  west,  he  learned  that  the  chief 
with  whom  he  had  concluded  a  treaty  of  friendship  and 
commerce  and  who  had  become  a  Christian,  needed  his 
aid  in  subduing  the  king  of  a  neighboring  island.  Ma 
gellan  was  nob  a  man  to  desert  his  new  friend  and 
besides  he  thought  it  a  part  of  his  work  to  subdue  this 
heathen  king  and  make  him  accept  Christianity.  With 
three  boats  and  sixty  men  Magellan  crossed  over  to 
the  neighboring  island.  Wading  ashore  with  forty-nine 
men,  he  attacked  the  savages,  who  swarmed  about  the 
Spaniards  in  great  numbers.  After  a  furious  battle  the 
Spaniards  were  compelled  to  retreat  to  their  boats. 
Magellan  was  among  the  last  to  retreat,  shielding  and 
protecting  his  men.  His  helmet  was  knocked  off  and 
his  right  arm  disabled  by  a  spear.  u  The  Indians  threw 
themselves  upon  him  with  iron-pointed  bamboo  spears 
and  scimitars  and  every  weapon  they  had,  and  ran  him 
through,  —  our  mirror,  our  light,  our  comforter,  —  until 
they  killed  him."  (Pigafetta,  quoted  by  Fiske.)  A 
tew  of  his  men  fell  bravely  fighting  by  his  side ;  the  rest 
reached  the  boats  and  returned  to  the  ships. 


FERDINAND   MAGELLAN  181 

The  king  of  Sebu,  finding  that  Magellan  and  his 
men  were  not  so  powerful  as  he  had  supposed,  decided 
that  he  had  made  a  mistake  in  accepting  the  God  of  the 
Christians.  He  therefore  invited  thirty  of  the  leading 
Spaniards,  including  the  brave  captains,  Barbosa  and 
Serrano,  to  a  feast,  and  then  massacred  all  of  them. 
The  cross  was  chopped  down  and  the  heathen  religion 
restored. 

The  crews  of  the  ships  were  now  in  a  desperate 
situation.  They  left  the  islands  in  haste.  Stopping 
at  a  favorable  harbor  they  consulted  upon  their  future 
plans.  Only  115  men  remained  of  the  280  who  started. 
The  Conception  was  leaky  and  unseaworthy  and  was 
now  burned  to  the  water's  edge;  the  crews  were  divided 
between  the  other  two  ships.  Having  chosen  new  cap 
tains,  they  visited  the  island  of  Borneo,  where  they  were 
kindly  received  and  spent  several  days.  The  men  at 
last  reached  the  Moluccas,  which  Magellan  had  long 
desired  to  see.  They  were  well  treated  by  the  natives, 
and,  after  trading  for  a  while,  they  prepared  to  sail 
homeward.  It  was  found,  however,  that  the  Trinidad 
was  leaking  badly.  After  consulting,  the  voyagers  de 
cided  that  the  Victoria  should  start  upon  the  voyage 
homeward  at  once,  so  as  to  take  advantage  of  the  ea>i 
monsoon,  while  the  Trinidad,  after  being  thoroughly 
repaired,  should  sail  back  across  the  Pacific  to  tlu 


182  IMONKKIJS  ON   LAND  AND  SEA 

Spanish  settlements  at  Panama.  Fifty-four  men  re 
mained  on  board  the  Trinidad,  forty-seven  on  the  Vic 
toria.  Espinosa  had  command  of  the  Trinidad  and 
Elcano  of  the  Victoria. 

In  the  spring  of  1522  the  Trinidad  sailed  east  upon 
the  Pacific,  but  encountered  unfavorable  winds  and 
was  finally  driven  back  to  the  Moluccas.  The  crew  had 
suffered  much  from  scurvy  and  privation.  Only  nineteen 
men  were  left  and  these  were  seized  by  the  Portuguese 
and  treated  with  great  cruelty.  Four  years  afterwards 
four  only  of  these  men,  including  the  captain,  Espinosa, 
were  sent  back  to  Spain. 

The  Victoria  sailed  man}'  miles  south  of  Ceylon,  mak 
ing  a  straight  course  for  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  which 
she  reached  "  on  the  16th  of  May,  with  starvation  and 
scurvy  already  thinning  their  ranks,  with  foretop- 
mast  gone  by  the  board  and  foreyard  badly  sprung." 
It  had  been  very  stormy  before  reaching  the  cape  and 
the  men  begged  their  commander  to  allow  them  to  stop 
at  Mozambique,  a  Portuguese  settlement,  but  he  knew 
that  they  would  be  taken  captive  by  the  Portuguese 
who  were  on  the  lookout  for  Magellan's  ships.  They 
pushed  on.  The  good  ship  became  leaky  and  the  men 
had  to  work  constantly  at  the  pumps.  In  the  two 
months  of  the  voyage  along  the  western  shore  of  Africa 
to  the  Cape  Verdes  twenty-one  men  died.  The  Cape 


FERDINAND   MAGELLAN  183 

Verde  Islands  were  also  possessions  of  the  Portuguese. 
Being  in  sore  need,  the  men  were  compelled  to  stop  at 
these  islands;  they  deceived  the  Portuguese  by  saying 
they  came  from  America  and  were  driven  out  of  their 
course  by  a  storm.  The  sick  were  taken  on  shore 
and  cared  for  and  a  boat  load  of  rice  was  sent  to" 
the  ship.  But  the  secret  got  out  and  thirteen  men 
in  one  of  the  boats  were  seized  by  the  Portuguese, 
and  the  ships  in  the  harbor  were  armed  for  the 
purpose  of  capturing  the  Victoria.  The  commander 
of  the  Victoria,  seeing  this,  stretched  all  his  sail  and 
made  his  escape,  though  followed  some  distance  by  the 
Portuguese. 

It  took  the  Victoria  eight  weeks  longer  to  make  the 
coast  of  Spain.  On  the  6th  of  September  she  came  in 
sight  of  land,  with  nineteen  men  on  board,  —  all  that 
were  left  of  the  280  who  had  sailed  with  Magellan 
nearly  three  years  before.  They  sailed  into  the  mouth  of 
the  Guadalquivir,  greatly  rejoiced.  Entering  the  harbor 
of  St.  Lucas,  they  were  greeted  by  the  vessels  there. 
When  the  Spaniards  learned  that  this  little  vessel,  the 
Victoria,  of  eighty-five  tons,  had  sailed  round  the  world, 
they  were  filled  with  astonishment.  The  ship  sailed  up 
the  river  to  Seville,  where  her  arrival  filled  the  old  city 
with  excitement.  A  public  reception  was  given  to  the 
brave  men  who  had  survived  so  many  dangers.  King 


184  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

Charles    V   entertained   the    officers   at    his    palace    and 
bestowed  pensions  upon  them. 

The  little  son  of  Magellan  had  died  the  year  before 
and  his  wife  also,  soon  after  hearing  of  the  death  of  her 
husband   and   brother   in   the   Philippines,  had   died,  so 
there  was  no  one  left  to  receive  the  reward  of  Magellan's 
expedition.     Fiske  says  :  — 

"  The  voyage  thus  ended  was  doubtless  the  greatest  feat 
of  navigation  that  has  ever  been  performed,  and  nothing 
can  be  imagined  that  would  surpass  it  except  a  journey  to 
some  other  planet.  It  has  not  the  unique  historic  position 
of  the  first  voyage  of  Columbus,  which  brought  together 
two  streams  of  human  life  that  had  been  disjoined  since 
the  Glacial  Period.  But  as  an  achievement  in  ocean  navi 
gation,  that  voyage  of  Columbus  sinks  into  insignificance 
by  the  side  of  it,  and  when  the  earth  was  a  second  time 
encompassed  by  the  greatest  English  sailor  of  his  age,  the 
advance  in  knowledge,  as  well  as  the  different  route  chosen, 
had  much  reduced  the  difficulty  of  the  performance.  When 
we  consider  the  frailness  of  the  ships,  the  immeasurable 
extent  of  the  unknown,  the  mutinies  that  were  prevented 
or  quelled,  and  the  hardships  that  were  endured,  we  can 
have  no  hesitation  in  speaking  of  Magellan  as  the  prince 
of  navigators.  Nor  can  we  ever  fail  to  admire  the  sim 
plicity  and  purity  of  that  devoted  life  in  which  there  is 
nothing  that  seeks  to  be  hidden  or  explained  away." 


FERDINAND   MAGELLAN  185 

Magellan  had  formerly  spent  several  years  in  the  East 
Indies,  so  that  in  making  his  way  across  the  Pacific  to  the 
Philippines  he  had  really  completed  the  circumnavigation 
of  the  world  and  had  settled  forever  the  great  question  as 
to  the  size  and  shape  of  the  earth. 

The  next  great  navigator  to  complete  the  journey  round 
the  world  was  Sir  Francis  Drake,  fifty  years  later.  Drake 
met  with  difficulties  and  hardships  very  similar  in  some 
respects  to  those  of  Magellan. 

One  result  of  Magellan's  voyage  was  to  bring  the 
Philippine  Islands  under  the  control  of  Spain.  Portugal 
tried  to  claim  them  as  a  part  of  the  East  Indies  but  they 
were  taken  and  held  by  the  Spaniards  till  1898,  when, 
after  the  victory  of  Admiral  Dewey  in  Manila  Bay,  they 
became  a  possession  of  the  United  States. 


CHAPTER  IX 

HERNANDO   CORTES  * 

STILL  believing  that  the  new  country  discovered  by 
Columbus  was  near  Cipango  and  Cathay,  the  Spaniards 
dreamed  of  finding  great  cities  and  untold  wealth.  Many 
searched  for  these  marvels  and  at  last  one  man  found 
something  more  wonderful,  perhaps,  than  these  dreams. 

In  the  year  1504  a  young  man  named  Hernando 
Cortes,  a  native  of  Spain,  came  to  the  Indies  in  search  of 
adventure.  He  fought  bravely  under  Velasquez  in  the 
conquest  of  Cuba  in  1511.  Later  he  was  made  chief 
judge  of  the  newly  founded  town  of  Santiago.  In  the 
year  1518,  hearing  of  the  wonderful  cities  seen  by  Cor 
dova  on  the  peninsula  of  Yucatan,  he  persuaded  Velasquez 
to  give  him  command  of  a  fleet  fitted  up  for  further  ex 
ploration  and  conquest.  These  cities  of  which  he  had 
heard  had  strange-looking  towers  or  pyramids,  and  the 
people  were  dressed  in  garments  of  cotton  and  wrore  gold 
ornaments,  cloaks  of  feathers,  and  plumes.  Then  a 
nephew  of  Velasquez,  sailing  along  the  coast,  met  a  native 
who  told  him  wonderful  stories  of  his  chief,  Montezuma, 

1  Authorities  :  Fiske  and  Prescott. 
186 


HERN  AN  DO   CORTES 


187 


who  lived  far  up  iii  the  country  and  ruled  over  many 
cities    and  had  no  end  of  gold.     This  doubtless  was  the 
Great  Khan   and  wealth  and  fame  would  belong  to  the 
brave  men  who  should 
conquer  him. 

Before  Cortes  was 
well  started  upon  his 
adventures,  Velasquez 
began  to  fear  that  he 
would  prove  too  inde 
pendent  in  case  he 
found  a  treasure  and 
sent  two  messages  to 
call  him  back.  Cortes 
paid  no  attention  to 
the  messengers  but 
calmly  went  on  his 
way.  Early  in  March, 
1519,  he  landed  at 

Tabasco  on  the  coast  of  Yucatan.  Finding  the  natives 
unfriendly,  he  attacked  and  defeated  them.  Seizing  a 
supply  of  provisions,  he  went  to  San  Juan  de  Ulloa, 
where  he  sent  gifts  to  Montezuma  in  the  name  of  his 
sovereign,  Charles  V. 

>*    Montezuma  was  the  chief  of  the  Aztecs,  who  had  built 
their  chief  city,  or  pueblo,  in  a  well-protected  place  in  the 


CORTES 


188  PIONEERS   ON   LAND  AND   SEA 

marshes  by  Lake  Tezcuco.  This  pueblo  was  begun  in  the 
year  1325  and  was  called  Tenochtitlan,  which  means 
"place  of  the  cactus  rock."  An  old  legend  says  that  the 
Aztecs,  fleeing  from  their  foes,  took  refuge  in  these 
marshes.  Here  they  found  a  stone  upon  which,  some 
years  before,  one  of  their  chiefs  had  sacrificed  a  captive 
chief.  From  a  crevice  in  this  stone,  where  a  little  earth 
was  embedded,  there  grew  a  cactus,  upon  which  sat  an 
eagle  holding  in  its  beak  a  serpent.  Their  priest  said  this 
meant  long  and  continued  victory.  Diving  into  the  lake 
he  talked  with  the  god  of  waters,  who  told  him  that  upon 
this  spot  the  people  were  to  build  their  town.  The  name 
under  which  it  was  best  known  later  was  taken  from 
Mexitl,  one  of  the  names  of  their  war  god.1 

This  pueblo  was  surrounded  by  marshes,  which,  by 
means  of  dikes  and  causeways,  the  Aztecs  gradually 
made  into  a  large  artificial  lake.  In  this  stronghold, 
the  Aztecs  grew  stronger  than  any  of  the  neighboring 
tribes.  With  some  of  these  tribes  they  formed  an  alli 
ance,  while  they  subdued  others  and  demanded  tribute 
from  them.  They  had  elected  "a  chief  of  men"  who 
was  war  chief  of  the  allied  tribes.  Montezuma,  the 
present  chief,  was  about  fifty  years  old  at  the  time  the 
Spaniards  reached  Mexico  and  was  a  man  of  much  in 
fluence  among  his  people.  He  had  heard  of  the  won- 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


HERNANDO   CORTES  189 

derful  towers  with  wings,  moving  lightly  on  the  sea, 
and  of  the  men  with  white  faces  and  shining  raiment, 
and  thought  they  might  be  gods,  perhaps  the  emissaries 
of  the  sun  god,  for  whom  they  had  waited  so  long. 
\yThe  Aztecs  worshipped  a  god  of  good  and  one  of 
evil.  To  the  evil  one  they  offered  human  sacrifices  to 
keep  him  good-natured.  Between  Quetzalcoatl,  the  good 
god,  and  Tezcatlipoca,  the  evil  god,  there  was  endless 
warfare.  "The  latter  deity  had  once  been  the  sun,  but 
Quetzalcoatl  had  knocked  him  out  of  the  sky  with  a 
big  club,  and  jumping  into  his  place  had  become  the 
sun  instead  of  him.  Tezcatlipoca,  after  tumbling  into 
the  sea,  rose  again  in  the  night  sky  as  the  Great  Bear, 
anc?  so  things  went  on  for  a  while,  until  suddenly  the 
Kvii  One  changed  himself  into  a  tiger,  and  with  a  blow 
of  his  paw  struck  Quetzalcoatl  from  the  sky." r  Long 
was  the  struggle  between  these  two  gods,  say  the  old 
legends,  but  finally  Quetzalcoatl  was  outwitted  and 
obliged  to  forsake  the  land.  With  a  few  young  friends 
he  had  gone  to  the  eastern  shore.  Here  he  bade  them 
good-by,  saying  that  he  must  go  farther,  but  would  return 
some  day  from  the  east,  with  men  as  fair  skinned  as 
himself,  and  would  take  possession  of  the  country.  His 
coming  would,  of  course,  do  away  with  the  sacrifice  of 
human  beings,  as  he  believed  that  the  perfume  of  flowers 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


190  PIONEERS   ON    LAND    AND   SEA 

and  incense,  offered  to  the  gods,  was  enough  without 
the  shedding  of  blood.  He  also  did  not  believe  in  war. 
These  newcomers  had  appeared  at  almost  the  spot  where 
Quetzalcoatl  had  disappeared  and  it  was  natural  for  the 
worshippers  to  think  that  their  god  had  returned  as  he 
had  promised. 

Cortes  did  not,  at  the  time,  understand  all  these 
things  that  aided  him  in  his  invasion  of  these  new 
countries,  but  he  saw  that  some  of  the  pueblos  paid 
their  tribute  to  Montezuma  unwillingly  and  this  feeling 
he  encouraged  whenever  possible.  At  one  large  town,  he 
persuaded  the  chief  to  arrest  Montezuma's  tax-gatherers, 
and  then  he  quietly  released  them  and  sent  them  to  their 
great  chief  with  many  kind  words. 

"<x"  The  messengers  sent  to  Montezuma  returned,  in  a 
short  time,  with  rich  gifts  of  gold  and  jewels  and  were 
accompanied  by  an  embassy  from  Montezuma.  The 
ambassadors  entered  Cortes'  pavilion  with  great  pomp, 
their  attendants  carrying  censers  which  sent  up  clouds 
of  incense.  After  saluting  Cortes  and  his  officers  with 
much  respect,  touching  the  ground  with  their  hands  and 
then  carrying  them  to  their  heads,  they  ordered  their 
slaves  to  open  the  mats  in  which  the  presents  were 
wrapped.  There  were  shields,  helmets,  cuirasses  em 
bossed  with  plates  and  ornaments  of  pure  gold;  collars 
and  bracelets  of  gold,  sandals,  fans,  head  ornaments  of 


HERNANDO   CORTES  191 

different  colored  feathers  intermingled  with  gold  and 
silver  threads,  and  sprinkled  with  pearls  and  precious 
stones,  imitations  of  birds  and  animals  in  wrought  and 
cast  gold  and  silver  of  finest  workmanship ;  curtains, 
coverlets,  and  robes  of  cotton,  fine  as  silk,  of  many 
colors,  and  interwoven  with  feather  work.  There  were 
more  than  thirty  loads  of  cotton  cloth  and  a  Spanish 
helmet  that  the  messengers  had  carried  to  the  capital 
was  returned  filled  with  grains  of  gold.  But  the  things 
that  most  pleased  the  Spaniards  were  two  circular  plates 
of  gold  and  silver  as  large  as  carriage  wheels.1 

Cortes  and  his  followers  were  delighted  with  these 
presents  but  much  disappointed  with  the  message  which 
Montezuma  sent.  He  refused  to  see  them  and  hoped 
that  they  would  soon  return  to  their  own  land. 
^Cortes  decided  to  found  a  colony.  As  the  country 
around  San  Juan  de  Ulloa  was  low  and  marshy,  he 
sent  an  exploring  party  to  find  a  better  location.  A 
place  was  selected  a  little  north  of  the  present  site  of 
Vera  Cruz.  The  foundations  were  laid  and  a  govern 
ment  was  formed.  The  new  city  was  called  Villa  Rica 
de  Vera  Cruz  — "The  Rich  Town  of  the  True  Cross." 

Now  Cortes  resigned  his  commission  from  Velasquez 
and  was  at  once  elected  governor  of  his  colony.  He 
was  to  have  for  his  own  one-fifth  of  the  gold  and 

1  Prescott's  "  Conquest  of  Mexico." 


192  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

silver  which  might  thereafter  be  obtained  from  the 
natives  by  commerce  or  conquest.  He  sent  his  flag-ship 
to  Spain  with  some  of  his  friends  to  ask  the  favor  of 
the  king.  ^  Fearing  from  the  conduct  of  some  of  his 
followers  that  they  might  mutiny  and  return  to  Spain, 
he  hit  upon  a  bold  plan  to  prevent  such  a  calamity. 
One  after  another  he  had  his  ships  scuttled  and  sunk, 
until  but  one  was  left.  It  was  supposed,  at  first,  that 
the  storms  had  injured  them  and  the  worms  had  so 
eaten  into  the  sides  and  bottoms  that  they  were  un- 
seaworthy ;  but  some  of  the  discontented  ones  in  camp 
found  out  that  the  ships  had  been  purposely  sunken 
and  complained  to  Cortes.  He  asked  them  for  whom 
but  cowards  was  retreat  necessary.  "As  for  me,  I  have 
chosen  my  part.  I  will  remain  here  while  there  is  one 
to  bear  me  company.  If  there  be  any  so  craven  as  to 
shrink  from  sharing  the  dangers  of  our  glorious  enter 
prise,  let  them  go  home,  in  God's  name.  There  is  still 
one  vessel  left.  Let  them  take  that  and  return  to 
Cuba.  They  can  tell  there  how  they  deserted  their 
commander  and  their  comrades,  and  patiently  wait  till 
we  return  loaded  with  the  spoils  of  the  Aztecs."  1  They 
all  decided  to  stay  with  him.  Then  he  suggested  that, 
as  this  was  the  last  ship,  it  might  as  well  be  destroyed ; 
all  agreed  and  the  vessel  was  destroyed  at  once.  Then, 

1  Prescott's  "  Conquest  of  Mexico." 


HEKNANDO   COKTES  193 

with  450  men,  many  of  them  clad  in  mail,  half  a  dozen 
small  cannon,  and  fifteen  horses,  Cortes  pushed  on  toward 
Tenochtitlan.  Several  hundred  Indians,  from  the  towns 
along  the  way,  went  with  them. 

Their  progress  was  a  peaceful  one.  "It  was  not 
enough  that  the  Spanish  soldier  of  that  day  was  a  bull 
dog  for  strength  and  courage,  or  that  his  armor  was  proof 
against  stone  and  arrows,  or  that  he  wielded  a  Toledo 
blade  that  could  cut  through  silken  cushions,  or  that  his 
arquebus  and  cannon  were  not  only  death-dealing  weapons 
but  objects  of  superstitious  awe."  l  None  of  these  things 
frightened  the  Indians  so  much  as  those  unknown  crea 
tures,  those  frightful  monsters,  the  horses.  Before  them, 
men,  women,  and  children  fled  in  horror.^/  Their  fear  of 
the  supernatural  overcame  their  bravery.  The  horses  be 
longed  to  the  god,  Quetzalcoatl,  who  had  come  back-  to 
win  his  kingdom  from  the  evil  one.  When  Cortes  threw 
down  the  idols  from  the  temple  and  set  free  the  victims 
held  for  sacrifice,  the  action  seemed  a  natural  one  to  the 
Indians,  for  Quetzalcoatl  did  not  believe  in  human  sacri 
fice.  Then  the  cross  which  Cortes  set  up  in  place  of  the 
idols  happened  to  be  one  of  their  god's  emblems. 

The  Spaniards  passed  through  many  cities  where  they 
were  treated  with  kindness.  In  one  large  city  fifty  men 
were  sacrificed  to  them  as  deities  and  cakes  dipped  in  the 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


194  PIONEERS    ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

blood  of  the  victims  were  offered  them  to  eat.  As  the 
invaders  went  on,  they  climbed  gradually  to  a  great  pla 
teau,  the  climate  growing  colder  and  the  vegetation  chang 
ing  from  tropical  to  that  of  the  temperate  zone.  They 
finally  reached  Tlascala,  one  of  the  important  towns  upon 
the  plateau  of  Anahuac,  more  than  seven  thousand  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

The  Tlascalans  were  a  powerful  tribe  and  were  enemies 
of  Montezuma.  Their  stronghold  was  well  fortified  and 
the  Aztecs  had  been  unable  to  subdue  them.  When  they 
heard  of  the  approach  of  the  strangers  one  chieftain  ad 
vised  his  people  to  admit  them,  as  they  were  doubtless 
gods  and  it  would  do  no  good  to  resist  them.  Another 
chief  thought,  however,  so  long  as  there  was  any  doubt 
about  the  matter,  it  was  worth  while  to  fight.  The  num 
ber  of  the  strangers  was  small  and  the  men  of  Tlascala 
could  not  be  defeated.  This  advice  was  taken  and  the 
warriors,  some  five  thousand  strong,  went  out  to  fight. 
The  chief  warriors  wore  quilted  cotton  doublets  which 
protected  the  body,  and  some  of  the  wealthier  chiefs  wore 
over  this  a  sort  of  armor  of  thin  gold  or  silver  plate. 
Cloaks  made  of  bright-colored  feathers  were  often  thrown 
over  the  armor,  and  a  headpiece  of  wood  or  leather  to 
represent  the  head  of  some  wild  animal  protected  the 
head  and  gave  a  fierce  appearance  to  the  wearer.  The 
shields  of  the  natives  were  frameworks  of  reeds  or 


HERNANDO   CORTES  195 

bamboo,  covered  with  leather  or  quilted  cotton  and  gayly 
decorated  with  feathers.  They  fought  with  slings,  bows 
and  arrows  tipped  with  obsidian,  lances  with  copper 
points,  and  wooden  swords  with  sharp  blades  of  obsidian 
inserted  on  both  sides,  making  a  dangerous  weapon.  The 
common  people  wore  no  armor  and  their  bodies  were 
painted  with  the  colors  of  the  chieftains  that  they 
followed. 

For  two  days  fierce  fighting  was  carried  on  and  many 
Indians  were  slain.  One  or  two  Spaniards  were  killed 
and  several  wounded.  The  deaths  were  carefully  con 
cealed  from  the  enemy.  A  horse  that  was  killed  was 
taken  by  the  Tlascalans  as  a  trophy.  Cortes  was  afraid 
this  would  destroy  the  fear  and  awe  the  natives  felt  for 
the  horses  and  had  two  others  that  were  killed  secretly 
buried.  The  Indian  allies  the  Spaniards  had  gathered  on 
their  journey  were  of  great  service  to  them. 

The  Tlascalans  now  decided  that  the  strangers  were 
more  than  mortal  but  the  chief  who  had  advised  war, 
after  counsel  with  the  soothsayers,  suggested  that  as  sun- 
gods,  they  might  lose  their  strength  at  night  and  be 
more  easily  conquered.  A  night  attack  was  planned  but 
Cortes  was  not  surprised.  In  the  moonlight  one  of  the 
sentinels  saw  the  Indians  stealthily  creeping  toward  the 
camp.  In  a  few  moments  the  Spaniards  were  in  arms. 
The  battle-cry  was  sounded  as  they  quickly  ran  down  the 


196  PIONEERS   ON    LAND    AND   SEA 

hill  to  meet  their  foes.  The  Indians  were  so  astounded 
that  they  fled,  after  one  feeble  volley  of  arrows,  to  their 
stronghold. 

The  next  day  a  party  of  Tlascalans  came  to  the  Span 
ish  camp  with  presents  from  their  chief,  who,  they  said, 
was  tired  of  war  and  wished  the  friendship  of  the  Span 
iards.  Cortes  received  them  kindly  but  their  behavior 
made  him  suspicious  and  he  finally  arrested  them  as 
spies.  They  were  sure  that  only  gods  could  read  men's 
thoughts  and  made  a  full  confession.  They  were  to 
watch  things  carefully  and  bring  back  a  report.  Some 
were  to  stay  in  camp  and  at  a  given  signal  set  fire  to  it. 
Cortes  waited  until  nightfall,  then  cut  off  the  thumbs  of 
the  spies  and  sent  them  back  to  tell  their  chief  that  they 
would  find  the  white  man  as  strong  by  night  as  by  day. 

It  was  clear  that  it  was  useless  to  oppose  these  chil 
dren  of  the  sun.  The  soothsayers  who  advised  the  night 
attack  were  sacrificed  and  the  tribal  council  decided  to 
make  an  alliance  with  these  "  wielders  of  thunder  and 
lightning "  against  their  old  enemy,  the  Aztecs.  The 
Aztecs  were  greatly  alarmed  by  this  alliance  and  were 
convinced  that  beings  who  could  ^o  easily  defeat  the 
Tlascalans  must  be  more  than  human. 

From  Tlascala,  Cortes  went  on  to  Cholula,  a  strong 
pueblo  belonging  to  the  Aztecs.  Here  they  were  re 
ceived  with  much  friendliness  and  invited  into  the  town. 


HERNANDO    CORTES  197 

But  secretly,  and  with  the  approval  of  Montezuma's 
emissaries,  a  plan  was  made  for  trapping  the  Spaniards. 
But  with  Cortes  was  a  young  Indian  woman  called 
Marina,  from  Tabasco,  who  not  only  understood  the 
native  languages  but  soon  learned  to  speak  Spanish. 
She  was  very  fond  of  Cortes  and  aided  him  in  every 
possible  way.  She  had  become  the  friend  of  one  of  the 
Cholulan  women  and  this  woman,  wishing  to  save  her 
new-found  friend,  hinted  that  danger  was  near.  Marina 
told  Cortes  what  she  feared  and  together  they  discovered 
the  whole  plot.  Cortes  called  the  principal  chiefs  of 
Cholula  together  and  told  them  that  he  intended  to  start 
next  day  for  Tenochtitlan,  and  would  like  to  have  them 
furnish  him  a  supply  of  food  and  a  force  of  Cholulans  to 
go  with  him.  The  chiefs  were  delighted  with  his  plan, 
for  they  expected  to  surprise  the  Spaniards  with  a  great 
force  of  men  as  they  left  the  city  and  so  destroy  them. 
A  large  army  of  Mexicans  was  quartered  a  short  distance 
from  the  city  to  assist  the  chiefs,  and  all  sorts  of  obstruc 
tions  had  been  placed  in  the  streets  to  confuse  the  depart 
ing  Spaniards.  The  natives  thought  the  white  men  for 
once  did  not  see  everything. 

Several  three-year-old  babes  were  sacrificed  that  day  by 
the  Cholulans  and  the  signs  were  favorable  for  success. 
The  chiefs  spent  the  night  in  arranging  their  plans  for 
getting  rid  of  the  strangers,  while  Cortes  saw  that  his 


198  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

cannon  were  placed  in  a  suitable  position  for  raking 
the  streets.  In  the  morning  the  warriors  crowded  the 
square  where  the  Spaniards  were  quartered,  and  the  chiefs 
felt  so  safe  that  thirty  or  more  accepted  an  invitation  to 
meet  Cortes  in  private  and  receive  his  parting  blessing. 
When  they  were  gathered  together  Cortes  told  them  that 
he  knew  of  their  plot.  He  also  knew  that  all  had  not 
favored  it  and  these  he  would  spare.  He  had  heard  that 
Montezuma  approved  of  it,  but  he  would  not  believe 
so  wise  a  chief  could  be  guilty  of  such  a  thing,  and  he 
would  spare  his  emissaries.  Then  the  noise  of  artillery, 
never  before  heard  in  Cholula,  startled  the  waiting  crowd. 
The  warriors  in  the  courtyard  were  mowed  down  like 
grain  before  the  sickle.  Those  who  attempted  to  escape 
by  scaling  the  walls  afforded  a  still  better  mark  for  the 
musket.  The  cannon  cleared  the  streets  of  all  who 
attempted  to  assist  their  friends,  and  the  Tlascalan  war 
riors  who  were  camped  outside  the  city  rushed  in  to  help 
in  the  slaughter.  Hundreds  were  slain,  including  the 
head  war  chief.  Some  of  the  captured  chiefs  were  burnt 
at  the  stake.  Cortes  found  many  victims  caged  for 
sacrifice.  These  he  released  and  resumed  his  march. 

As  the  army  went  on  its  way  toward  Tenochtitlan, 
they  were  met  by  the  chiefs  of  some  of  the  towns  they 
passed,  asking  for  help  against  the  tyranny  of  the  Aztecs. 
One  of  the  towns,  Cuitlahuac,  was  built  upon  the  cause- 


HERNANDO   CORTES  199 

way  leading  across  the  Lake  of  Chalco  and  reminded 
them  of  Venice.  "  It  was  built  over  the  water,  with 
canals  for  streets.  Its  floating  gardens  and  its  houses 
glistening  in  their  stucco  of  white  gypsum  delighted  the 
eye  of  the  Spaniards."  Crossing  the  causeway  they 
reached,  on  the  7th  of  November,  1519,  a  point  from 
which  they  could  see  Tenochtitlan.  Diaz,  a  Spaniard 
with  the  party,  says :  "  And  when  we  beheld  so  many 
cities  and  towns  rising  up  from  the  water,  and  other 
populous  places  situated  on  terra  firma,  and  that  cause 
way,  straight  as  a  level,  which  went  into  Mexico,  we 
remained  astonished,  and  said  to  one  another  that  it 
appeared  like  the  enchanted  castles  which  they  tell 
of  in  the  book  of  Amadis,  by  reason  of  the  great  towers, 
temples,  and  edifices  which  there  were  in  the  water,  and 
all  of  them  work  of  masonry.  Some  of  our  soldiers  asked 
if  this  that  they  saw  was  not  a  thing  in  a  dream." 
^  "The  City  of  Mexico  stood  in  a  salt  lake,  and  was 
approached  by  three  causeways  of  solid  masonry,  each  as 
the  Spanish  soldiers  said,  two  lances  in  breadth,  which 
might  mean  from  twenty  to  thirty  feet.  Being  from 
four  to  five  miles  in  length,  and  assailable  on  both  sides 
by  the  canoes  of  the  city's  defenders,  they  were  very 
dangerous  avenues  for  an  enemy,  whether  advancing  or 
retreating.  Near  the  city  these  causeways  were  inter 
rupted  by  wooden  drawbridges.  Then  they  were  con- 


200  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

tinned  into  the  city  as  main  thoroughfares,  and  met  in  the 
great  square  where  the  temple  stood.  The  city  was  also 
connected  with  the  mainland  by  an  aqueduct  in  solid 
masonry  leading  down  from  Chapultepec.  The  streets 
might  have  reminded  one  of  Venice,  in  so  far  as  some 
were  canals  alive  with  canoes,  while  others  were  dry 
footpaths  paved  with  hard  cement,  and  the  footways  often 
crossed  the  canals  on  bridges." 

The  houses  were  built  of  stone,  usually  covered  with  a 
shining  white  stucco.  They  were  large  enough  to  afford 
living  room  for  some  two  hundred  families  and  were 
built  about  great  courtyards.  They  were  never  more 
than  two  stories  high  and  often  only  one.  The  flat  roofs 
were  sometimes  covered  with  flower-gardens  and  were 
protected  by  parapets  of  stone,  so  that  each  house  was  a 
fortress.  "  The  windows  were  mere  loop-holes,  and  they 
as  well  as  the  doorways  were  open.  The  entrance  to  the 
house  could  be  barricaded,  but  doors  had  not  been 
invented.  It  was  customary  to  carve  upon  the  jambs,  on 
either  side  of  the  doorway,  enormous  serpents  with 
gaping  mouths."  1 

The  partitions  and  ceilings  of  the  houses  were  made  of 
cedar  and  other  fine  woods.  The  rooms  were  decorated 
with  tapestries  made  of  the  bright  feathers  of  the  many 
birds  which  were  kept  in  an  immense  aviary  for  that  pur- 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


HERNANDO    CORTES  201 

pose.  Cardinal  birds,  parrots,  humming-birds,  and  others 
of  brilliant  plumage  were  carefully  looked  after,  and  during 
the  moulting  season  the  feathers  were  collected  for  this 
gorgeous  feather- work. 

"  Except  a  few  small  tables  and  stools,  there  was  not 
much  furniture.  Palm-leaf  mats  piled  on  the  hard 
cemented  floor  served  as  beds,  and  sometimes  there  were 
coverlets  of  cotton  or  feather-work.  Resinous  torches 
were  used  for  lights.  The  principal  meal  of  the  day  was 
served  on  low  tables,  the  people  sitting  on  mats  or 
cushions  in  long  rows  around  the  sides  of  the  room,  with 
their  backs  against  the  wall.  A  lighted  brazier  stood  in 
the  middle,  and  before  tasting  the  food  each  person  threw 
a  morsel  into  the  brazier  as  an  offering  to  the  fire  god. 
The  commonest  meat  was  the  turkey."  l 

Loaves  of  bread  were  made  of  Indian  corn  and  eggs, 
also  little  cakes  baked  on  heated  stones.  The  Aztecs  had 
plenty  of  fresh  fish  and  game.  The  meats  were  highly 
seasoned  with  tabasco  and  chile  sauce.  One  Spaniard 
counted  thirty  dishes  upon  Montezuma's  table  made  of 
stewed  meats  thus  seasoned.  "  One  favorite  mess  was 
frog  spawn  and  stewed  ants  peppered  with  chile;  another 
was  human  flesh  cooked  in  like  manner.  .  .  .  These 
viands  were  kept  hot  by  means  of  chafing  dishes  and  were 
served  on  earthenware  bowls  or  plates,  .  ,  .  chocolate, 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


202  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

flavored  with  vanilla,  was  the  ordinary  beverage.  Food 
was  handled  with  the  fingers,  but  bowls  of  water  and 
towels  were  brought  in  at  the  end  of  the  meal."  * 

The  people  were  dressed  in  garments  of  fine  cotton. 
The  men  had  long  cloaks  and  ample  sashes  often  em 
broidered  with  rich  figures  and  edged  with  fringe.  The 
women  wore  skirts  with  gay  borders  of  embroidery 
and  over  them  robes,  reaching  to  the  ankles.  In  cold 
weather  robes  of  fur  or  of  feather-work  were  worn.  The 
faces  were  sometimes  painted,  and  the  teeth  stained  with 
cochineal.  The  hair  was  usually  worn  long.  Bracelets 
and  anklets  were  made  of  gold  and  silver,  as  well  as  rings 
for  fingers,  ears,  and  nose.  These  were  worn  by  both 
men  and  women. 

There  were  no  shops  in  this  pueblo,  but  two  great 
market-places,  where  all  the  trading  was  carried  on. 
Every  fifth  day  there  was  a  fair  and  the  city  was  crowded 
with  people  who  came  not  only  from  the  neighborhood 
but  from  leagues  around.  Here  could  be  seen,  displayed 
for  trade,  foods,  cloths,  and  jewels ;  tools,  weapons,  and 
building  materials;  mats  and  stools,  dye-stuffs  and 
pottery,  drugs,  and  razors  made  of  obsidian.  People 
from  the  country  around  brought  their  product  in  canoes 
or  upon  litters,  —  the  only  kind  of  wagon  used.  The  ex 
changes  were  made  partly  by  barter  and  partly  with  the 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


HERNANDO    CORTES  20$ 

•> 

currency  of  the  country.  This  was  bits  of  tin  or  copper 
shaped  like  the  letter  T,  or  little  bags  of  cocoa  seed,  or 
quills  filled  with  gold-dust. 

V  Near  the  principal  market  and  in  the  centre  of  the 
pueblo  was  the  great  enclosure  of  the  temple.  Within 
a  stone  wall  eight  feet  in  height  and  entered  by  four 
gateways,  were  not  fewer  than  twenty  teocallis  or  pyramids, 
the  largest  of  which  was  that  of  the  war  god.  This 
pyramid  was  about  100  feet  high  and  was  built  in  five 
stories.  The  top  of  it  was  reached  by  stone  stairs  on  the 
outside.  The  Spaniards  counted  114  steps.  The  first 
flight  went  up  to  a  terrace  or  platform  at  the  base  of  the 
second  story.  Then  it  was  necessary  to  walk  around  the 
platform  to  the  other  side  to  reach  the  second  flight,  which 
led  to  the  third  story.  This  construction  was  continued 
so  that  one  had  to  pass  around  the  building  four  times  to 
reach  the  top.  When  the  religious  processions  with  their 
many  priests  and  musicians  marched  round  and  round  to 
the  summit,  the  sight  was  an  imposing  one. 

On  the  top  was  a  broad  platform  paved  with  flat  stones, 
and  here  was  the  large  block  of  jasper  where  the  human 
victim  was  laid  for  sacrifice.  Here  also  were  two  towers 
in  which  the  images  of  the  gods  were  kept.  Before  each 
sanctuary  stood  an  altar  upon  which  burned  an  undying 
fire ;  for  if  this  fire  should  go  out,  great  trouble  would  come 
to  the  Aztecs.  "  On  these  altars  smoked  fresh  human 


204  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

hearts,  of  which  the  gods  were  fond,  while  other  parts  oi 
the  body  were  prepared  for  the  communal  houses  below. 
.  .  .  The  walls  and  floor  of  the  great  temple  were  clotted 
with  blood  and  shreds  of  human  flesh,  and  the  snieli  was 
like  that  of  a  slaughter  house." 

Early  in  November  the  white  visitors  entered  this 
strange  city  and  were  politely  received  by  Montezuma, 
not  because  he  was  glad  to  see  them  but  because  he  could 
do  nothing  else.  A  great  house  near  the  temple  was 
given  them  for  their  lodging.  This  house  was  large 
enough  to  hold  the  450  Spaniards  and  1000  or  more  of 
their  Tlascalan  allies.  Cortes  at  once  placed  sentinels 
along  the  parapet  and  pat  his  cannon  where  they  would 
be  most  effective. 

When  Cortes  had  been  in  the  city  for  nearly  a  week, 
studying  it  and  its  people,  he  began  to  feel  very  uneasy 
about  his  position.  How  long  he  would  enjoy  the  friend 
liness  of  Montezuma  and  his  followers  was  uncertain.  He 
finally  decided  to  bring  Montezuma  to  the  Spanish  quar 
ters  and  keep  him  where  he  could  control  his  actions.  As 
long  as  Montezuma  was  with  the  Spaniards,  his  people 
would  hardly  dare  to  attack  them.  As  in  other  places 
Cortes  had  entered,  there  were  here  two  parties,  one  bitterly 
opposed  to  the  strangers.  The  priests  of  the  evil  god 
(Tezcatlipoca)  hated  these  friends  of  the  good  god  (Quet 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


206  PIONEEKS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

zalcoatl)  and  would  do  all  they  could  to  destroy  them. 
Cortes  had  noticed  that  in  other  towns  the  capture  of  a 
few  chiefs  seemed  to  paralyze  the  people.  This  was  doubt 
less  due  to  the  fact  that  some  religious  rites  were  thought 
necessary  that  could  not  be  performed  without  the  help  of 
the  chief.  With  Montezuma  in  his  charge  he  felt  that 
the  Spaniards  would  be  reasonably  safe  from  the  dangers 
that  surrounded  them. 

Cortes  now  looked  for  an  excuse  for  carrying  out  his 
plan.  This  was  soon  found.  A  few  Spaniards  had  been 
left  at  Yera  Cruz.  In  a  quarrel  with  an  Aztec  chief  sev 
eral  white  men  were  killed,  though  the  Spaniards  were 
victorious.  This  was  most  unfortunate,  as  it  was  now 
known  that  the  strangers  were  mortal.  Cortes  decided 
that  this  affair  gave  an  excellent  excuse  for  taking  posses 
sion  of  Montezuma' s  person.  With  five  of  his  bravest 
men,  all  clad  in  armor,  and  Marina,  his  interpreter,  he 
visited  Montezuma.  Some  thirty  of  the  soldiers  were  to 
follow  in  groups  of  three  or  four,  that  they  might  not 
attract  attention.  The  party  was  received  with  kindness 
by  Montezuma.  As  soon  as  the  soldiers  were  assembled, 
Cortes  stated  the  object  of  his  visit.  Of  course,  he  said, 
he  did  not  think  Montezuma  was  guilty  of  the  murder  of 
the  men  at  Vera  Cruz,  but  until  the  matter  was  settled,  he 
would  like  to  have  him  transfer  his  residence  to  the  house 
occupied  by  the  Spaniards.  Montezuma  protested  but 


HERNANDO    CORTES  207 

was  forced  to  return  with  his  visitors.  He  was  paid 
every  mark  of  respect  and  the  tribal  council  was  allowed 
to  meet  with  him  to  do  public  business.  Sometimes  he 
was  allowed  to  visit  the  temple  but  on  such  occasions  a 
large  body  of  armed  Spaniards  went  with  him.  Cortes 
was  now  acting  governor  of  Tenochtitlan  and  its  allied 
towns,  with  Montezuma  as  his  mouthpiece. 

When  the  offending  chief  was  brought  up  from  the 
coast  by  Montezuma' s  order,  Cortes  had  him,  with  several 
of  his  friends,  burned  in  the  public  square  before  the  Span 
iards'  house.  A  plan  for  the  release  of  Montezuma  was 
made  by  his  brother  (Cuitlazhuatzin)  and  the  tribal  chiefs 
of  Tezcuco  and  Tlacopan,  but  Cortes  discovered  it  and 
soon  had  the  chiefs  in  prison. 

The  custom  of  offering  human  sacrifices  to  their  gods 
greatly  shocked  Cortes,  "  as  men  are  wont  to  be  shocked 
by  any  kind  of  wickedness  with  which  they  are  unfamiliar." 
He  took  possession  of  one  of  the  great  pyramids,  threw 
down  the  idols,  cleansed  the  bloody  altar,  sprinkled  it 
with  holy  water,  then  set  up  a  crucifix  and  an  image  of 
the  virgin.  As  the  natives  were  still  uncertain  that  this 
was  not  the  desire  of  their  sun  god,  they  did  not  resent 
this  action  but  watched  with  doubtful  faces  the  service 
that  followed. 

The  long  winter  passed  quietly  and  it  was  April  when 
picture-writing  sent  up  from  the  coast  gave  alarming 


208  PIONEERS    ON    LAND    AND    SEA 

news.  Narvaez,  with  18  ships,  and  not  fewer  than  1200 
soldiers,  had  been  sent  from  Cuba  by  Velasquez,  with 
orders  to  arrest  Cortes. 

Cortes  wasted  no  time.  He  left  Pedro  de  Alvarado 
with  150  men  to  take  charge  of  Montezuma  and  Mexico. 
With  the  remaining  300  men  he  hurried  to  the  coast,  sur 
prised,  defeated,  and  captured  Narvaez,  then  persuaded 
the  men  to  join  his  own  army.  With  his  increased  force 
he  marched  back  to  Mexico.  On  his  way  he  met  messen 
gers  from  Alvarado  with  bad  news.  In  May  the  Aztecs 
celebrated  a  great  festival  in  honor  of  their  war  god.  They 
assembled  in  the  court  of  the  temple,  near  the  Spanish 
quarters,  in  gala  dress,  to  the  number  of  600.  Alvarado, 
fearing  they  were  planning  an  attack,  surprised  them  in 
the  midst  of  their  dance  and  killed  them  all.  Among 
them  were  many  chiefs  and  the  warriors  belonged  to 
families  of  note.  The  Aztecs  were  at  once  aroused  and 
attacked  the  Spaniards  with  fury.  Montezuma  was  com 
pelled  to  go  out  upon  the  roof  and  quiet  the  outbreak. 
The  Spaniards  were  besieged  in  their  fortress  and  the 
brigantines  built  by  Cortes  to  use  in  time  of  danger  were 
Burned  on  the  lake. 

When  Cortes  entered  the  city  on  the  24th  of  June,  he 
found  the  streets  deserted,  the  markets  closed,  and  many 
of  the  drawbridges  raised.  But  few  Indians  were  to  be 
seen.  When  he  met  Alvarado,  Cortes  told  him  that  his 


HERNANDO    CORTES  209 

conduct  was  that  of  a  madman ;  but  it  was  now  the  turn 
of  Cortes  to  make  a  mistake.  Montezuma's  brother,  who 
stood  next  in  line  of  succession,  was  the  prisoner  of  Cortes, 
who  did  not  understand  the  danger  of  letting  him  out. 
There  was  not  food  enough  in  the  fortress  for  the  larger 
army  and  Cortes  sent  this  brother  to  order  the  mar 
kets  opened.  Some  say  that  Montezuma  suggested  this 
plan.  This  at  once  brought  matters  to  a  crisis.  The 
brother  called  together  the  tribal  council,  which  instantly 
deposed  Montezuma  and  elected  him  in  his  place. 

Early  next  morning  came  the  outbreak.  From  the 
parapet  surrounding  the  enclosure,  the  Spaniards  could 
see  every  avenue  leading  toward  them  black  with  the 
masses  of  warriors,  while  every  pyramid  and  flat  house 
top  was  swarming  with  the  enemy.  They  attacked  with 
arrows,  slings,  and  javelins,  and  many  Spaniards  were 
killed  or  wounded.  The  Spanish  cannon  swept  the 
streets  with  terrible  effect  but  the  Indians  pressed  on 
under  the  very  muzzles  of  the  guns.  They  shot  burning 
arrows  into  the  fort  and  some  of  the  woodwork  caught 
fire.  The  besieged  had  but  little  water  with  which  to 
put  out  the  flames  and  part  of  the  wall  was  torn  down 
to  check  the  fire.  The  breach  was  protected  by  heavy 
guns  and  a  constant  fire  was  kept  up  through  the  open 
ing.  At  Cortes'  direction  Montezuma  appeared  upon  the 
parapet  and  tried  to  quiet  the  people  but  he  found  his 


210  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

power  was  ended.  Stones  and  darts  were  hurled  at  him ; 
he  was  struck  down  by  a  heavy  stone  and  died  a  few 
days  afterward. 

Before  Montezuma's  death  and  after  several  days' 
fighting,  Cortes,  with  three  hundred  chosen  men,  made  a 
sortie  and  after  a  terrific  fight  drove  the  enemy  from 
the  temple  that  overlooked  the  Spaniards'  quarters.  From 
this  temple  the  enemy  had  sent  such  a  volley  of  stones 
and  arrows  that  the  Spaniards  could  not  for  a  moment 
leave  their  defences.  Reaching  the  summit  of  the  temple, 
the  Spaniards  hurled  the  idols  among  the  people  and 
burned  the  bloody  shrines. 

It  was  the  last  day  of  June  that  Montezurna  died  and 
on  the  evening  of  the  next  day,  fearing  lest  his  army 
should  be  blockaded  and  starved,  Cortes  left  the  city. 
The  Aztecs  did  not  fight  at  night  and  the  Spaniards 
hoped  that  the  causeway  might  be  crossed  before  their 
plan  was  discovered.  All  the  treasure  that  had  been 
collected  was  brought  out  and  the  soldiers  were  allowed 
to  help  themselves,  after  the  share  belonging  to  the  crown 
had  been  placed  in  charge  of  careful  officers. 

The  night  was  cloudy  and  a  drizzling  rain  was  falling. 
The  troops  marched  through  quiet  and  deserted  streets 
till  they  reached  the  great  causeway  leading  to  Tlacopan. 
Its  three  drawbridges  had  all  been  destroyed  but  the 
Spaniards  had  made  a  portable  bridge  which  was  placed 


HERNANDO   CORTES  211 

across  the  breach.  The  Spaniards  started  across.  Before 
they  had  all  crossed  this  narrow  passage  the  splashing 
of  many  oars  was  heard  through  the  darkness.  Then 
came  a  few  stones  and  arrows,  striking  at  random  among 
the  hurrying  troops.  They  fell  every  moment  faster  and 
more  furious  and  the  lake  seemed  to  be  swarming  with 
warriors.  The  Spaniards  pushed  on  as  rapidly  as  possible 
anxious  to  make  their  escape.  When  the  natives  climbed 
up  the  sides  of  the  causeway  and  broke  into  their  ranks, 
the  horsemen  shook  them  off  and  rode  over  them,  while 
the  men  on  foot  with  their  swords  or  the  butts  of  their 
pieces  drove  them  headlong  into  the  water.  When  the 
head  of  the  long  column  reached  the  second  opening  in 
the  causeway,  the  rear  had  not  yet  crossed  the  first. 
Here  a  pause  was  necessary  and  the  suffering  from  arrows 
of  the  enemy  was  intense.  Repeated  messages  were  sent 
to  the  rear  for  the  portable  bridge.  When,  finally,  all  had 
crossed,  an  attempt  was  made  to  lift  the  bridge  to  send 
it  to  the  front,  but  it  stuck  fast  to  the  sides  of  the  dike 
and  could  not  be  raised.  As  this  news  was  passed  from 
man  to  man  and  its  meaning  understood,  a  cry  of  despair 
arose,  which  for  a  moment  drowned  all  noise  of  the  con 
flict.  All  means  of  retreat  were  cut  off.  Order  was  at 
an  end.  Each  thought  only  of  his  own  life.  Some  suc 
ceeded  in  swimming  their  horses  across.  Others  failed 
and  rolled  headlong  with  their  steeds  into  the  lake.  The 


212  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

infantry  followed  pell-mell,  falling  one  upon  the  other, 
and  frequently  pierced  by  the  shafts,  or  struck  down  by 
the  war  clubs  of  the  Aztecs.  The  struggle  was  long  and 
deadly.  The  warriors,  running  their  canoes  alongside, 
leaped  upon  the  land  and  grappled  the  enemy  until  both 
rolled  down  the  side  of  the  causeway  together. 

In  time  the  opening  in  the  causeway  was  filled  with 
the  wreckage  of  the  ammunition  wagons,  heavy  guns, 
bales  of  rich  stuffs,  chests  of  gold,  and  bodies  of  men  and 
horses.  Over  this  dismal  ruin  a  passage  was  formed  and 
those  in  the  rear  passed  over  to  the  other  side.  Then  all 
pressed  forward  to  the  last  opening.  It  was  wide  and 
deep  but  not  so  thickly  beset  by  the  enemy.  Cortes,  who 
it  is  said  had  reached  the  place  through  the  water,  tried  to 
encourage  his  men  to  pass.  The  cavaliers  again  set  the 
example  by  plunging  into  the  water.  Horse  and  foot 
followed  as  they  could,  some  swimming,  others  clinging 
to  the  manes  and  tails  of  the  struggling  animals. 
Cortes,  with  a  few  of  his  faithful  friends,  still  kept 
in  advance.  As  morning  dawned  the  remnant  of  the 
army  reached  land.  This  terrible  night  has  ever 
since  been  known  in  history  as  la  noche  triste,  or 
the  melancholy  night.  Cortes  had  started  the  evening 
before  with  1250  Spaniards,  6000  Tlascalans,  and  80 
horses.  Next  morning,  after  reaching  land,  he  had 
500  Spaniards,  2000  Tlascalans,  and  20  horses.  All 


HERNANDO   CORTES  213 

his  cannon  were  sunk  in  the  lake.  Then  Cortes  sat 
down  upon  a  rock  and  wept. 

But  Cortes  did  not  give  up  his  purpose  of  taking 
Mexico.  In  a  few  days  the  Indians  from  that  and  neigh 
boring  pueblos  attacked  him,  hoping  to  destroy  his  army, 
but  he  won  a  decided  victory.  This  was  fortunate,  for 
the  Tlascalans,  almost  persuaded  by  Aztec  envoys,  were 
talking  of  deserting  Cortes.  After  this  victory  they  de 
cided  to  keep  up  their  alliance  with  him.  During  the 
autumn  Cortes  had  many  encounters  with  the  smaller 
pueblos,  defeating  those  that  resisted  him  and  making 
alliances  with  the  enemies  of  Tenochtitlan.  "  Cortes  now 
found  ships  useful.  Taking  some  of  those  that  had  come 
with  Narvaez,  he  sent  them  to  Hispaniola  for  horses, 
cannon,  and  soldiers.  By  Christmas  eve  he  found  himself 
at  the  head  of  a  thoroughly  equipped  army  of  TOO  infantry 
armed  with  pikes  and  crossbows,  118  arquebusiers,  86 
cavalry,  a  dozen  cannon,  and  several  thousand  Indian 
allies."  l 

Starting  at  Christmas  on  his  final  march  against  the 
mighty  pueblo,  Cortes  first  went  to  Tezcuco.  There  had 
been  quarrels  among  chiefs  of  the  Aztec  confederacy  and 
the  new  war  chief  of  Tezcuco,  being  offended  with  the 
pueblo  across  the  lake,  admitted  Cortes  into  his  town  and 
entertained  him  hospitably.  This  move  placed  all  the 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


214  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND  SEA 

warriors  of  Tezcuco  at  the  command  of  Cortes  and  made 
it  possible  for  him  to  build  a  new  fleet  of  brigantines  on 
the  lake.  Meanwhile,  smallpox  had  carried  off  Cuitlaz- 
huatzin  and  his  nephew  was  now  "  chief  of  men."  He 
was  a  brave  warrior  and  made  a  gallant  defence  of  his 
city.  "  For  ferocious  courage  the  Aztecs  were  not  sur 
passed  by  any  other  Indians  on  the  continent,  and  when 
Cortes  at  length  began  the  siege  of  Mexico,  April  28,  1521, 
the  fighting  that  ensued  was  incessant  and  terrible.  The 
fresh-water  supply  was  soon  cut  off,  and  then  slowly  but 
surely  the  besiegers  upon  the  three  causeways  and  in  the 
brigantines  closed  in  upon  their  prey.  Points  of  advan 
tage  were  sometimes  lost  by  the  Aztecs  through  their 
excessive  anxiety  to  capture  Spaniards  alive.  Occasion 
ally  they  succeeded,  and  then  from  the  top  of  the  great 
pyramid  would  resound  the  awful  tones  of  the  sacrificial 
drum  made  of  serpent  skins,  a  sound  that  could  be  heard 
in  every  quarter  of  this  horrible  city ;  and  the  souls  of  the 
soldiers  sickened  as  they  saw  their  wretched  comrades 
dragged  up  the  long  staircase,  to  be  offered  as  sacrifices  to 
Satan.  ...  At  last  resistance  came  to  an  end.  Canals 
and  footways  were  choked  with  corpses,  and  a  great  part 
of  the  city  lay  in  ruins."  1 

When  the  conquerors  entered  the  city,  their  first  work 
was  to  cleanse  and  rebuild.     Mexico  soon  looked  like  a 

1  Fiske's  "  Discovery  of  America." 


HERNANDO   CORTES  215 

Spanish  town.  Where  the  heathen  temple  had  stood,  a 
Gothic  church  was  built.  This  was  replaced  in  1573  by 
the  cathedral  which  still  stands  there.  The  palace  of 
Cortes  was  built  of  hewn  stone,  and  seven  thousand  cedar 
beams  are  said  to  have  been  used  for  the  interior. 

Cortes  also  had  a  strong  fortress  built.  When  it  was 
finished,  he  found  himself  in  need  of  artillery  and  ammu 
nition.  His  enemies  in  Spain  prevented  the  sending  of 
supplies,  so  he  had  cannon  cast  in  his  own  foundries, 
made  of  the  copper  which  was  common  in  Mexico  and  of 
tin  which  came  from  more  distant  mines.  With  these 
and  a  few  brought  from  the  ships,  he  soon  had  the  walls 
mounted  with  seventy  pieces  of  ordnance.  Stone  balls 
were  used  for  the  cannon.  Nitre  for  making  powder  was 
easily  found  and  sulphur  was  brought  from  the  crater  of 
a  volcano. 

To  bring  inhabitants  to  the  city,  Cortes  made  liberal 
grants  of  land  and  houses  to  the  Spaniards.  About  two 
thousand  Spanish  families  settled  in  the  City  of  Mexico, 
besides  three  thousand  native  families.  The  natives  were 
allowed  to  live  under  their  own  chiefs  and  given  many 
privileges.  Markets  were  established,  displaying  all  the 
different  products  and  manufactures  of  the  surrounding 
country.  Colonies  were  made  in  different  parts  of  the 
country.  A  system  of  slavery  was  thought  necessary  to 
secure  workmen.  The  Tlascalans,  in  gratitude  for  their 


216  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

services,  were  not  enslaved.  In  order  to  encourage  agri 
culture  Cortes  asked  that  all  vessels  coming  over  from 
Spain  should  bring  seeds  and  plants.  Under  the  sun  of 
the  tropics,  the  peach,  the  almond,  the  orange,  the  vine, 
and  the  olive,  before  unknown  there,  flourished  in  the 
gardens  of  the  table-land. 

Cortes  did  not  give  up  the  idea  of  further  discovery  and 
conquest.  It  was  very  desirable  that  a  strait  should  be 
found  connecting  the  two  oceans.  He  was  fitting  out  a 
fleet  on  the  Pacific  coast  to  explore  the  shore  of  that  great 
sea,  but,  when  nearly  completed,  it  was  burned  in  the 
dockyards.  Cortez  at  once  began  to  repair  the  loss.  He 
writes  to  the  emperor  that  another  squadron  will  soon  be 
got  ready  at  the  same  port,  and  "he  doubts  not  will  put 
his  Majesty  in  possession  of  more  lands  and  kingdoms 
than  the  nation  has  ever  heard  of."  Cortes  wrote  further 
to  Charles  V,  "Your  Majesty  may  be  assured,  that,  as  I 
know  how  much  you  have  at  heart  the  discovery  of  this 
great  secret  of  a  strait,  I  shall  postpone  all  interests  and 
projects  of  rny  own,  some  of  them  of  the  highest  moment, 
for  the  fulfilment  of  this  great  object." 

For  this  purpose  a  fleet  was  sent  along  the  eastern  coast 
under  the  command  of  Olid,  one  of  Cortes'  brave  officers. 
He  was  to  plant  a  colony  on  the  northern  coast  of  Hon 
duras  and  explore  the  coast  farther  south.  Hearing  that 
Olid  was  acting  too  independently,  Cortes  sent  a  trusty 


HERNANDO   CORTES  217 

Kinsman  to  arrest  him.  Not  getting  any  news  for  a  long 
time,  Cortes  left  the  City  of  Mexico  in  the  hands  of  men 
chosen  by  him,  marched  south,  and  for  nearly  two  years 
wandered  through  mountains  and  swamps,  building 
bridges  and  suffering  extreme  hardships,  till  he  reached 
the  settlement  and  took  charge  of  it. 

When  Cortes  left  the  City  of  Mexico,  he  had  placed  the 
management  of  his  colonies  in  the  hands  of  several  men. 
Soon  after  his  departure  quarrels  arose  among  those  left 
in  charge.  Tidings  were  received  that  Cortes  and  his 
men  had  perished  in  the  -swamps.  This  news  was  readily 
believed  and  after  proclaiming  his  death  and  performing 
funeral  ceremonies  in  his  honor,  the  members  of  the  gov 
ernment  took  possession  of  his  property  and  that  of  others 
engaged  in  the  expedition. 

On  arriving  at  the  southern  settlement,  Cortes  gave 
up  all  thought  of  further  conquest  and  .soon  embarked 
for  home.  He  was  delayed  by  storms  and  sickness  and  it 
was  not  until  the  16th  of  May,  1526,  that  he  reached  San 
Juan  de  Ulloa.  He  hurried  on  to  the  capital ;  his  prog 
ress  was  a  triumphal  procession  amid  public  rejoicing. 
His  entrance  to  the  city  was  made  in  great  state.  It  was 
nearly  two  years  since  Cortes  had  left  Mexico  and  he 
was  welcomed  back  as  one  who  had  risen  from  the  dead. 

His  triumph  did  not  last  long.  In  July  he  heard  that 
his  enemies  had  been  busy  at  court  and  that  he  was  to  be 


218  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

removed  from  his  office  while  an  examination  was  made 
of  his  conduct  of  affairs.  The  bishop,  Fonseca,  who  had 
been  Columbus's  enemy,  had  listened  to  the  complaints  of 
Velasquez  and  others  who  were  envious  of  Cortes'  success, 
and  was  doing  all  he  could  to  disgrace  him.  Cortes  was 
accused  of  secreting  the  treasures  of  Montezuma  and  of 
using  for  himself  gold  which  belonged  to  the  crown.  The 
Mexicans,  during  the  siege,  had  destroyed,  buried,  or 
thrown  into  the  lake,  everything  possible,  and  the  Span 
iards  were  greatly  disappointed  upon  entering  the  city  to 
find  so  little  of  value  left.  Even  then  the  discontented 
had  hinted  that  Cortes  had  more  than  his  share  and  their 
complaints  soon  reached  his  enemies  at  court.  He  was 
accused  also  of  making  false  reports  of  the  provinces  he 
had  conquered,  so  that  he  might  defraud  the  government 
of  its  lawful  revenues.  He  had  given  offices  to  his  fa 
vorites  and  had  fortified  the  capital  and  his  own  palace 
so  that  he  might  at  any  time  throw  off  his  allegiance  to 
Spain  and  declare  himself  an  independent  sovereign  in 
New  Spain. 

Before  receiving  a  summons  from  the  king  requiring 
him  to  return,  Cortes  had  decided  to  go  to  Spain  to  ask 
justice  of  the  king.  After  a  brief  and  prosperous  voy 
age  he  entered  the  little  port  of  Valos  in  May,  1528. 
His  return  seemed  to  remove  the  prejudices  against  him 
and  he  was  shown  great  honors. 


HERNANDO   CORTES  219 

With  him  Cortes  had  brought  several  Aztec  and  Tlasca- 
]an  chiefs,  among  them  a  son  of  Montezuma.  He  had  also 
a  large  collection  of  plants  and  minerals,  as  specimens  of 
the  natural  resources  of  the  country,  several  wild  ani 
mals  and  birds  of  gaudy  plumage,  various  fabrics  of  deli 
cate  workmanship,  especially  the  gorgeous  feather-work, 
and  lastly  a  rich  treasure  of  jewels,  gold,  and  silver. 
After  some  delay  he  reached  Toledo,  where  he  was  ad 
mitted  to  an  audience  by  the  emperor.  The  emperor  re 
ceived  him  kindly  and  asked  him  many  questions  about 
the  country  he  had  conquered.  He  seemed  pleased  with 
the  answers  and  consulted  Cortes  on  the  best  mode  of 
governing  the  new  colonies.  Several  important  changes 
were  made  according  to  Cortes'  advice. 

In  July,  1529,  the  emperor  made  Cortes  Marquis  of  the 
Valley  of  Oaxaca  and  granted  him  a  vast  tract  of  land  in 
the  province,  together  with  large  estates  in  the  City  of 
Mexico.  This  grant  was  made  because  of  his  services  to 
the  crown  and  because  it  is  "  the  duty  of  princes  to  honor 
and  reward  those  who  serve  them  well  and  loyally,  in 
order  that  the  memory  of  their  great  deeds  should  be  per 
petuated,  and  others  be  incited  by  their  example  to  the 
performance  of  the  like  illustrious  exploits."  Though 
willing  to  show  Cortes  these  honors  the  emperor  refused 
to  reinstate  him  as  governor.  He  did,  however,  make 
him  Captain  General  of  New  Spain  and  the  South  Sea, 


220  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

He  encouraged  him  to  make  further  discoveries  and  prom 
ised  him  that  he  should  be  governor  of  any  new  countries 
that  he  might  find.  In  the  spring  of  1530  Cortes  em 
barked  for  New  Spain.  With  him  he  took  his  bride,  the 
young  and  beautiful  daughter  of  one  of  the  nobles  who 
had  been  his  friend  at  court.  To  her  he  gave  a  beautiful 
jewel  of  five  emeralds,  of  wonderful  size  and  brilliancy, 
doubtless  a  part  of  the  treasure  of  Montezuma  that  had 
escaped  the  wreck  of  "the  melancholy  night."  For  a  while 
after  reaching  his  estates  he  devoted  himself  to  their  cul 
tivation,  but  this  did  not  long  content  his  restless  and 
adventurous  spirit.  In  the  years  1532  and  1533  Cortes 
fitted  out  two  squadrons  that  were  sent  on  a  voyage  of 
discovery  to  the  northwest.  The  peninsula  of  California 
was  reached  by  one  of  these  squadrons  and  a  landing 
made  on  its  southern  point.  In  1539  another  expedition 
sent  out  by  him  went  to  the  head  of  the  Gulf  of  California, 
then  doubling  the  peninsula,  followed  the  coast  as  far  north 
as  the  twenty-eighth  or  twenty-ninth  degree  of  latitude. 

Cortes  now  decided  to  fit  out  another  expedition  for  the 
purpose  of  seeking  a  country  in  the  north,  where  it  was 
said  great  gold-fields  existed.  But  Mendoza,  who  at  this 
time  controlled  affairs  in  New  Spain,  wanted  the  glory  of 
this  discovery  for  himself  and  objected  to  Cortes'  plan. 
Cortes  decided  to  go  again  to  Spain  for  justice.  In  1540, 
with  his  eight-year-old  son  and  heir,  Don  Martin,  he 


HERNANDO   CORTES  221 

sailed  for  his  native  land.  Keaching  the  capital,  he  found 
the  emperor  absent  from  the  country.  Although  he  was 
kindly  received,  nothing  was  done  to  right  his  wrongs. 
After  waiting  a  year  Cortes  joined  an  expedition  against 
Algiers.  To  his  disgust  nothing  was  accomplished  in 
this  attack  upon  the  Corsairs.  During  a  storm  the  ves 
sel  in  which  he  and  his  son  had  embarked  was  wrecked 
and  their  lives  were  saved  by  swimming.  At  this  time 
the  valuable  jewels  he  carried  with  him  were  lost,  —  "a 
loss,"  says  an  old  writer,  "  that  made  the  expedition  fall 
more  heavily  on  the  Marquis  of  the  Valley  than  on  any 
other  man  in  the  kingdom  except  the  emperor." 

After  the  expedition  returned  to  Castile,  Cortes  lost  no 
time  in  laying  his  case  before  the  emperor.  But  the  em 
peror  received  him  coldly.  Cortes  was  growing  old  and 
was  not  likely  to  be  of  future  service  to  the  country.  His 
undertakings,  since  his  former  visit,  had  been  singularly 
unfortunate.  Then  Peru  was  returning  so  much  more 
wealth  from  her  gold  mines  than  had  as  yet  come  from 
the  mines  of  Mexico  that  his  former  successes  did  not 
seem  so  wonderful.  In  vain  Cortes  wrote  to  the  emperor 
asking  for  attention  to  bis  suit.  After  three  years  of 
weary  waiting  he  decided  to  return  to  Mexico.  With  his 
son  he  had  gone  as  far  as  Seville  when  he  fell  ill  of 
indigestion,  caused,  probably,  by  mental  trouble.  He 
sank  rapidly,  and  on  the  2d  of  December,  1547,  he  died. 


CHAPTER  X 

PONCE  DE  LEON 

PONCE  DE  LEON  came  with  Columbus  on  the  latter's 
second  voyage  to  America.  He  served  as  a  soldier  in 
Cuba  and  other  parts  of  the  West  Indies  and  was  deemed 
worthy  to  be  put  in  charge  of  the  conquest  of  Porto  Rico. 
He  had  been  many  years  among  the  beautiful  islands 
of  the  West  and  was  growing  old.  Rumors  came  to 
him  of  a  marvellous  land  of  wealth  lying  to  the  north, 
where  gold  and  treasures  were  in  plenty,  —  a  land  of  lakes 
and  rivers,  among  whose  glades  was  a  spring  fabled  to 
possess  the  power  of  making  an  old  man  young  again. 

In  the  year  1512  the  king  of  Spain  gave  to  Ponce  de 
Leon  the  right  "  to  proceed  to  discover  and  settle  the 
Island  of  Bimini."  This  was  a  name  given  by  the  Ind 
ians  to  a  large  tract  of  land  which  they  said  lay  to  the 
north  of  them,  upon  which  the  fountain  of  youth  was  to 
be  found.  Some  trouble  with  the  Indians  in  Porto  Rico 
delayed  Ponce  de  Leon  for  a  time,  and  it  was  not  until 
March,  1513,  that  he  sailed  from  Porto  Rico  with  three 
vessels  in  search  of  this  land  of  promise.  He  first  sailed 
among  the  groups  of  the  Bahama  Islands,  searching  for 

222 


PONCE    DE   LEON 


223 


the  Island  of  Bimini ;  but  not  finding  an  island  that  ful 
filled  his  hopes,  he  turned  toward  the  northwest  across 
the  narrow  seas  separating  him  from  a  larger  land. 
"  One  Sunday,  the  27th  of  March,  1513,  he  sighted  an 
unknown,  low-lying  coast.  It  was  covered  with  a  heavy 
growth  of  rich  foliage,  and  flowering  vines,  even  at  this 
early  season,  spread  themselves  over  and  among  the 
trees,  and  the  whole  land  was  full  of  beauty  and  fra 
grance.  He  happened  to  sight  the  land  on  Easter  Sun 
day,  called  in  Spanish  Pascua  Florida,  and  named  it 
Florida. 

Sailing  slowly  up  the  coast,  on  the  2d  of  April  he 
landed  (in  latitude  30°  8',ja  little  above  St.  Augustine. 
As  usual,  he  planted  a 
cross  and  went  through 
the  ceremony  of  claiming 
all  the  land  for  his  king, 
spreading  the  Spanish 
flag  to  the  breeze  and 
promising  obedience. 

After  this  ceremony 
the  vessels  sailed  south 
ward.  They  followed  ROUTE  OF  PONCE  DE  LEON 

the  coast  until  the  20th  of  April,  then  landed.  When 
the  vessels  tried  to  sail  away  again,  they  met  with 
so  strong  a  current  that  they  could  not  go  on  and 


224  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

were  forced  to  anchor.  One  of  the  vessels  was  driven 
out  of  sight.  Landing  as  soon  as  possible,  the  Spaniards 
found  the  natives  so  unfriendly  that  they  had  to 
drive  them  away.  Finally  getting  away  from  this 
point,  they  sailed  around  the  southern  part  of  Florida 
and  along  the  western  coast  as  far  north  as  Tampa  Bay 
and  possibly  farther. 

During  this  time  Ponce  de  Leon  made  several  trips 
inland.  But  on  account  of  its  flat  and  swampy  char 
acter  the  country  was  not  easily  surveyed.  The  thickets 
of  woods  and  vines  and  the  oozy  marshlands  made  it 
hard  to  get  about  and  there  was  no  sign  of  cities  or  of 
a  wealthy  kingdom.  The  fabled  spring  did  not  appear  at 
all.  The  people  dwelling  in  this  new  country  showed 
themselves  fierce  and  unfriendly.  In  fact  they  were 
quite  dangerous  and  the  Spaniards  had  constantly  to  be 
on  guard  against  them. 

It  was  September  when  Ponce  de  Leon  again  reached 
Porto  Rico.  It  is  said  that  while  among  the  Bahamas 
he  sent  a  ship  under  one  of  his  captains  and  his  pilot, 
who  as  a  boy  had  sailed  with  Columbus,  to  look  still 
further  for  Bimini;  and  these  people  when  they  came 
back  thought  they  had  found  the  island  but  they  did 
not  find  the  fountain  of  youth. 

Ponce  de  Leon  was  so  well  pleased  with  his  discovery 
that  he  soon  after  went  to  Spain  to  tell  the  king  of  the 


PONCE   DE   LEON 


225 


beautiful  country  he  had  found,  and  to  get  permission  to 
conquer  and  settle  it.  His  request  was  granted  and  he 
was  appointed  governor  of  the  new  colonies.  After  he 
had  subdued  the  Caribs  who  were  making  trouble  at 
that  time,  he  was  to  take  the  vessels  and  men  used 
in  that  service  to  help  in  the  conquest  and  settlement 
of  "  the  Island  of  Bimini  and  the  Island  of  Florida." 
But  the  Carib  war  lasted  much  longer  than  was  ex 
pected  and  Ponce  de  Leon  was  kept  busy  for  a  number 


EARLY   SPANISH   SETTLEMENT   IN   FLORIDA 

of  years  before  he  could  prepare  for  his  second  visit  to 
Florida.  In  the  meantime  several  exploring  trips  had 
been  made  by  various  Spaniards  along  both  the  east  and 
west  coasts  of  Florida,  and  it  had  been  found  that 
Florida  is  not  an  island,  but  a  large  region  of  country 
which  might  contain  in  the  interior  the  rich  kingdoms  of 


226  PIONKKKS    ON     LAM)    AND    SEA 

which  the  Spaniards  had  heard.  Cortes  had  lately  dis 
covered  a  rich  empire  in  Mexico  and  Ponce  De  Leon, 
though  getting  quite  old,  thought  he  might  still  conquer 
such  a  kingdom  and  leave  a  great  name. 

It  was  in  February,  1521,  that  Ponce  de  Leon  at  last 
set  out  for  his  province.  "He  went  prepared  to  settle, 
carrying  clergymen  for  the  colonists,  friars  to  found 
Indian  missions,  and  horses,  cattle,  sheep,  and  swine." 
After  enduring  severe  storms,  he  landed  again  on  the 
east  coast  and  had  himself  proclaimed  its  master.  But 
the  fierce  tribes  had  no  disposition  to  acknowledge  his 
authority.  They  attacked  his  company  with  such  bold 
ness  and  success  that  they  killed  many  Spaniards  and 
even  wounded  the  governor  himself.  Discouraged  by 
this  hostility  of  the  natives  and  suffering  severely  with 
his  wound,  the  old  man  decided  to  abandon  the  attempt. 
He  sailed  back  to  Cuba  where,  sick  and  heartbroken,  he 
soon  afterward  died.  His  son  inherited  his  rights  but 
made  no  attempt  to  take  possession  of  them  by  conquer 
ing  Florida. 

1  Winsor's  '<  Narrative  and  Critical  History  of  America,"  Vol.  II,  p.  236. 


CHAPTER  XI 


- 


GEORGE  WASHINGTON* 

George  Washington  was  born,  in  the  year  1732, 
ms  father,  Augustine  Washington,  was  living  on  a 
plantation  near  the  Poto 
mac  River.  Soon  after  this 
time  the  house  in  which 
the  father  lived  was  burnt 
and  he  moved  with  his 
family  to  another  planta 
tion,  on  the  Rappahannock 
River,  and  here  George 
Washington  lived  until  he 
was  eleven  years  old. 

In  those  days  there  were 
no  large  towns  in  Virginia. 
The  people  lived  on  great 

MONUMENT    AT    WAKKFIELD    MARKING 

plantations  along  the  rivers  THE  BIRTHPLACE  OF  GEORGE 

where    boats    could    easily  WASHINGTON 

reach  them,  for  travelling  through  the  new  country  was 

very  difficult   except   by  water.      The   owners  of   these 

1  Authorities :    Scudder's    "George    Washington;"    living's    "Life    of 
Washington." 

227 


228  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

plantations  grew  tobacco,  which  was  in  great  demand  in 
England.  The  country  was  covered  with  trees  which 
had  to  be  cut  down  to  make  room  for  the  tobacco  fields. 
A  traveller  could  tell  when  he  was  approaching  a  planta 
tion  by  these  clearings,  or  by  the  dead  trees  which  had 
been  girdled  so  that  they  might  be  cut  away  to  clear 
ground  for  new  fields.  The  fields  were  surrounded  by  tall 
rail  fences  which  could  be  easily  moved  when  the  field 
was  made  larger. 

The  house  of  the  planter  was  usually  a  long  two-story 
building  with  a  broad  veranda  in  front  and  a  huge 
chimney  built  upon  the  outside  at  each  end.  The  halls 
and  rooms  were  large  and  were  simply  furnished.  To 
keep  the  house  cool  in  the  summer  the  kitchen  was  built 
at  some  distance  from  it.  The  owner  of  the  plantation 
was  usually  an  Englishman  who  kept  up  in  America 
as  nearly  as  possible  the  customs  of  an  English  country 
house. 

Not  far  from  the  house  one  could  see  what  looked  like 
a  small  village.  A  great  many  people  were  needed  to 
work  the  tobacco  fields.  The  plants  while  growing  had 
to  be  pruned  once  a  week  and  a  worm  which  ate  the 
plant  had  to  be  picked  from  it.  The  planter  found  it 
very  convenient  to  keep  negro  slaves  to  do  the  work 
of  the  plantation,  and  these  slaves  lived  in  the  small  huts 
near  the  master's  house. 


GEORGE   WASHINGTON  229 

As  there  were  no  markets  where  the  planter  could 
buy  the  things  necessary  to  farm  with  and  to  provide 
for  so  large  a  household,  each  plantation  furnished  its 
own  supplies.  There  were  workshops  where  the  negro 
carpenters,  smiths,  shoemakers,  and  tailors  worked ; 
smoke-houses  where  meat  was  smoked  and  hams  cured. 
Down  by  a  brook  would  be  found  a  spring-house  where 
milk  and  butter  and  eggs  were  kept  cool  in  buckets 
standing  in  running  water.  There  were  also  large 
wooden  buildings  where  the  tobacco  was  hung  upon 
poles  to  dry  in  the  sun  and  air ;  and  there  were  mills 
for  grinding  wheat  and  Indian  corn,  of  which  large 
fields  were  cultivated  for  the  use  of  the  family  and  the 
negro  slaves.  The  good  furniture,  silver,  china,  wines, 
and  clothing  were  brought  over  from  England  in  the 
ships  that  carried  back  the  tobacco  in  exchange. 

Although  the  owner  of  the  plantation  kept-  an  over 
seer  to  look  after  the  negroes  and  the  work  planned 
for  them,  he  was  by  no  means  an  idle  man.  He  spent 
much  of  his  time  riding  about  his  plantation  seeing 
that  the  work  was  well  done  and  what  improvements 
could  be  made.  Then  his  accounts  must  be  looked  after 
and  that  meant  no  light  task  in  so  large  a  household. 
His  stock  took  much  care,  for  he  always  had  many 
fine  horses  in  his  stables  and  each  planter  was  anxious 
to  have  the  best.  Good  dogs  were  kept  for  the  hunt, 


230  PIONEERS   ON  LAND  AND  SEA 

which  not  only  was  a  favorite  amusement,  but  added 
much  to  the  household  stores,  for  the  woods  abounded 
with  deer  and  other  game. 

Amid  such  surroundings  George  Washington  lived 
much  of  his  life.  As  a  child  he  went  to  school  to  a 
man  named  Hobby,  who  was  sexton  of  the  parish  church. 
Here  he  learned  to  read,  write,  and  cipher.  Among  his 
playmates  was  a  boy  named  Richard  Henry  Lee,  who 
wrote  to  him  when  the  boys  were  about  nine  years  old: 

" Richard  Henry  Lee  to  George  Washington: 
"  Pa  brought  me  two  pretty  books  full  of  pictures  he 
got  them  in  Alexandria  they  have  pictures  of  dogs  and 
cats  and  tigers  and  elefants  and  ever  so  many  pretty 
things  cousin  bids  me  send  you  one  of  them  it  has  a 
picture  of  an  elefent  and  a  little  Indian  boy  on  his 
back  like  uncle  jo's  sam  pa  says  if  I  learn  my  tasks 
good  he  will  let  uncle  jo  bring  me  to  see  you  will  you 
ask  your  ma  to  let  you  come  to  see  me. 

"  RICHARD  HENRY  LEE." 

"  George  Washington  to  Richard  Henry  Lee : 
"  Dear  Dickey,  I  thank  you  very  much  for  the  pretty 
picture-book  you  gave  me.  Sam  asked  me  to  show  him 
the  pictures  and  I  showed  him  all  the  pictures  in  it; 
and  I  read  to  him  how  the  tame  elephant  took  care 
of  the  master's  little  boy,  and  put  him  on  his  back  and 


GEORGE   WASHINGTON  231 

would  not  let  anybody  touch  his  master's  little  son.  T 
can  read  three  or  four  pages  sometimes  without  missing 
a  word.  Ma  says  I  may  go  to  see  you,  and  stay  all  day 
with  you  next  week  if  it  be  not  rainy.  She  says  I 
may  ride  my  pony  Hero  if  Uncle  Ben  will  go  with  me 
and  lead  Hero.  I  have  a  little  piece  of  poetry  about 
the  picture  book  you  gave  me,  but  I  mustn't  tell  you 
who  wrote  the  poetry. 

"  G.  W.'s  compliments  to  E.  H.  L., 
And  he  likes  his  book  full  well, 
Henceforth  will  count  him  his  friend, 
And  hopes  many  happy  days  he  may  spend. 

"  Your  good  friend, 

"  GEORGE  WASHINGTON. 

"  I  am  going  to  get  a  whip  top  soon,  and  you  may  see 
it  and  whip  it." 

"  Kichard  Henry  Lee's  letter  was  probably  sent  just  as 
it  was  written,  but  George  Washington's  letter  looks  as 
if  it  had  been  corrected  by  a  careful  mother  or  teacher, 
and  copied  before  it -was  sent."1 

When  George  Washington  was  eleven  years  old  his 
father  died  and  he  was  left  to  his  mother's  care.  She 
was  a  woman  well  able  to  care  for  herself  and  her  chil 
dren.  Her  son  was  like  her  in  many  ways.  From  her 

1  Scudder's  "  George  Washington." 


232  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

he  got  his  high  temper  and  from  her  he  learned  to  con 
trol  it.  She  taught  him  many  useful  things  and  gave 
him  many  excellent  rules  to  guide  him ;  but  she  herself, 
honest,  high-spirited,  and  truthful,  helped  the  boy  more 
than  the  rules  she  gave  him. 

There  is  a  story  told  of  George  Washington's  boy 
hood  that  shows  the  character  of  both  mother  and  son. 
The  father  had  kept  many  fine  horses.  The  mother 
was  anxious  to  keep  the  stock  pure  and  took  much  in 
terest  in  their  care.  Among  them  were  several  colts 
that  were  not  yet  broken.  -  One  of  them,  a  "  sorrel," 
was  thought  to  be  very  vicious.  One  morning  George 
Washington,  with  several  other  boys,  went  out  to  the 
pasture  to  see  these  colts.  Washington  told  the  boys 
that  he  would  ride  the  sorrel  if  they  would  help  him 
to  catch  it.  They  soon  surrounded  the  colt  and  suc 
ceeded  in  getting  the  bit  into  its  mouth.  Washington 
mounted  and  away  the  angry  animal  went.  It  made 
every  possible  effort  to  throw  its  burden  but  the  rider 
kept  his  seat,  never  once  losing  his  control  of  the  ani 
mal  nor  of  himself.  Suddenly,  as  if  determined  to  rid 
itself  of  its  rider,  the  colt  sprang  into  the  air  with  a 
great  bound.  The  effort  broke  a  blood-vessel  and  it 
dropped  dead. 

The  boys  were  frightened  and  when  at  breakfast  the 
mother,  knowing  that  they  had  been  in  the  field,  began 


GEORGE   WASHINGTON  233 

to  ask  after  her  stock,  no  one  liked  to  speak.  She 
repeated  her  question.  "Have  you  seen  my  blooded 
colts  in  your  rambles  ?  I  hope  they  are  well  taken  care 
of.  My  favorite,  I  am  told,  is  as  large  as  his  sire." 

"The  sorrel  is  dead,  madam,"  said  her  son.  "I 
killed  him."  Then  he  told  all  that  had  happened  that 
morning.  The  mother,  upon  hearing  the  adventure, 
flushed  with  anger,  but  controlling  herself,  said  quietly, 
"  It  is  well ;  but  while  I  regret  the  loss  of  my  favorite, 
I  rejoice  in  my  son  who  always  speaks  the  truth."  l 

George  Washington  was  a  strong,  active  boy,  fond  of 
outdoor  sports.  He  took  an  active  part  in  the  games 
that  were  common  then,  —  he  pitched  heavy  bars,  tossed 
quoits,  ran,  leaped,  and  wrestled.  His  playmates  used 
to  show-  the  place  by  the  Rappahannock,  near  Fred- 
ericksburg,  where  he  stood  and  threw  a  stone  to  the 
opposite  bank.  At  the  Natural  Bridge  in  Virginia,  they 
always  tell  that  George  Washington  threw  a  stone  to 
the  top  of  the  arch,  which  is  two  hundred  feet  high. 
One  of  the  favorite  games  was  war,  for  the  boys  heard 
much  of  the  wars  with  France  and  of  the  fights  with  the 
Indians.  As  George  Washington  was  a  generous,  fair- 
minded  boy,  he  was  often  chosen  leader  in  the  sports. 
He  formed  a  military  company,  which  he  drilled  with 
care.  From  his  brother,  Lawrence,  who  had  joined  the 

1  Scudder's  "  George  Washington.1' 


234  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

British  army  in  the  West  Indies  for  a  time,  he  learned 
much  of  military  tactics  and  used  his  knowledge  in 
training  his  comrades  at  school. 

This  brother,  Lawrence,  had  been  sent  to  England  to 
school  when  George  was  very  young.  When  he  came 
back  George  was  seven  or  eight  years  old  and  learned 
many  things  from  the  big  brother  who  had  been  to 
England. 

Soon  after  the  father's  death  the  elder  brothers,  Law 
rence  and  Augustine,  married.  Lawrence  took  the  estate 
upon  the  Potomac,  left  him  by  his  father,  and  named  it 
Mount  Yernon  for  the  Admiral  Yernon  under  whom  he 
had  served  in  the  wars  in  the  West  Indies.  Augustine 
took  the  estate  at  Bridges  Creek  and  here  Washington 
spent  some  time  in  school,  as  the  teacher  was  better 
than  the  one  at  home.  His  education  was  plain  and 
practical.  His  manuscript  school-books  still  exist  and 
are  models  of  neatness  and  accuracy.  Before  he  was 
thirteen  years  of  age,  he  had  copied  into  a  volume  forms 
of  all  kinds  of  mercantile  and  legal  papers,  bills  of  ex 
change,  notes  of  hand,  deeds,  bonds,  and  the  like. 

At  Mount  Yernon  George  Washington  was  always  a 
welcome  visitor.  He  admired  his  brother  Lawrence  and, 
doubtless,  tried  to  imitate  him  in  many  ways.  Here 
he  heard  much  about  the  wars,  for  Lawrence  Washing 
ton  had  many  of  his  soldier  friends  for  guests,  after  he 


GEOKGE 

left  the  army.  George  decided  that  he  would  be  a 
soldier.  As  he  was  too  young  for  the  army,  being  only 
fifteen,  his  brother  got  him  a  place  in  the  navy  as 
midshipman.  When  his  luggage  was  packed  and  he 
was  ready  to  board  a  man-of-war  anchored  in  the 
Potomac,  his  mother  decided  that  she  could  not  let  her 
boy  go  to  sea.  So  the  plan  was  given  up  and  George 


AN  OLD  VIEW  OF  MOUNT  VERNON 

went  back  to  school  for  another  year.  He  spent  much 
of  this  year  studying  surveying.  In  a  new  country 
where  the  land  is  to  be  divided  among  the  settlers,  sur 
veying  is  an  important  occupation.  It  requires  exact 
ness,  a  love  of  order,  and  much  outdoor  work,  and 
George  Washington  found  it  very  attractive.  As  it 
would  be  six  years  before  he  could  come  into  the  prop 
erty  left  him  by  his  father  and  managed  by  his  mother, 


236  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

he  was  glad  to  have  something  to  do  that  would  bring 
him  in  money.  So  he  studied  geometry  and  trigonome 
try;  he  made  calculations  and  he  surveyed  all  the 
fields  about  the  schoolhouse,  plotting  them  and  setting 
down  everything  with  great  exactness. 

Near  Mount  Vernon  lived  William  Fairfax,  the  father 
of  Anne,  the  wife  of  Lawrence  Washington.  He  was 
a  man  of  education  and  wealth  and  fond  of  society. 
His  house  was  more  richly  furnished  than  those  of 
most  of  the  Virginia  planters.  The  floors  were  cov 
ered  with  carpets  and  the  rooms  were  lighted  with  wax 
candles.  Servants  in  livery  moved  about  to  wait  on  the 
guests  and  Virginia  ladies  were  fond  of  visiting  there. 

George  Washington,  coming  to  visit  his  brother  Law 
rence,  was  often  a  guest  there.  He  was  fifteen  years 
old  when  first  thrown  into  this  gay  society.  He  was 
a  reserved,  shy,  awkward  schoolboy,  but  was  so  tall, 
large-limbed,  and  serious  that  he  seemed  much  older 
than  he  really  was.  He  took  his  place  among  the  men 
in  sports  and  hunting.  The  ladies  all  liked  the  tall, 
thoughtful  boy.  It  may  be  that  for  guidance  in  this 
society  Washington  wrote  out  the  "  Rules  of  Civility 
and  Decent  Behavior  in  Company  and  Conversation," 
found  in  one  of  his  manuscript  books.  There  are  in 
all  110  rules.  A  few  will  show  what  was  expected  of 
boys  in  those  days. 


GEORGE   WASHINGTON  237 

"  Every  action  in  company  ought  to  be  with  some 
sign  of  respect  to  those  present.  When  you  meet  with 
one  of  greater  quality  than  yourself,  stop  and  retire, 
especially  if  it  be  at  a  door  or  any  strait  place,  to  give 
room  to  him  to  pass." 

u  Think  before  you  speak ;  pronounce  not  imperfectly 
nor  bring  out  your  words  too  hastily,  but  orderly  and 
distinctly." 

"Speak  not  evil  of  the  absent,  for  it  is  unjust." 

"  Make  no  show  of  taking  great  delight  in  your  vict 
uals,  feed  not  with  greediness,  cut  your  bread  with  ?, 
knife;  lean  not  on  the  table;  neither  find  fault  with 
what  you  eat." 

"Let  your  recreations  be  manful,  not  sinful." 

Here  in  Virginia  George  Washington  met  Lord  Fairfax, 
who  was  sixty  years  old,  and  who  had  come  out  to  rest 
in  the  wilderness  after  he  had  grown  tired  of  the  gay 
life  in  England.  He  liked  the  free  out-of-door  life  and 
the  excitement  of  the  hunt.  Between  him  and  the  tall, 
grave  lad  who  rode  and  hunted  so  well,  grew  up  a  strong 
friendship. 

Neither  Lord  Fairfax*  nor  his  cousin  William  knew 
the  extent  of  the  land  each  owned  beyond  the  Blue 
Ridge.  They  decided  to  have  it  surveyed  and  gave  the 
task  to  their  young  friend,  George  Washington.  George 
Fairfax,  the  son  of  William  Fairfax,  was  at  the  head 


238  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

of   the   expedition   sent   out.     He    was   six   years   older 
than  Washington    but  the  two  were  warm  friends. 

Just  a  month  after  George  Washington's  sixteenth 
birthday,  in  March,  1748,  the  two  young  men  set  out 
on  their  errand.  On  horseback  they  crossed  the  Blue 
Ridge  by  Ashby's  Gap  and  entered  the  Shenandoah 
Valley.  They  followed  the  Shenandoah  to  its  junction 
with  the  Potomac  and  then  ascended  that  river  and 
went  some  seventy  miles  up  the  South  Branch,  return 
ing  over  the  mountains.  They  had  plenty  of  adventure. 
They  camped  out  in  the  wildest  storms,  swam  their 
horses  over  swollen  streams,  and  shot  deer  and  wild  tur 
keys  which  they  cooked  upon  forked  sticks  held  over 
the  fire.  Chips  of  wood  were  used  for  dishes.  At 
one  time  their  tent  was  blown  down ;  at  another  they 
were  driven  out  of  it  by  smoke.  One  night  the  straw 
upon  which  Washington  was  sleeping  caught  fire  and  he 
was  awakened  by  a  companion  just  in  time  to  escape  a 
scorching.  At  one  place  the  travellers  saw  a  party  of 
thirty  Indians,  who  had  been  on  the  war-path,  come  in. 
"We  had  some  liquor  with  us,"  Washington  says,  "of 
which  we  gave  them  a  part.  This  elevating  their  spirits, 
put  them  in  the  humor  of  dancing."  So  they  had  a  grand 
war-dance.  Their  music  consisted  of  two  pieces,  —  a  pot 
half  full  of  water,  over  which  a  deerskin  was  stretched, 
and  a  gourd  with  some  shot  in  it  used  as  a  rattle. 


'/ut<C  <rf*  ?n-*"t« 


OPENING  PAGE  OF  WASHINGTON'S  JOURNAL  OF  HIS  JOURNEY  OVER  THB 

MOUNTAINS 


240  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

The  work  lasted  more  than  a  month.  It  was  cold 
and  stormy  much  of  the  time  and  the  young  Virginian 
felt  many  discomforts.  But  he  was  glad  to  earn  his 
own  living.  He  was  paid  according  to  the  amount  of 
work  he  did  and  sometimes  earned  as  much  as  $20 
a  day.  His  work  was  so  well  done  that  soon  after 
his  return  the  governor  of  Virginia  made  him  public 
surveyor.  This  meant  that  his  surveys  were  to  be 
recorded  and  to  stand  as  authority  when  lands  were 
bought  and  sold.  It  was  necessary  that  the  work 
should  be  carefully  done.  People  soon  found  that  the 
young  surveyor  made  no  mistakes,  and  he  had  all  the 
work  he  could  do. 

For  three  years  he  carried  on  this  work,  spending 
much  of  his  time  in  the  wilderness  where  he  became 
well  acquainted  with  the  rough  life  of  the  backwoods 
men,  and  learned  much  of  the  habits  of  the  Indians. 
During  the  winter  months,  when  it  was  too  cold 
to  work  out  of  doors,  he  visited  his  mother  and 
friends  or  read  the  books  of  his  friend,  Lord  Fairfax. 

While  most  of  the  English  lived  east  of  the  Alle- 
ghany  Mountains,  a  few  had  explored  the  land  west  of 
the  mountains,  had  hunted  and  traded  with  the 
Indians  along  the  valley  of  the  Ohio  River,  and  de 
cided  that  it  would  be  well  for  the  English  to  possess 
the  land  and  the  friendship  of  the  Indians.  The 


GEORGE    WASHINGTON  241 

French  who  lived  along  the  St.  Lawrence  had  made 
friends  of  the  northern  tribes  and  of  those  along  the 
Mississippi,  and  had  tried  to  gain  the  good-will  of  those 
tribes  who  lived  along  the  Ohio.  They  claimed  this 
country  because  they  had  explored  the  Mississippi  and 
they  said  that  all  the  land  along  this  river  and  its 
tributaries  belonged  to  them.  The  English  said  all  the 
country  between  the  Mississippi  River  and  the  Atlantic 
Ocean  was  theirs  because  they  had  conquered  the  Ind 
ians  that  owned  it,  and  these  Indians  had  granted 
them  the  land  upon  the  payment  of  ,£400.  A  number 
of  men,  among  them  Washington's  two  brothers,  got  a 
grant  from  the  king,  giving  them  the  country  along 
the  Ohio  and  its  tributaries  for  settlement  and  to 
carry  on  trade  with  the  Indians. 

The  French  paid  no  attention  to  the  claims  of  the 
British  and  took  possession  of  the  country  in  the  name 
of  their  king.  The  English  soon  saw  that  they  would 
have  to  settle  the  dispute  by  war  and  began  to  form 
companies  and  train  men  for  service.  Lawrence  Wash 
ington  was  not  well  enough  to  take  an  active  part  in 
the  preparation  for  war,  but  through  his  influence  his 
brother  George  was  made  military  commander  of  one 
of  the  districts  into  which  the  colony  was  divided. 
His  duty  was  to  bring  the  men  together  and  train 
them  for  service.  He  himself  took  lessons  in  the  art 


242  PIONEERS    ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

of  war  from  an  old  friend  of  his  brother.  He  read 
books  upon  military  tactics  and  took  lessons  in  fencing 
from  another  friend,  a  Dutchman  named  Von  Braam. 

The  French,  with  their  Indian  allies,  still  claimed 
the  valley  of  the  Ohio  and  built  a  chain  of  forts  from 
the  Mississippi  to  Lake  Erie.  The  governor  of  Vir 
ginia  decided  to  send  a  message  to  the  commander  of 
a  French  fort  on  Lake  Erie,  stating  the  English  claim 
and  asking  the  French  to  leave  the  country  belonging 
to  the  English.  The  way  to  Lake  Erie  was  a  long 
and  dangerous  one  and  it  was  important  that  the  man 
sent  on  this  mission  should  be  strong,  brave,  and 
skilled  in  woodcraft.  It  was  decided  that  George 
Washington,  though  he  was  only  twenty-one  years 
old,  was  the  most  suitable  person  to  send  and  the 
commission  was  given  to  him. 

Washington  left  Williamsburg  on  the  thirteenth,  day 
of  October.  He  stopped  at  Fredericksburg  for  his  friend, 
Von  Braam,  who  was  to  act  as  his  interpreter.  Wash 
ington  knew  no  French,  while  his  old  master  of  fencing 
claimed  to  know  it  well,  and  it  was  not  until  later  that 
Washington  found  that  he  knew  neither  French  nor 
English  very  well.  At  Alexandria  Washington  laid 
in  the  necessary  supplies  for  such  a  journey ;  and  at 
Winchester,  on  the  frontier,  he  provided  himself  with 
horses  and  tents.  At  Wills  Creek,  now  Cumberland,  in 


GEORGE    WASHINGTON  24o 

Maryland,  he  was  joined  by  Christopher  Gist,  an  ex 
perienced  woodsman,  an  Indian  interpreter,  and  four 
frontiersmen.  On  the  15th  of  November  the  party 
started  for  Logstown,  an  Indian  village  not  far  from 
the  present  site  of  Pittsburg.  Here  they  met  several 
Indian  chiefs,  who  promised  their  friendship  and  gave 
an  escort  to  the  French  fort.  The  weather  was  bad  and 
they  suffered  many  delays  but  finally  reached  the  fort. 
Here  Washington  was  politely  received,  and  after  some 
delay  an  answer  was  given  him  to  return  to  the  governor 
of  Virginia,  and  his  party  started  home. 

The  horses  had  grown  so  weak  with  the  hard  journey 
and  lack  of  food  that  they  carried  only  the  necessary  sup 
plies  while  Washington  and  his  men  walked.  So  slowly 
did  they  travel  that  Washington  and  Gist  decided  to  go 
on  alone  across  the  country  the  shortest  way  to  Virginia. 
An  Indian  guide  who  started  with  them  fired  upon  them 
soon  after  they  left  the  path.  They  pretended  to  think 
the  firing  was  an  accident  but  sent  the  Indian  home 
that  night.  Fearing  that  he  would  rally  his  friends  and 
pursue  them,  they  walked  all  night  and  the  next  day, 
reaching  the  Ohio  River  at  dark.  Here  they  rested  over 
night. 

They  had  expected  to  find  the  river  frozen  over  but  it 
was  frozen  only  near  the  shore,  while  the  centre  was  full 
of  great  blocks  of  floating  ice.  "  There  was  no  way  of 


244  PIONEERS   ON    LAND    AND   SEA 

getting  over,"  says  Washington  in  his  journal,  "  but  on  a 
raft,  which  we  set  about,  with  but  one  poor  hatchet,  and 
finished  just  after  sun-setting.  This  was  a  whole  day's 
work ;  we  next  got  it  launched,  then  went  on  board  of  it, 
and  set  off;  but  before  we  were  halfway  over,  we  were 
jammed  in  the  ice  in  such  a  manner  that  we  expected 
every  moment  our  raft  to  sink  and  ourselves  to  perish.  I 
put  out  my  setting-pole  to  try  to  stop  the  raft,  that  the 
ice  might  pass  by,  when  the  rapidity  of  the  stream  threw 
it  with  so  much  violence  against  the  pole  that  it  jerked 
me  out  into  ten  feet  of  water ;  but  I  fortunately  saved  my 
self  by  catching  hold  of  one  of  the  raft-logs.  Notwith 
standing  all  our  efforts,  we  could  not  get  to  either  shore, 
but  were  obliged,  as  we  were  near  an  island,  to  quit  our 
raft  and  to  make  it.  The  cold  was  so  extremely  severe 
that  Mr.  Gist  had  all  his  fingers  and  some  of  his  toes 
frozen,  and  the  water  was  shut  up  so  hard  that  we  found 
no  difficulty  in  getting  off  the  island  on  the  ice  in  the 
morning."  1 

After  crossing  the  river  they  were  able  to  get  horses 
and  in  due  time  reached  Williamsburg.  Washington's 
report  of  all  that  he  had  seen  and  done  upon  this  diffi 
cult  journey  pleased  the  governor  and  his  friends.  They 
felt  that  they  had  found  a  young  man  who  was  brave  and 
who  could  be  trusted. 

1  Sc udder's  "George  Washington." 


GEORGE   WASHINGTON  245 

While  on  this  journey  Washington  noticed  that  the  best 
point  for  a  fort  was  at  the  junction  of  the  Monongahela 
River  with  the  Ohio,  and  advised  the  governor  to  build  it 
in  order  to  hold  the  land  against  the  French.  The  Ohio 
Company  began  a  fort  there,  when  the  French  came  down 
the  river  with  a  force  of  about  a  thousand  men,  took 
possession,  and,  finishing  it,  called  it  Fort  Duquesne. 
The  force  of  the  English,  some  three  hundred  men  under 
Colonel  Fry,  with  Washington  as  second  in  command, 
was,  after  many  delays,  started  for  the  Ohio.  Wash 
ington,  with  a  small  body  of  men,  went  ahead  to  break 
the  path.  After  crossing  the  mountains,  he  discovered  a 
small  body  of  the  French.  Fearing  an  ambuscade,  he 
surprised  them  at  a  place  called  Great  Meadows,  and 
attacked  them,  killing  the  commander  at  the  first  fire. 
Ten  of  the  French  were  killed,  one  wounded,  and  twenty- 
one  captured.  In  a  letter  to  his  brother,  Washington 
wrote,  "I  heard  the  bullets  whistle,  and,  believe  me,  there 
is  something  charming  in  the  sound."  When  asked  many 
years  after  if  he  had  really  said  this,  he  replied,  "  If  I  said 
so,  it  was  when  I  was  young." 

Before  advancing  farther  Washington  built  a  palisaded 
fortress,  called  Fort  Necessity,  to  make  safe  his  retreat  in 
case  of  defeat.  By  the  death  of  Colonel  Fry,  Washington 
became  commander  of  the  whole  force.  He  had  been 
reenforced  by  a  small  company  of  artillery  with  nine 


246  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

swivels,  which  had  been  dragged  with  great  difficulty 
over  the  rough  roads,  He  advanced  about  thirteen  miles 
from  the  fort,  but  hearing  that  a  large  French  force  was 
coming  out  to  meet  him,  he  retreated  to  Fort  Necessity. 
Here  he  was  attacked  by  the  French  and  lost  twelve  men, 
while  forty-one  were  wounded.  The  French  loss  was 
greater,  but  as  their  force  was  much  larger,  about  four  to 
one,  and  as  the  little  garrison  was  almost  without  food, 
Washington  was  obliged  to  surrender.  His  troops  were 
allowed  to  march  out  with  the  honors  of  war.  They  took 
with  them  everything  but  their  artillery  and  made  their 
way,  in  safety,  home.  Fort  Necessity  surrendered  on  the 
4th  of  July,  1754. 

After  Washington's  return  to  Virginia  he  gave  up  his 
commission  and  went  to  Mount  Vernon,  intending  to  put 
in  his  time  looking  after  his  plantation.  His  brother, 
Lawrence,  meantime  had  died  and  had  left  him  this  estate. 
But  the  next  year  General  Braddock  was  sent  over  from 
England  with  a  large  army  to  drive  the  French  out  of  the 
Ohio  Valley. 

The  preparations  for  war  were  carried  on  actively  in 
the  neighborhood  of  Mount  Vernon.  Washington  could 
3ee  the  ships  and  transports,  carrying  men  and  arms, 
going  up  and  down  the  Potomac,  and  often  rode  over 
to  Alexandria,  where  General  Braddock  had  his  head 
quarters.  Governor  Dinwiddie  told  the  general  of 


GEOKGE   WASHINGTON  247 

Washington,  of  his  good  service,  and  his  knowledge  of 
the  country,  and  Washington  was  invited  to  join  the 
army  as  aide-de-camp.  He  accepted  at  once,  as  he  was 
anxious  to  have  the  training  in  war  under  so  experienced 
a  commander.  He  was  kindly  received  by  General 
Braddock.  He  was  surprised  at  the  preparations  that 
were  being  made  to  carry  supplies  through  the  moun 
tains,  and  remembering  the  difficulties  he  met  with  his 
scanty  stores  and  nine  swivels,  he  said  to  General  Brad- 
dock,  "If  our  march  is  to  be  regulated  by  the  slow 
movements  of  the  train,  it  will  be  tedious,  very  tedious 
indeed."  1  But  Braddock  smiled  at  him,  thinking  the 
young  provincial  officer  knew  but  little  of  the  march 
of  great  armies. 

There  were  many  delays  before  the  army  finally 
started.  It  was  almost  impossible  to  find  wagons  to 
carry  the  stores  and  the  supplies  promised  by  the 
governors  of  the  colony  were  slow  in  coming  in,  so 
that  Braddock  complained  bitterly  of  the  provincials. 
Benjamin  Franklin  came  from  Philadelphia  to  see  what 
ne  could  do  to  help  and  offered  to  get  horses  and  wagons 
from  the  German  farmers  of  Pennsylvania.  He  was 
asked  to  contract  for  150  wagons,  with  four  horses  to 
each  wagon,  and  1500  saddle  or  pack  horses  for  the 
service  of  his  Majesty's  forces. 

1  Sounder's  "  George  Washington." 


248  PIONEERS  ON    LAND  AND   SEA 

Benjamin  Franklin  writes  of  General  Braddock :  "  In 
conversation  with  him  one  day  he  was  giving  me  some 
account  of  his  intended  progress.  '  After  taking  Fort 
Duquesne  I  am  to  proceed  to  Niagara ;  and  having  taken 
that,  to  Frontenac,  if  the  season  will  allow  time ;  and 
I  suppose  it  will,  for  Duquesne  can  hardly  detain  me 
above  three  or  four  days,  and  then  I  can  see  nothing 
that  can  obstruct  my  march  to  Niagara.' 

"Having  before  resolved  in  my  mind,"  continues 
Franklin,  "  the  long  line  his  army  must  make  in  their 
march  by  a  very  narrow  road  to  be  cut  for  them  through 
the  woods  and  bushes,  and  also  what  I  had  heard  of  a 
former  defeat  of  fifteen  hundred  French  who  invaded 
the  Illinois  country,  I  had  conceived  some  doubts  and 
some  fears  of  the  event  of  the  campaign;  but  I  ven 
tured  only  to  say :  <  To  be  sure,  sir,  if  you  arrive  well 
before  Duquesne  with  these  fine  troops,  so  well  provided 
with  artillery,  the  fort,  though  completely  fortified,  and 
assisted  with  a  very  strong  garrison,  can  probably  make 
but  a  short  resistance.  The  only  danger  I  apprehend 
of  obstruction  to  your  march  is  from  the  ambuscades 
of  the  Indians,  who,  by  constant  practice,  are  dexterous 
in  laying  and  executing  them;  and  the  slender  line, 
nearly  four  miles  long,  which  your  army  must  make, 
may  expose  it  to  be  attacked  by  surprise  on  its  flanks, 
and  to  be  cut  like  thread  into  several  pieces,  which,  from 


GEORGE    WASHINGTON  249 

the  distance,  cannot  come  up  in  time  to  support  one 
another/ 

"  He  smiled  at  my  ignorance,  and  replied,  *  These 
savages  may  indeed  be  a  formidable  enemy  to  raw 
American  militia,  but  upon  the  king's  regular  and 
disciplined  troops,  sir,  it  is  impossible  they  should  make 
an  impression.'  ' 

On  the  19th  of  May  the  forces  reached  Fort  Cumber 
land.  The  two  regiments  of  one  thousand  men  from 
England  had  been  increased  by  four  hundred  men  from 
Maryland  and  Virginia,  the  troops  of  Virginia  light- 
horse  commanded  by  Captain  Stewart,  two  companies 
of  carpenters,  thirty  men  each,  with  subalterns  and  cap 
tains,  a  company  of  guides,  a  detachment  of  thirty  sailors 
with  their  officers,  and  the  remnants  of  two  independent 
companies  from  New  York,  commanded  by  Captain  Gates. 
The  Indians  who  were  to  help  them  did  not  come. 

During  the  halt  at  Fort  Cumberland,  Washington  was 
sent  to  Williamsburg  to  bring  on  £4000  for  the  mili 
tary  chest.  After  an  absence  of  two  weeks  he  returned, 
escorted  from  Winchester  by  eight  men,  "which  eight 
men,"  he  writes,  "  were  two  days  assembling,  but  I  be 
lieve  would  not  have  been  more  than  as  many  seconds 
dispersing,  if  I  had  been  attacked." 

Braddock  was  disgusted  with  the  provinces  of  Penn 
sylvania  and  Virginia  because  they  failed  to  furnish 


250  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

promptly  the  supplies,  build  the  roads  through  the 
mountains,  and  furnish  the  horses,  wagons,  and  baggage 
trains  needed  for  his  army.  Several  hundred  Indians 
had  also  been  promised  as  allies  by  Governor  Dinwiddie, 
only  about  fifty  of  whom  ever  arrived.  These  finally 
deserted  the  camp  because  they  were  not  consulted  and 
employed  in  military  affairs.  Brad  dock  tried  to  give 
the  Virginia  militia  a  strict  military  drill,  but  they  were 
so  slouchy-looking  a  set  and  so  careless  in  manner  that 
he  had  a  poor  opinion  of  them  as  soldiers. 

While  the  army  was  waiting  for  supplies  and  horses 
at  Fort  Cumberland,  Washington  had  an  opportunity 
to  see  strict  military  discipline  practised.  Each  day 
the  roll  of  the  company  was  called,  at  morning,  noon, 
and  night,  their  arms  inspected,  and  the  drills  executed. 
The  morals  of  the  camp  were  strictly  upheld,  drunken 
ness  and  theft  severely  punished,  and  the  chaplain  led 
religious  services  every  Sunday  morning  at  the  head  of 
each  regiment. 

Washington  was  chagrined  at  the  stubbornness  of 
Braddock  and  the  inability  of  the  general  and  his  officers 
to  adapt  themselves  to  the  hardships  and  necessities  of 
a  campaign  in  the  wilderness.  Braddock  had  travelled 
in  a  chariot  as  far  as  Fort  Cumberland,  attended  by 
his  staff  and  a  body-guard  of  light-horse.  Many  of 
the  best  horses  were  employed  by  the  officers  as  pack 


GEORGE  WASHINGTON  (after  a  portrait  by  C.  W.  Peale  — the  earliest  known 
portrait  of  Washington) 


252  PIONEERS   ON   LAND   AND   SEA 

animals  for  their  luxuries.  Washington  advised  Brad- 
dock  to  leave  all  but  the  most  necessary  things  and 
push  forward  rapidly.  After  leaving  Fort  Cumberland 
the  army  struggled  along  over  rough  mountain  roads, 
dragging  the  heavy  wagons  arid  cannon,  till  Braddock 
himself  began  to  see  the  value  of  Washington's  advice 
and  consulted  him  as  to  the  future  march. 

Washington  advised  that  the  army  be  divided  into 
two  parts;  the  choicest  troops,  equipped  as  lightly  as 
possible,  should  move  forward  rapidly  and  capture  Fort 
Duquesne  before  the  French  should  receive  reenforce- 
ments.  The  rest  of  the  army,  with  the  baggage  train, 
could  come  up  more  slowly  by  easy  marches.  This  was 
then  decided  upon.  But  the  officers  kept  two  hundred 
horses  for  their  private  baggage,  while  Washington,  fol 
lowing  his  own  advice,  "  retained  no  more  clothing  and 
effects  with  him  than  would  about  half  fill  a  portmanteau, 
and  gave  up  his  best  steed  as  a  packhorse,  which  he 
nevsr  heard  of  afterward." 

About  this  time  the  famous  Indian  fighter,  Captain 
Jack,  with  his  band  of  forest  rangers,  came  into  camp, 
66  equipped  with  rifle,  knife,  hunting-shirts,  leggings  and 
moccasins,  and  looking  almost  like  a  band  of  Indians. 

"  The  captain  asked  an  interview  with  the  general,  by 
whom  it  would  seem  he  was  not  expected.  Braddock 
received  him  in  his  tent  in  his  usual  stiff  and  stately 


GEORGE   WASHINGTON  253 

manner.  The  '  black  rifle '  spoke  of  himself  and  his 
followers  as  men  inured  to  hardships,  and  accustomed  to 
deal  with  Indians,  who  preferred  stealth  and  stratagem  to 
open  warfare.  He  requested  that  his  company  should  be 
employed  as  a  reconnoitring  party  to  beat  up  the  Indians 
in  their  lurking-places  and  ambuscades. 

"Braddock,  who  had  a  sovereign  contempt  for  the 
chivalry  of  the  woods  and  despised  their  boasted  strategy, 
replied  to  the  hero  of  the  Pennsylvania  settlements  in  a 
manner  to  which  he  had  not  been  accustomed.  '  There 
was  time  enough,'  he  said, '  for  making  arrangements ;  and 
he  had  experienced  troops  on  whom  he  could  completely 
rely  for  all  purposes.' 

"Captain  Jack  withdrew,  indignant  at  so  haughty  a 
reception,  and  informed  his  leathern-clad  followers  of  his 
rebuff.  They  forthwith  shouldered  their  rifles,  turned 
their  backs  upon  the  camp,  and,  headed  by  the 
captain,  departed  in  Indian  file  through  the  woods  for 
the  usual  scene  of  their  exploits  where  men  knew  their 
value."  l 

The  first  division  of  the  army  now  pushed  forward  but 
while  Braddock  had  adopted  Washington's  advice,  he  did 
not  follow  it  vigorously.  Washington  said,  "  I  found  that, 
instead  of  pushing  on  with  vigor,  without  regarding  a 
little  rough  road,  they  were  halting  to  level  every  mole- 

1  Washington  Irving's  "  Life  of  Washington." 


254  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

hill  and  to  erect  bridges  over  every  brook,  by  which 
means  we  were  four  days  in  getting  twelve  miles." 

About  this  time  Washington  was  overtaken  by  a  severe 
fever  and  headache  and  he  became  so  ill  that  he  had  to 
be  borne  in  a  covered  wagon.  At  last,  on  account  of  his 
serious  condition,  General  Braddock  required  him  to 
remain  at  one  of  the  camping-places  in  the  charge  of  a 
physician  and  with  a  sufficient  guard.  Permission  was 
granted,  however,  that  he  should  overtake  the  army 
before  the  attack  on  Fort  Duquesne. 

With  great  toil  and  effort  the  army  kept  on  the  march 
over  the  mountain  roads.  Several  stragglers  and  scouts 
were  killed  by  the  Indians.  Deserted  campfires  of  the 
French  and  Indians  were  passed.  "In  fact,  it  was 
the  Indian  boast  that  throughout  this  march  of  Braddock 
they  saw  him  every  day  from  the  mountains  and  expected 
to  be  able  to  shoot  down  his  soldiers  like  pigeons." 

For  about  ten  days  Washington  remained  in  camp  with 
his  physician,  when  he  was  rejoiced  by  the  arrival  of  a 
troop  of  a  hundred  men  bringing  provisions  to  Braddock' s 
advance  army.  Washington  now  felt  strong  enough  to 
go  with  them,  though  he  had  still  to  be  borne  in  a  covered 
wagon.  The  party  overtook  Braddock  on  the  8th  of 
July,  about  fifteen  miles  from  Fort  Duquesne. 

Braddock  had  planned  to  reach  and  attack  the  fort  the 
next  day.  The  line  of  march  made  it  necessary  to  cross 


GEORGE   WASHINGTON  255 

the  Monongahela  River  twice  at  fords  about  five  miles 
apart.  Washington,  though  still  weak  from  illness, 
mounted  his  horse  and  joined  the  general's  staff.  "  As  it 
was  supposed  the  enemy  would  be  on  the  watch  for  the 
crossing  of  the  troops,  it  had  been  agreed  that  they  should 
do  it  in  the  greatest  order,  with  bayonets  fixed,  colors 
flying,  and  drums  and  fifes  beating  and  playing.  They 
accordingly  made  a  gallant  appearance  as  they  forded  the 
Monongahela,  and  wound  along  its  banks  and  through 
the  open  forests,  gleaming  and  glittering  in  morning 
sunshine,  and  stepping  buoyantly  to  the  '  Grenadiers' 

March.'  a«aoftLibiw» 

"Washington,  with  his  keen  and  youthful  relish  for 
military  affairs,  was  delighted  with  their  perfect  order  and 
equipment,  so  different  from  the  rough  bush-fighters  to 
which  he  had  been  accustomed.  Roused  to  new  life,  he 
forgot  his  recent  ailments,  and  broke  forth  in  expressions 
of  enjoyment  and  admiration,  as  he  rode  in  company  with 
his  fellow  aides-de-camp,  Orme  and  Morris.  Often,  in 
after  life,  he  used  to  speak  of  the  effect  upon  him  of  the 
first  sight  of  a  well-disciplined  European  army,  march 
ing  in  high  confidence  and  bright  array,  on  the  eve  of  a 
battle." 

After  making  the  second  crossing  the  army  was  ar 
ranged  in  line  of  march.  Washington  had  suggested  the 
day  before  that  the  Virginia  rangers  should  be  sent  out 


256  PIONEERS   ON    LAND   AND   SEA 

to  scour  the  country  in  advance ;  but  General  Braddock 
had  rejected  the  sensible  advice.  The  road,  about  twelve 
feet  wide,  led  over  a  level  ground  skirted  by  high  grass  and 
bushes,  while  scattering  forest  trees  stood  on  both  sides. 
A  half  mile  from  the  river  a  wooded  slope  rose  to  a  range 
of  hills. 

The  vanguard  were  pushing  along  this  road  and 
reached  the  slope  of  the  hill,  when  they  were  suddenly 
attacked  by  the  French  and  Indians  in  ambuscade. 
Irving  says  :  "  The  van  of  the  advance  had  indeed  been 
taken  by  surprise.  It  was  composed  of  two  companies  of 
carpenters  or  pioneers  to  cut  the  road,  and  two  flank 
companies  of  grenadiers  to  protect  them.  Suddenly  the 
engineer  who  preceded  them  to  mark  out  the  road  gave 
the  alarm,  '  French  and  Indians  ! '  A  body  of  them  was 
approaching  rapidly,  cheered  on  by  a  Frenchman  in  gayly 
fringed  hunting-shirt,  whose  gorget  showed  him  to  be  an 
officer.  There  was  sharp  firing  on  both  sides  at  first. 
Several  of  the  enemy  fell,  among  them  their  leader ;  but 
a  murderous  fire  broke  out  among  trees  and  a  ravine  on 
the  right,  and  the  woods  resounded  with  unearthly  whoops 
and  yellings.  The  Indian  rifle  was  at  work,  levelled  by 
unseen  hands.  Most  of  the  grenadiers  and  many  of  the 
pioneers  were  shot  down.  The  survivors  were  driven  in 
on  the  advance." 

Colonel  Gage  ordered  his  men  to  advanced  with  fixed 


GEORGE   WASHINGTON  257 

bayonets  up  the  hillside  but  the  regulars  refused  to  obey. 
They  were  frightened  by  the  confusion  and  by  the  fearful 
yells  of  the  savages.  The  soldiers  fired  at  random  wherever 
they  saw  a  smoke,  as  they  could  not  see  the  enemy. 

As  soon  as  Braddock  heard  the  firing  in  front  he 
ordered  Colonel  Benton  forward  with  the  main  body,  eight 
hundred  strong.  As  they  were  forming  to  face  the  ris 
ing  ground,  the  advance  guard  fell  back  upon  them  in 
disorder  and  spread  confusion  among  them.  Braddock 
came  up  and  attempted  to  rally  his  men  and  get  them 
into  order ;  the  other  officers  also  attempted  to  form  the 
lines  but  the  men  could  not  be  prevailed  upon  to  obey 
orders.  They  fired  at  random,  killing  some  of  their  own 
men  in  advance. 

The  Virginia  troops  took  to  the  woods  in  Indian 
fashion  and  did  much  to  protect  the  regular  troops. 
Washington  urged  Braddock  to  follow  the  same  tactics 
and  distribute  his  men  in  the  woods;  but  Braddock  re 
fused  and  stormed  at  his  men  as  cowards  for  deserting 
the  ranks  and  taking  to  the  trees.  The  men  were  hud 
dled  together  and  offered  so  much  better  target  for  the 
enemy.  The  officers  conducted  themselves  with  great 
bravery.  Washington  was  surprised  to  see  them  expose 
themselves  to  the  utmost  dangers  in  trying  to  rally  the 
men  or  in  dashing  forward  to  the  attack.  Great  num 
bers  of  the  officers  were  slain. 


258  PIONEERS    ON   LAND    AND    SEA 

Washington  was  kept  very  busy.  Early  in  the  battle 
the  other  aides,  Orme  and  Morris,  were  wounded  and  dis 
abled,  so  that  Washington  had  to  move  all  about  the 
battle-ground  carrying  the  general's  orders.  Two  horses 
were  killed  under  him  and  four  bullets  passed  through 
his  coat.  The  Indians  were  constantly  directing  their 
aim  against  officers  and  men  on  horseback.  Washing 
ton,  as  he  rode  about  the  field,  was  a  striking  figure, 
and  it  is  remarkable  that  he  was  not  struck  by  the 
bullets  of  these  sharpshooters.  "At  one  time  he  was 
sent  to  the  main  body  to  bring  the  artillery  into  action. 
All  there  was  likewise  in  confusion;  for  the  Indians 
had  extended  themselves  along  the  ravine  so  as  to 
flank  the  reserve  and  carry  slaughter  into  the  ranks. 
Sir  Peter  Halket  had  been  shot  down  at  the  head  of 
his  regiment.  The  men  who  should  have  served  the 
guns  were  paralyzed.  Had  they  raked  the  ravines  with 
grapeshot  the  day  might  have  been  saved.  In  his  ardor 
Washington  sprang  from  his  horse,  wheeled  and  pointed 
a  brass  field  piece  with  his  own  hand,  and  directed  an 
effective  discharge  into  the  woods ;  but  neither  his 
efforts  nor  example  were  of  avail.  The  men  could  not 
be  kept  to  the  guns. 

66  Braddock  still  remained  in  the  centre  of  the  field, 
in  the  desperate  hope  of  retrieving  the  fortunes  of  the 
day.  The  Virginia  rangers,  who  had  been  most  efficient 


GEORGE    WASHINGTON  259 

in  covering  his  position,  were  nearly  all  killed  or  wounded. 
His  secretary,  Shirley,  had  fallen  by  his  side.  Many  of 
his  officers  had  been  slain  within  his  sight  and  many  of 
his  guard  of  Virginia  light-horse.  Five  horses  had  been 
killed  under  him;  still  he  kept  his  ground,  vainly  en 
deavoring  to  check  the  flight  of  his  men,  or,  at  least,  to 
effect  their  retreat  in  good  order.  At  length  a  bullet 
passed  through  his  right  arm  and  lodged  itself  in  his 
lungs.  He  fell  from  his  horse  but  was  caught  by  Cap 
tain  Stewart,  of  the  Virginia  guards,  who,  with  the 
assistance  of  another  American  and  a  servant,  placed 
him  in  a  tumbrel.  It  was  with  much  difficulty  they 
got  him  out  of  the  field  —  in  his  despair  he  desired  to 
be  left  there. 

"The  rout  now  became  complete.  Baggage,  stores, 
artillery,  everything,  was  abandoned.  The  wagoners 
took  each  a  horse  out  of  his  team  and  fled.  The  offi 
cers  were  swept  off  with  the  men  in  this  headlong  flight. 
It  was  rendered  more  precipitate  by  the  shouts  and  yells 
of  the  savages,  numbers  of  whom  rushed  forth  from  their 
coverts  and  pursued  the  fugitives  to  the  riverside,  kill 
ing  several  as  they  dashed  across  in  tumultuous  confu 
sion.  Fortunately  for  the  latter,  the  victors  gave  up 
the  pursuit  in  their  eagerness  to  collect  the  spoil." 

What  was  -left  of  the  army  retreated  across  the  river 
but   even   there   no   effective    force    could   be   collected. 


260  PIONEERS   ON    LAND    AND   SEA 

More  than  seven  hundred  men  had  been  killed  or 
wounded.  Out  of  eighty-six  officers  twenty-six  had 
been  killed  and  thirty-six  wounded.  The  Virginia 
troops  had  suffered  most  in  the  number  lost. 

Washington  was  sent  back  to  Dunbar's  division,  forty 
miles,  to  bring  up  provisions,  hospital  stores,  and  wagons, 
with  two  companies  for  guard.  On  July  13  Braddock 
and  his  wounded  officers  reached  Great  Meadows.  That 
night  Braddock  died  and  was  buried  quietly,  Washing 
ton  reading  the  funeral  service  over  his  grave. 

On  the  17th  Washington  arrived  with  his  wounded 
companions  at  Fort  Cumberland.  Fearing  that  his 
family  might  be  in  great  anxiety  about  him,  he  wrote 
to  his  brother  from  Fort  Cumberland.  "As  I  have 
heard,  since  my  arrival  at  this  place,  a  circumstantial 
account  of  my  death  and  dying  speech,  I  take  this 
early  opportunity  of  contradicting  the  first,  and  of  as 
suring  you  that  I  have  not  composed  the  latter.  But, 
by  the  all-powerful  dispensations  of  Providence,  I  have 
been  protected  beyond  all  human  probability  or  expecta 
tion  ;  for  I  had  four  bullets  through  my  coat  and  two 
horses  shot  under  me,  yet  escaped  unhurt,  though  death 
was  levelling  my  companions  on  every  side  of  me ! 

"  We  have  been  most  scandalously  beaten  by  a  trifling 
body  of  men,  but  fatigue  and  want  of  time  prevent  me 
from  giving  you  any  of  the  details  until  I  have  the 


GEOKGE    WASHINGTON  2(Jl 

happiness  of  seeing  you  at  Mount  Vernon,  which  I  now 
most  earnestly  wish  for,  since  we  are  driven  in  thus 
far.  A  feeble  state  of  health  obliges  me  to  halt  here 
for  two  or  three  days  to  recover  a  little  strength,  that 
I  may  thereby  be  enabled  to  proceed  homeward  with 


more  ease." 


Printed  in  the  United  States  of  America. 


'"pHE     following     pages 

contain  advertisements 

of  a  few  of  the  Macmillan 

books   on   kindred   subjects 


Methods   in  Elementary  Education 

4   SfiRIES  OP  EDUCATIONAL   BOOKS   IN   TWO  GROUPS  COVERING  THE 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  METHOD  AND  ITS  SPECIAL 

APPLICATIONS  TO  THE  COMMON  SCHOOL 

By  CHARLES  A.   McMURRY,  Ph.D. 

NORTHERN  ILLINOIS  STATE  NORMAL  SCHOOL,  DE  KALB,  ILL, 


The  Elements  of  General  Method 

Based  on  the  ideas  of  Herbart.      New  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.     Cloth,      jarao 
331  pp.     90  cents  (Postage  10  cents.) 

The  Method  of  the  Recitation 

New  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.    Cloth,     tamo.     339  pp.    ^o  cents  (Postage  ic 

cents.) 

Special    Method    in    the    Reading   of   Complete    English 
Classics  in  the  Common  Schools 

Cloth.     I2mo.     254  pp.     75  cents  (Postage  9  cents.) 

Special  Method  in  Primary  Reading  and  Oral  Work  with 
Stories 

Cloth,    i2mo,     198  pp.    60  cents  (Postage  8  cents.) 

Special  Method  in  Geography 

New  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.     Cloth,    tamo.    aa8  pp.     70  cents  (Postage 

9  cents.) 

Special  Method  in  History 

A  complete  outline  of  a  course  of  study  in  history,  for  the  grades  below  the  high  school. 
New  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.     Cloth.      lamo.     291  pp.     75  cents  (Postage 

9  cents.) 

Special  Method  in  Elementary  Science  for  the  Common 
School 

Cloth.    i2mo.     285  pp.    75  cents  (Postage  10  cent*.; 

Special  Method  in  Arithmetic 

Cloth.     iamo.    200  pp.    70  cents 

Special  Method  in  Language  in  the  Eight  Grades 

Cloth.  12010.  200  pp.  70  cents 

Type  Studies  from  the  Geography  of  the  United  States 
First  Series 

Cloth.    i2mo.    382  pp.    50  cents 

Excursions  and  Lessons  in  Home  Geography 

Goth,     izmo,     184  pp.     50  cents 


THE   MACMILLAN   COMPANY 

64-66  FIFTH  AVENUE,  NEW  YORK 


A  Short  History  of  the  United  States 

For  School  Use 

By  EDWARD   CHANNING 
Author  of  "A  Student's  History  of  the  United  States,"  etc. 

i2mo     Half  Leather     90  cents 

"  It  is  an  admirable  presentation  of  the  origin  and  growth  of  oui  nation. 
From  cover  to  cover  it  is  made  intensely  interesting,  not  only  by  striking 
illustrations  and  complete  maps,  but  by  the  arrangement  of  the  text  and  the 
facts  presented  in  a  clear,  logical  manner.  The  references  to  other  text-books 
in  history  are  a  commendable  feature.  I  fully  agree  with  the  author's  state 
ment  in  the  preface  as  to  the  best  method  of  studying  the  history  of  our 
country.11  —  N.  G.  KINGSLEY,  Principal  of  Doyle  Avenue  Grammar  School. 
Providence,  R.I. 

From  the  Old  World  to  the  New 

How  America  was  Found  and  Settled 

By  MARGUERITE   STOCKMAN   DICKSON 
Cloth      1 2 mo     With  many  Illustrations  and  Maps     50  cents 

The  book  is  well  equipped  with  maps  and  illustrations ;  with  reference 
lists  at  the  end  of  each  chapter,  indicating  further  reading,  suitable  for  chil 
dren,  and  interesting  to  them;  with  the  helps  a  busy  teacher  prizes  —  word 
lists  for  preparatory  work  in  connection  with  the  reading,  suggestions  for 
written  work  and  other  "  things  to  do."  Outlines  for  composition  work  on 
various  subjects  selected  from  each  chapter  are  a  prominent  feature  of  this 
portion  of  the  work. 

History  Reader 

For  Elementary  Schools*    Arranged  with  Special 
Reference  to  Holidays 

By  LUCY  LANGDON  WILLIAMS   WILSON,  Ph.D. 
Cloth     i6mo     Illustrated     60  cents 

"I  am  more  than  pleased  with  it.  In  my  judgment  it  is  by  far  the  best  of 
the  books  of  its  kind  that  has  come  to  my  notice.  It  shall  be  the  very  first 
to  be  put  in  our  school  for  supplementary  reading."  —  F.  A.  BRACKET,  Prin* 
cipal  of  Northeast  School,  Hartford,  Conn. 


THE    MACMILLAN   COMPANY 

66  FIFTH  AVENUE,  NEW  YORK